2006 Acura TSX Owner's Manual

Document Sample
2006 Acura TSX Owner's Manual Powered By Docstoc
					                                                                           2006 TSX
                                                                     Owner’s Manual
                                                                         (Unlinked)




This document does not contain hyperlinks and may be formatted for printing instead of web us. This is
due to changes in content and specifications of the vehicle that happen throughout the model year. This
manual will be replaced with a hyperlinked version at the end of the model year.
© 2006 Honda Motor Co., Ltd.                                                     P/N 31SEA620
Owner’s Identification

OWNER                                                                    This owner’s manual should be considered
                                                                         a permanent part of the vehicle and should
                                                                         remain with the vehicle when it is sold.

                                                                         This Owner’s Manual covers all models of
ADDRESS                                                                  the TSX. You may find descriptions of
                               STREET                                    equipment and features that are not on your
                                                                         particular model.

                                                                         The information and specifications included
           CITY              STATE/PROVINCE                  ZIP CODE/   in this publication were in effect at the time
                                                           POSTAL CODE   of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
V. I. N.                                                                 Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
                                                                         discontinue or change specifications or
                                                                         design at any time without notice and
DELIVERY DATE                                                            without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
                     (Date sold to original retail purchaser)

DEALER NAME                                  DEALER NO.

ADDRESS
                               STREET


           CITY              STATE/PROVINCE                  ZIP CODE/
                                                           POSTAL CODE
OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE
                                                                                                      Introduction

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2006 Acura TSX was a wise investment.        As you read this manual, you will
It will give you years of driving pleasure.                                       find information that is preceded by
                                                                                  a            symbol. This
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to           information is intended to help you
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and   avoid damage to your vehicle, other
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so        property, or the environment.
you can refer to it at any time.
                                                                                  California Proposition 65 Warning
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights           WARNING: This product contains
and responsibilities.                                                             or emits chemicals known to the
                                                                                  state of California to cause cancer
Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in the         and birth defects or other
instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves       reproductive harm.
your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that
your dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique     Event Data Recorders
to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be
pleased to answer any questions and concerns.                                     This vehicle is equipped with one or
                                                                                  more recording devices commonly
                                                                                  referred to as event data recorders
                                                                                  or sensing and diagnostic modules.




                                                                                                                         i
A Few Words About Safety

Your safety, and the safety of others,   You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
is very important. And operating this    including:
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility.                            Safety Labels on the vehicle.
                                           Safety Messages preceded by a safety alert symbol  and one of
To help you make informed                    three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
decisions about safety, we have              These signal words mean:
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in                                        You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
this manual. This information alerts                                      HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.                                                       You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
                                                                          HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the                                        You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
hazards associated with operating or                                      instructions.
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement.               Safety Headings such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
                                             Safety Precautions.
                                           Safety Section such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
                                           Instructions how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

                                         This entire book is filled with important safety information    please read it
                                         carefully.



ii
                                                                                                                                        Contents

Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) ................................................................................................ 4

Driver and Passenger Safety (seat belts, SRS, and child protection) ............................................................. 7

Instruments and Controls (indicators, gauges, multi-information display, dashboard, and steering column) ........ 59

Features (climate, audio, steering wheel, security, cruise control, HomeLink and other convenience items) ........ 159

Before Driving (fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading) ........................................................................ 227

Driving (engine and transmission operation).......................................................................................... 239

Maintenance (minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage).................................................. 263

Taking Care of the Unexpected (flat tire, dead battery, overheating, fuses) ................................................ 311

Technical Information (vehicle specifications, tires, fuels, and emissions controls) ....................................... 335

Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada only) (warranty and contact information)................... 349

Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) (how to order) ................................................................................... 353

Index ................................................................................................................................................. I




                                                                                                                                                            INDEX
Service Information Summary (fluid capacities and tire pressures) ................................................... last page


                                                                                                                                                      1
2
                                                                                            Overview of Contents

Contents                                  Before Driving                            Technical Information
A convenient reference to the             What gasoline to use, how to break-       ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,
sections in this manual.                  in your new vehicle, and how to load      and technical information.
                                          luggage and other cargo.
Your Vehicle at a Glance                                                            Warranty and Customer
A quick reference to the main             Driving                                   Relations
controls in your vehicle.                 The proper way to start the engine,       (U.S. and Canada only)
                                          shift the transmission, and park; plus    A summary of the warranties
Driver and Passenger Safety               what you need to know if you’re           covering your new vehicle, and how
Important information about the           planning to tow a trailer.                to contact us for any reason. Refer to
proper use and care of your vehicle’s                                               your warranty manual for detailed
seat belts, an overview of the            Maintenance                               information.
supplemental restraint system (SRS),      The maintenance minder shows you
and valuable information on how to        when you need to take your vehicle        Authorized Manuals
protect children with child restraints.   to the dealer for maintenance service.    (U.S. only)
                                          There is also a list of things to check   How to order manuals and other
Instruments and Controls                  and instructions on how to check          technical literature.
Explains the purpose of each              them.
instrument panel indicator and gauge,                                               Index
and how to use the controls on the        Taking Care of the Unexpected
dashboard and steering column.            This section covers several problems      Service Information Summary
                                          motorists sometimes experience,           A summary of the information you
Features                                  and details how to handle them.           need when you pull up to the fuel
How to operate the climate control                                                  pump.
system, the audio system, and other
convenience features.

                                                                                                                        3
Your Vehicle at a Glance


    DRIVER’S FRONT AIRBAG(P.11, 28)    INSTRUMENT PANEL (P.61)   PASSENGER’S FRONT AIRBAG (P.11, 28)
    DRIVING POSITION                   GAUGES(P.68)
    MEMORY SYSTEM
    (P.142)                                                                                        AUDIO SYSTEM
                                                                                                   (P.170)
    MIRROR CONTROLS
    (P.146)



    MASTER DOOR LOCK
    SWITCH
    (P.128)                                                                                       MASTER DOOR
                                                                                                  LOCK SWITCH
                                                                                                  (P.129)
    POWER WINDOW
    SWITCHES
    (P.147)
                                                                                                  CLIMATE CONTROL
    HOOD RELEASE                                                                                  SYSTEM
    HANDLE (P.230)                                                                                (P.160)


    TRUNK RELEASE LEVER
    (P.135)                                                                                   AUTOMATIC
    FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE                                                                    TRANSMISSION
    HANDLE (P.229)                                                                            (P.244)
                                                             PARKING BRAKE LEVER              MANUAL
    Vehicle without navigation system is shown.              (P.151)                          TRANSMISSION
                                                                                              (P.242)



4
                                                                                 Your Vehicle at a Glance




                                                                                                                      Your Vehicle at a Glance
  HEADLIGHTS/FOG LIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS           INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS             WINDSHIELD
  (P. 120-121)                                 CONTROL (P. 122)                        WIPERS/WASHERS
                                                                                       (P. 119)



                                                                                                HAZARD WARNING
  REMOTE AUDIO                                                                                  BUTTON
  CONTROL BUTTONS                                                                               (P. 123)
  (P. 200)


  MOONROOF
  SWITCH                                                                                        REAR WINDOW
  (P. 150)                                                                                      DEFOGGER BUTTON
                                                                                                (P. 123)
  VEHICLE STABILITY
  ASSIST (VSA) OFF
  SWITCH (P. 256)
       HANDSFREELINKTM BUTTONS/                         1                                       CRUISE CONTROL
                                                 HORN                                           BUTTONS
       VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS 2 (P. 212)
                                                                                                (P. 204)
                        STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT
                        LEVER (P. 124)
                                                    MULTI-INFORMATION          SEAT HEATER SWITCHES
Vehicle without navigation system is shown.         BUTTONS (P. 70, 72)        (P. 137)

 1 : To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘Acura’’ logo.
 2 : Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.
                                                                                                                  5
6
                                                                                                                  Driver and Passenger Safety

This section gives you important                            Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 22            The Passenger’s Front Airbag
information about how to protect                            Automatic Seat Belt                                        Can Pose Serious Risks .......... 38
yourself and your passengers. It                              Tensioners ................................ 23        If You Must Drive with Several
shows you how to use seat belts. It                         Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 24                  Children .................................... 40




                                                                                                                                                                           Driver and Passenger Safety
explains how your airbags work. And                       Additional Information About                              If a Child Requires Close
it tells you how to properly restrain                         Your Airbags ............................ 25             Attention ................................... 40
infants and children in your vehicle.                       Airbag System Components ....... 25                     Additional Safety Precautions .... 41
                                                            How Your Front Airbags                                Protecting Infants and
Important Safety Precautions .......... 8                     Work.......................................... 28        Small Children.......................... 42
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features........ 9                    How Your Side Airbags Work.... 32                       Protecting Infants ........................ 42
  Seat Belts ...................................... 10      How Your Side Curtain Airbags                           Protecting Small Children .......... 43
  Airbags .......................................... 11       Work.......................................... 33   Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 45
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 13                    How the SRS Indicator Works ... 34                    Installing a Child Seat ..................... 46
  1. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 13                     How the Side Airbag Off                                 Installing a Child Seat
  2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 14                   Indicator Works ....................... 34               with LATCH ............................. 47
  3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 15                 How the Passenger Airbag Off                               with a Lap/Shoulder Belt ....... 49
  4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 16                       Indicator Works ....................... 35               with a Tether ............................ 50
  5. Fasten and Position the Seat                           Airbag Service .............................. 35      Protecting Larger Children ............ 52
       Belts ...................................... 17      Additional Safety Precautions .... 36                   Checking Seat Belt Fit ................ 52
  6. Maintain a Proper Sitting                            Protecting Children General                               Using a Booster Seat ................... 53
       Position ................................. 18          Guidelines ................................. 37       When Can a Larger Child Sit
  Advice for Pregnant Women...... 19                        All Children Must Be                                       in Front ..................................... 54
  Additional Safety Precautions .... 20                       Restrained ................................ 37        Additional Safety Precautions .... 55
Additional Information About                                All Children Should Sit in the                        Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 56
     Your Seat Belts ........................ 21              Back Seat .................................. 38     Safety Labels .................................... 57
  Seat Belt System Components ... 21

                                                                                                                                                                     7
Important Safety Precautions

You’ll find many safety                  Be Aware of Airbag Hazards               Control Your Speed
recommendations throughout this          While airbags can save lives, they       Excessive speed is a major factor in
section, and throughout this manual.     can cause serious or fatal injuries to   crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
The recommendations on this page         occupants who sit too close to them,     the higher the speed, the greater the
are the ones we consider to be the       or are not properly restrained.          risk, but serious injuries can also
most important.                          Infants, young children, and short       occur at lower speeds. Never drive
Always Wear Your Seat Belt               adults are at the greatest risk. Be      faster than is safe for current
A seat belt is your best protection in   sure to follow all instructions and      conditions, regardless of the
all types of collisions. Airbags are     warnings in this manual.                 maximum speed posted.
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though         Don’t Drink and Drive                    Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
your vehicle is equipped with airbags,   Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even      Condition
make sure you and your passengers        one drink can reduce your ability to     Having a tire blowout or a
always wear your seat belts, and         respond to changing conditions, and      mechanical failure can be extremely
wear them properly (see page 17 ).       your reaction time gets worse with       hazardous. To reduce the possibility
                                         every additional drink. So don’t drink   of such problems, check your tire
Restrain All Children                    and drive, and don’t let your friends    pressures and condition frequently,
Children age 12 and under should         drink and drive, either.                 and perform all regularly scheduled
ride properly restrained in a back                                                maintenance (see page 264 ).
seat, not the front seat. Infants and
small children should be restrained
in a child seat. Larger children
should use a booster seat and a lap/
shoulder belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat
(see pages 37      55 ).

8
                                                                      Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

                                                                         Your vehicle is equipped with many
             (10) (9) (1)     (4)   (9)                                  features that work together to
       (8)                                (8)                            protect you and your passengers
                                                      (2)                during a crash.




                                                                                                                  Driver and Passenger Safety
 (3)
                                                                         Some features do not require any
                                                                         action on your part. These include a
(7)                                                                      strong steel framework that forms a
                                                                         safety cage around the passenger
                                                                         compartment; front and rear crush
                                                                         zones; a collapsible steering column;
                                                                         and tensioners that tighten the front
                                                                         seat belts in a crash.
                                                 (11)
                                                                         However, you and your passengers
                                        (7)     (6)                      can’t take full advantage of these
                                  (5)                                    features unless you remain sitting in
                                    (1) Safety Cage                      a proper position and always wear
                                    (2) Crush Zones
                                    (3) Seats and Seat-Backs             your seat belts. In fact, some safety
                                    (4) Head Restraints                  features can contribute to injuries if
                                    (5) Collapsible Steering Column      they are not used properly.
                                    (6) Seat Belts
                            (2)     (7) Front Airbags
                                    (8) Side Airbags                     The following pages explain how you
                                    (9) Side Curtain Airbags             can take an active role in protecting
                                    (10) Door Locks                      yourself and your passengers.
                                    (11) Seat Belt Tensioners


                                                                                                              9
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Seat Belts                                                                         Help keep you from being thrown
Your vehicle is equipped with seat                                                 against the inside of the vehicle
belts in all seating positions.            Not wearing a seat belt properly        and against other occupants.
                                           increases the chance of serious
Your seat belt system also includes        injury or death in a crash, even        Keep you from being thrown out
an indicator on the instrument panel       though your vehicle has airbags.        of the vehicle.
and a beeper to remind you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.      Be sure you and your                    Help keep you in a good position
                                           passengers always wear seat             should the airbags ever deploy. A
Why Wear Seat Belts                        belts and wear them properly.           good position reduces the risk of
Seat belts are the single most                                                     injury from an inflating airbag and
effective safety device for adults and                                             allows you to get the best
larger children. (Infants and smaller    When properly worn, seat belts:           advantage from the airbag.
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)                           Keep you connected to the vehicle     Of course, seat belts cannot
                                           so you can take advantage of the      completely protect you in every
Not wearing a seat belt properly           vehicle’s built-in safety features.   crash. But in most cases, seat belts
increases the chance of serious                                                  can reduce your risk of serious
injury or death in a crash, even           Help protect you in almost every      injury.
though your vehicle has airbags.           type of crash, including frontal,
                                           side, and rear impacts and            What You Should Do:
In addition, most states and all           rollovers.                            Always wear your seat belt, and
Canadian provinces require you to                                                make sure you wear it properly.
wear seat belts.



10
                                                                            Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Airbags




                                                                                                                       Driver and Passenger Safety
Your vehicle has a supplemental         Your vehicle has side airbags to help   Your vehicle also has side curtain
restraint system (SRS) with front       protect the upper torso of the driver   airbags to help protect the heads of
airbags to help protect the heads and   or a front seat passenger during a      the driver, front passenger, and
chests of the driver and a front seat   moderate to severe side impact (see     passengers in the outer rear seating
passenger during a moderate to          page 32 for more information on how     positions during a moderate to
severe frontal collision (see page      your side airbags work).                severe side impact (see page 33 for
 28 for more information on how                                                 more information on how your side
your front airbags work).                                                       curtain airbags work).



                                                                                                         CONTINUED


                                                                                                                  11
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

The most important things you need       What you should do: Always wear           The rest of this section gives more
to know about your airbags are:          your seat belt properly, and sit          detailed information about how you
                                         upright and as far back from the          can maximize your safety.
  Airbags do not replace seat belts.     steering wheel as possible while
  They are designed to supplement        allowing full control of the vehicle. A   Remember, however, that no safety
  the seat belts.                        front passenger should move their         system can prevent all injuries or
                                         seat as far back from the dashboard       deaths that can occur in a severe
  Airbags offer no protection in rear    as possible.                              crash, even when seat belts are
  impacts, or minor frontal or side                                                properly worn and the airbags deploy.
  collisions.

  Airbags can pose hazards. To do
  their job, airbags must inflate with
  tremendous force. So while
  airbags help save lives, they can
  cause minor injuries or more
  serious or even fatal injuries if
  occupants are not properly
  restrained or sitting properly.




12
                                                                                Protecting Adults and Teens

Introduction                            1.Close and Lock the Doors
The following pages provide             After everyone has entered the
instructions on how to properly         vehicle, be sure the doors are closed
protect the driver, adult passengers,   and locked.




                                                                                                                         Driver and Passenger Safety
and teenage children who are large
enough and mature enough to drive       Your vehicle has a door and trunk
or ride in the front.                   open monitor on the multi-
                                        information display to indicate when
See pages 37      55 for important      a specific door or the trunk is not
guidelines on how to properly           tightly closed. You will see the
protect infants, small children, and    appropriate light/lights and the
larger children who ride in your        message for each condition.
vehicle.
                                                                                When one or more doors are not
                                                                                tightly closed, the ‘‘DOOR OPEN’’
                                                                                message will come on.




                                                                                                        CONTINUED


                                                                                                                    13
Protecting Adults and Teens

Locking the doors reduces the           2.Adjust the Front Seats                 If you sit too close to the steering
chance of someone being thrown out                                               wheel or dashboard, you can be
of the vehicle during a crash, and it                                            seriously injured by an inflating front
helps prevent passengers from                                                    airbag, or by striking the steering
accidentally opening a door and                                                  wheel or dashboard.
falling out.

Locking the doors also helps prevent
an outsider from unexpectedly
opening a door when you come to a
stop.

See page 128 for how to lock the
doors.
                                        Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
                                        rear as possible while allowing you to
                                        maintain full control of the vehicle.
                                        Have a front passenger adjust their
                                        seat as far to the rear as possible.




14
                                                                              Protecting Adults and Teens

The National Highway Traffic Safety                                           3.Adjust the Seat-Backs
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers              Sitting too close to a front
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)           airbag can result in serious




                                                                                                                        Driver and Passenger Safety
between the center of the steering         injury or death if the front
wheel and the chest. In addition to        airbags inflate.
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the
steering wheel in and out and up and       Always sit as far back from the
down (see page 124 ).                      front airbags as possible.

If you cannot get far enough away
from the steering wheel and still        See page 138 for how to adjust the
reach the controls, we recommend         front seats.
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help.                                          Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
                                                                              comfortable, upright position,
                                                                              leaving ample space between your
                                                                              chest and the airbag cover in the
                                                                              center of the steering wheel.

                                                                              Passengers with adjustable seat-
                                                                              backs should also adjust their seat-
                                                                              back to a comfortable, upright
                                                                              position.

                                                                                                        CONTINUED


                                                                                                                   15
Protecting Adults and Teens

                                         4.Adjust the Head Restraints

  Reclining the seat-back too far                                                  Improperly positioning head
  can result in serious injury or                                                  restraints reduces their
  death in a crash.                                                                effectiveness and you can be
                                                                                   seriously injured in a crash.
  Adjust the seat-back to an
  upright position, and sit well                                                   Make sure head restraints are
  back in the seat.                                                                in place and positioned properly
                                                                                   before driving.

Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer                                              Properly adjusted head restraints
rests against the occupant’s chest                                               will help protect occupants from
reduces the protective capability of     Adjust the driver’s head restraint so   whiplash and other crash injuries.
the belt. It also increases the chance   the back of your head rests against
of sliding under the belt in a crash     the center of the restraint.            See page 139 for how to adjust the
and being seriously injured. The                                                 head restraints.
farther a seat-back is reclined, the     Have passengers adjust their head
greater the risk of injury.              restraints properly as well. Taller
                                         persons should adjust their restraint
See page 138 for how to adjust the       as high as possible.
seat-backs.




16
                                                                                    Protecting Adults and Teens

5.Fasten and Position the Seat                                                      This spreads the forces of a crash
   Belts                                                                            over the strongest bones in your
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,                                             upper body.
then tug on the belt to make sure the




                                                                                                                              Driver and Passenger Safety
belt is securely latched. Check that
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious                                                        Improperly positioning the seat
injuries in a crash.                                                                  belts can cause serious injury
                                                                                      or death in a crash.

                                                                                      Make sure all seat belts are
                                                                                      properly positioned before
                                                                                      driving.
                                          Position the lap part of the belt as
                                          low as possible across your hips,
                                          then pull up on the shoulder part of      If the seat belt touches or crosses
                                          the belt so the lap part fits snugly.     your neck, or if it crosses your arm
                                          This lets your strong pelvic bones        instead of your shoulder, you need to
                                          take the force of a crash and reduces     adjust the seat belt anchor height.
                                          the chance of internal injuries.

                                          If necessary, pull up on the belt again
                                          to remove any slack, then check that
                                          the belt rests across the center of
                                          your chest and over your shoulder.
                                                                                                             CONTINUED


                                                                                                                         17
Protecting Adults and Teens

 RELEASE BUTTONS                        Never place the shoulder portion of a   6.Maintain a Proper Sitting
                                        lap/shoulder belt under your arm or        Position
                                        behind your back. This could cause      After all occupants have adjusted
                                        very serious injuries in a crash.       their seats and put on seat belts, it is
                                                                                very important that they continue to
                                        If a seat belt does not seem to work    sit upright, well back in their seats,
                                        properly, it may not protect the        with their feet on the floor, until the
                                        occupant in a crash.                    vehicle is parked and the engine is
                                                                                off.
                                        No one should sit in a seat with an
                                        inoperative seat belt. Using a seat     Sitting improperly can increase the
                                        belt that is not working properly can   chance of injury during a crash. For
                                        result in serious injury or death.      example, if an occupant slouches,
The front seats have adjustable seat    Have your dealer check the belt as      lies down, turns sideways, sits
belt anchors. To adjust the height of   soon as possible.                       forward, leans forward or sideways,
an anchor, press and hold the release                                           or puts one or both feet up, the
buttons, and slide the anchor up or     See page 21 for additional              chance of injury during a crash is
down as needed (it has four             information about your seat belts       greatly increased.
positions).                             and how to take care of them.




18
                                                                                   Protecting Adults and Teens

In addition, an occupant who is out of    Advice for Pregnant Women                When driving, remember to sit
position in the front seat can be                                                  upright and adjust the seat as far
seriously or fatally injured in a crash                                            back as possible while allowing full
by striking interior parts of the                                                  control of the vehicle. When riding




                                                                                                                            Driver and Passenger Safety
vehicle or being struck by an                                                      as a front passenger, adjust the seat
inflating front airbag.                                                            as far back as possible.

                                                                                   This will reduce the risk of injuries
                                                                                   to both you and your unborn child
  Sitting improperly or out of                                                     that can be caused by a crash or an
  position can result in serious                                                   inflating front airbag.
  injury or death in a crash.
                                                                                   Each time you have a checkup, ask
  Always sit upright, well back in                                                 your doctor if it’s okay for you to
  the seat, with your feet on the         If you are pregnant, the best way to     drive.
  floor.                                  protect yourself and your unborn
                                          child when driving or riding in a
                                          vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
                                          and keep the lap part of the belt as
                                          low as possible across the hips.




                                                                                                                       19
Protecting Adults and Teens

Additional Safety Precautions            Do not place hard or sharp objects     Do not attach or place objects on
  Two people should never use the        between yourself and a front           the front airbag covers. Objects on
  same seat belt. If they do, they       airbag. Carrying hard or sharp         the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
  could be very seriously injured in a   objects on your lap, or driving with   could interfere with the proper
  crash.                                 a pipe or other sharp object in        operation of the airbags or be
                                         your mouth, can result in injuries     propelled inside the vehicle and
  Do not put any accessories on seat     if your front airbag inflates.         hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
  belts. Devices intended to improve
  occupant comfort or reposition the     Keep your hands and arms away          Do not attach hard objects on or
  shoulder part of a seat belt can       from the airbag covers. If your        near a door. If a side airbag or a
  reduce the protective capability of    hands or arms are close to an          side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
  the seat belt and increase the         airbag cover, they could be injured    holder or other hard object
  chance of serious injury in a crash.   if the airbag inflates.                attached on or near the door could
                                                                                be propelled inside the vehicle and
                                                                                hurt someone.




20
                                                         Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt System Components              If a front passenger does not fasten    The seat belts use the same
Your seat belt system includes lap/      their seat belt, the indicator will     monitoring system as the front
shoulder belts in all five seating       come on about 6 seconds after the       airbags. The system may not work
positions. The front seat belts are      ignition switch is turned to the ON     properly under these conditions:




                                                                                                                        Driver and Passenger Safety
also equipped with automatic seat        (II) position.
belt tensioners.                                                                   Placing heavy items on the front
                                         If either the driver or a front           passenger’s seat.
         The seat belt system            passenger does not fasten their seat
         includes an indicator on the    belt while driving, the beeper will       The front passenger is not sitting
instrument panel and a beeper to         sound and the indicator will flash        properly.
remind you and your passengers to        again at regular intervals. You will
fasten your seat belts.                  also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT BELT’’ or        The front passenger’s seat-back is
                                         ‘‘PASSENGER FASTEN SEAT                   pressed forward by a folded-down
This system monitors the front seat      BELT’’ message in the multi-              rear seat.
belts. If you turn the ignition switch   information display (see page 78 ).
to the ON (II) position before your                                              Have your vehicle checked by a
seat belt is fastened, the beeper will   When no one is sitting in the front     dealer if the indicator comes on or
sound and the indicator will flash. If   passenger’s seat, or a small child is   the beeper sounds when there is no
your seat belt is not fastened before    riding there, the indicator will not    front passenger or objects on the
the beeper stops, the indicator will     come on and the beeper will not         front seat.
stop flashing but remain on.             sound.




                                                                                                                   21
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Lap/Shoulder Belt                        To unlock the belt, press the red         The seat belts in all positions except
The lap/shoulder belt goes over          PRESS button on the buckle. Guide         the driver’s have an additional
your shoulder, across your chest,        the belt across your body so that it      locking mechanism that must be
and across your hips.                    retracts completely. After exiting the    activated to secure a child seat (see
                                         vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the   page 49 ).
To fasten the belt, insert the latch     way and will not get closed in the
plate into the buckle, then tug on the   door.                                     If the shoulder part of the belt is
belt to make sure the buckle is                                                    pulled all the way out, the locking
latched (see page 17 for how to          All seat belts have an emergency          mechanism will activate. The belt
properly position the belt).             locking retractor. In normal driving,     will retract, but it will not allow the
                                         the retractor lets you move freely in     passenger to move freely.
                                         your seat while it keeps some
                                         tension on the belt. During a collision   To deactivate the locking
                                         or sudden stop, the retractor             mechanism, unlatch the buckle and
                                         automatically locks the belt to help      let the seat belt fully retract. To
                                         restrain your body.                       refasten the seat belt, pull it out only
                                                                                   as far as needed.




22
                                                         Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners          The tensioners are designed to              When the tensioners are activated,
                                        activate primarily in frontal collisions,   the seat belts will remain tight until
                                        and they should activate in any             they are unbuckled in the normal
                                        collision severe enough to cause            manner.




                                                                                                                              Driver and Passenger Safety
                                        front-airbag inflation.
                                                                                    If the front seat belt tensioners ever
                                        The tensioners can also be activated        activate, they must be replaced as
                                        during a collision in which the front       the belts will no longer retract
                                        airbags do not deploy. In this case, the    properly.
                                        airbags would not be needed, but the
                                        additional restraint could be helpful.



For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in place.




                                                                                                                         23
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt Maintenance                      If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
For safety, you should check the           it must be replaced by the dealer. A
condition of your seat belts regularly.    belt that has been worn during a         Not checking or maintaining
                                           crash may not provide the same level     seat belts can result in serious
Pull each belt out fully, and look for     of protection in a subsequent crash.     injury or death if the seat belts
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check                                                 do not work properly when
that the latches work smoothly and         The dealer should also inspect the       needed.
the belts retract easily. If a belt does   anchors for damage and replace
not retract easily, cleaning the belt      them if needed. If the automatic seat    Check your seat belts regularly
may correct the problem (see page          belt tensioners activate during a        and have any problem
 299 ). Any belt that is not in good       crash, they must be replaced.            corrected as soon as possible.
condition or working properly will
not provide good protection and
should be replaced as soon as
possible.

Acura provides a lifetime warranty
on seat belts for U.S. models. See
your Acura Warranty Information
booklet for details.




24
                                                              Additional Information About Your Airbags

Airbag System Components

                                                           (8)              (2) (12) (11)
                                                     (1)            (9)                        (10)




                                                                                                                         Driver and Passenger Safety
                                              (8)                                                         (14)

                                                                                                            (5)




(1) Driver’s Airbag
(2) Front Passenger’s Airbag
(3) Control Unit
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(5) Side Airbags                                (3)                                                        (13)
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors
                                                    (6)                                             (4)
(8) Front Impact Sensors
(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator                                                            (7)
(10) Side Impact Sensors (First)                         (10)
(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors                                 (14)
(12) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors/OPDS Sensors Control Unit   (5)
(13) Side Impact Sensors (Second)                                         (4)   (13)
(14) Side Curtain Airbags

                                                                                                             CONTINUED


                                                                                                                   25
Additional Information About Your Airbags

Your airbag system includes:            Two side curtain airbags, one for    Sensors that can detect whether
                                        each side of the vehicle. The        a child is in the passenger’s side
  Two SRS (supplemental restraint       airbags are stored in the ceiling,   airbag path and signal the
  system) front airbags. The driver’s   above the side windows. The front    control unit to turn the airbag
  airbag is stored in the center of     and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE   off (see page 34 ).
  the steering wheel; the front         CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page
  passenger’s airbag is stored in the    33 ).                               A driver’s seat position sensor
  dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS                                           that monitors the distance of
  AIRBAG’’ (see page 28 ).              Automatic front seat belt            the seat from the front airbag. If
                                        tensioners (see page 23 ).           the seat is too far forward, the
  Two side airbags, one for the                                              airbag will inflate with less force
  driver and one for a front            Sensors that can detect a            (see page 30 ).
  passenger. The airbags are stored     moderate to severe front impact or
  in the outer edges of the seat-       side impact.
  backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
  AIRBAG’’ (see page 32 ).




26
                                                       Additional Information About Your Airbags

Weight sensors that monitor the       An indicator on the instrument
weight on the front passenger’s       panel that alerts you that the
seat. These automatically turn off    passenger’s side airbag has been
the passenger’s front airbag if       turned off (see page 34 ).




                                                                                                   Driver and Passenger Safety
they detect an infant or a small
child may be in the seat (see page    An indicator on the dashboard that
 30 ).                                alerts you that the passenger’s
                                      front airbag has been turned off
A sophisticated electronic system     (see page 35 ).
that continually monitors and
records information about the         Emergency backup power in case
sensors, the control unit, the        your vehicle’s electrical system is
airbag activators, the seat belt      disconnected in a crash.
tensioners, and driver and front
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position.

An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you to a possible
problem with your airbags,
sensors, or seat belt tensioners
(see page 34 ).




                                                                                              27
Additional Information About Your Airbags

How Your Front Airbags Work               During a frontal crash, your seat belt
                                          restrains your lower body and torso,
                                          and the front airbag helps protect
                                          your head and chest.

                                          Although both airbags normally
                                          inflate within a split second of each
                                          other, it is possible for only one
                                          airbag to deploy.

                                          This can happen if the severity of a
                                          collision is at the margin, or
                                          threshold, that determines whether
                                          or not the airbags will deploy. In
If you ever have a moderate to            such cases, the seat belt will provide    After inflating, the front airbags
severe frontal collision, sensors will    sufficient protection, and the            immediately deflate, so they won’t
detect the vehicle’s rapid                supplemental protection offered by        interfere with the driver’s visibility,
deceleration.                             the airbag would be minimal.              or the ability to steer or operate
                                                                                    other controls.
If the rate of deceleration is high       Only the driver’s airbag will deploy if
enough, the control unit will instantly   there is no passenger in the front
inflate the driver’s and front            seat, or if the advanced airbag
passenger’s airbags, at the time and      system has turned the passenger’s
with the force needed.                    airbag off (see page 35 ).



28
                                                             Additional Information About Your Airbags

The total time for inflation and          Dual-Stage Airbags                       Dual-Threshold Airbags
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so    Your front airbags are dual-stage        Your front airbags are also dual-
fast that most occupants are not          airbags. This means they have two        threshold airbags. Airbags with this
aware that the airbags deployed until     inflation stages that can be ignited     feature have two deployment




                                                                                                                             Driver and Passenger Safety
they see them lying in their laps.        sequentially or simultaneously,          thresholds that depend on whether
                                          depending on crash severity.             or not the occupant is wearing a seat
After a crash, you may see what                                                    belt.
looks like smoke. This is actually        In a more severe crash, both stages
powder from the airbag’s surface.         will ignite simultaneously to provide    If the occupant’s belt is not latched,
Although the powder is not harmful,       the quickest and greatest protection.    the airbag will deploy at a slightly
people with respiratory problems                                                   lower threshold, because the
may experience some temporary             In a less severe crash, one stage will   occupant would need extra
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of    ignite first, then the second stage      protection.
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do   will ignite a split second later. This
so.                                       provides longer airbag inflation time    It the occupant’s belt is latched, the
                                          with a little less force.                airbag will deploy at a slightly higher
                                                                                   threshold, when the airbag would be
                                                                                   needed to supplement the protection
                                                                                   provided by the seat belt.




                                                                                                              CONTINUED


                                                                                                                       29
Additional Information About Your Airbags

Advanced Airbags
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbag-
caused injuries to short drivers and
children who ride in front.

For both advanced airbags to work
properly:                                                             DRIVER’S
                                                                      SEAT
                                                                      POSITION     PASSENGER’S
  Occupants must sit upright and                                                   SEAT WEIGHT
                                                                      SENSOR
  wear their seat belts properly.                                                  SENSOR

  Do not spill any liquids on or          The driver’s advanced front airbag       The passenger’s advanced front
  under the seats, cover the sensors,     system includes a seat position          airbag system has weight sensors
  or put any cargo or metal objects       sensor under the seat. If the seat is    under the seat. Although Acura does
  under the front seats.                  too far forward, the airbag will         not encourage carrying an infant or
                                          inflate with less force, regardless of   small child in front, if the sensors
  Back-seat passengers should not         the severity of the impact.              detect the weight of an infant or
  put their feet under the front seats.                                            small child, the system will
                                          If there is a problem with the sensor,   automatically turn the passenger’s
Failure to follow these instructions      the SRS indicator will come on, and      front airbag off.
could damage the sensors or prevent       the airbag will inflate in the normal
them from working properly.               manner regardless of the driver’s
                                          seating position.


30
                                                          Additional Information About Your Airbags

When the airbag is turned off, an         Moving the front seat forcibly
indicator in the center of the            back against cargo on the seat or
dashboard will come on indicating         floor behind it.
passenger airbag ‘‘OFF’’ (see page




                                                                                                      Driver and Passenger Safety
 35 ).                                    Moving the front seat forcibly
                                          back on the folded rear seat.
If the weight sensors detect there is
no passenger in the front seat, the       Folding the rear seat-back onto a
airbag will be off. However, the          reclined front passenger’s seat-
passenger airbag off indicator will       back.
not come on.
                                          Hanging heavy items on the front
To ensure that the passenger’s            passenger seat, or placing heavy
advanced front airbag system will         items in the seat-back pocket.
work properly, do not do anything
that would increase or decrease the     Also, make sure the floor mat behind
weight on the front passenger’s seat.   the front passenger’s seat is hooked
This includes:                          to the floor mat anchor (see page
                                         299 ). If it is not, the mat may
  A rear passenger pushing or           interfere with the proper operation
  pulling on the back of the front      of the sensors and operation of the
  passenger’s seat.                     seat.




                                                                                                 31
Additional Information About Your Airbags

How Your Side Airbags Work               Only one airbag will deploy during a    Side Airbag Cutoff System
                                         side impact. If the impact is on the    To reduce the risk of injury from an
                                         passenger’s side, the passenger’s       inflating side airbag, your vehicle has
                                         side airbag will deploy even if there   an automatic cutoff system for the
                                         is no passenger.                        passenger’s side airbag.

                                         To get the best protection from the     Although Acura does not encourage
                                         side airbags, front seat occupants      children to ride in front, this system
                                         should wear their seat belts and sit    is designed to shut off the side
                                         upright and well back in their seats.   airbag if a child leans into the side
                                                                                 airbag’s path.

                                                                                 The side airbag may also shut off if a
                                                                                 short adult leans sideways, or a
If you ever have a moderate to                                                   larger adult slouches and leans
severe side impact, sensors will                                                 sideways into the airbag’s
detect rapid deceleration and signal                                             deployment path.
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s                                           Objects placed on the front
side airbag.                                                                     passenger seat can also cause the
                                                                                 side airbag to be shut off.




32
                                                            Additional Information About Your Airbags

If the side airbag off indicator comes   How Your Side Curtain Airbags            If the impact is on the passenger’s
on (see page 34 ), have the              Work                                     side, the passenger’s side curtain
passenger sit upright. Once the                                                   airbag will inflate even if there are no
passenger is out of the airbag’s                                                  occupants on that side of the vehicle.




                                                                                                                             Driver and Passenger Safety
deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the                                                  To get the best protection from the
indicator will go out.                                                            side curtain airbags, occupants
                                                                                  should wear their seat belts and sit
There will be some delay between                                                  upright and well back in their seats.
the moment the passenger moves
into or out of the airbag deployment
path and when the indicator comes
on or goes off.
                                          SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or other object as a       In a moderate to severe side impact,
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff      sensors will detect rapid deceleration
system from working properly.            and signal the control unit to
                                         instantly inflate the side curtain
                                         airbag on the driver’s or the
                                         passenger’s side of the vehicle.




                                                                                                                       33
Additional Information About Your Airbags

How the SRS Indicator Works               You will also see a ‘‘CHECK            How the Side Airbag Off
         The SRS indicator alerts         AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message in the         Indicator Works
         you to a potential problem       multi-information display (see page      U.S.     Canada This indicator
with your airbags or seat belt            82 ).                                                     alerts you that the
tensioners.                                                                                         passenger’s side
                                          If you see any of these indications,   airbag has been automatically shut
When you turn the ignition switch to      the airbags and seat belt tensioners   off. It does not mean there is a
the ON (II) position, this indicator      may not work properly when you         problem with your side airbags.
comes on for several seconds then         need them.
goes off. This tells you the system is                                           When you turn the ignition switch to
working properly.                                                                the ON (II) position, the indicator
                                                                                 should come on for several seconds
If the indicator comes on at any            Ignoring the SRS indicator can       and then go off (see page 64 ). If it
other time, or does not come on at all,     result in serious injury or death    doesn’t come on, stays on, or comes
you should have the system checked          if the airbag systems or             on while driving without a passenger
by your dealer. For example:                tensioners do not work properly.     in the front seat, have the system
                                                                                 checked.
  If the SRS indicator does not come        Have your vehicle checked by a
  on after you turn the ignition            dealer as soon as possible if
  switch to the ON (II) position.           the SRS indicator alerts you to
                                            a possible problem.
  If the indicator stays on after the
  engine starts.

  If the indicator comes on or
  flashes on and off while you drive.

34
                                                           Additional Information About Your Airbags

How the Passenger Airbag Off           If no one is riding in the front seat,    Airbag Service
Indicator Works                        the airbag will be automatically shut     Your airbag systems are virtually
                                       off. However, the indicator will not      maintenance free, and there are no
                                       come on.                                  parts you can safely service.




                                                                                                                           Driver and Passenger Safety
                                                                                 However, you must have your
                                       If the indicator comes on with no         vehicle serviced if:
                                       passenger in the front, or with an
                                       adult in the seat, there may be a           An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag
                                       problem with the advanced airbag            that has deployed must be
    U.S. Canada                        system. Have the vehicle checked by         replaced along with the control
                                       your dealer as soon as possible.            unit and other related parts. If a
                                                                                   front airbag inflates, the seat belt
                                       The passenger airbag off indicator          tensioners must also be replaced.
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR         may also come on and off repeatedly
                                       if total weight on the seat is near the     Do not try to remove or replace
This indicator alerts you that the     airbag cutoff threshold.                    any airbag by yourself. This must
passenger’s side airbag has been                                                   be done by your dealer or a
shut off because weight sensors        If this happens, have the passenger         knowledgeable body shop.
detect the weight of an infant or a    ride properly restrained in a back
small child on the front passenger’s   seat. If the passenger must ride in         The SRS indicator alerts you to a
seat. It does not mean there is a      front, move the seat as far to the          problem. Take your vehicle to an
problem with your side airbags.        rear as possible, have the passenger        authorized dealer as soon as
                                       sit upright and wear the seat belt          possible. If you ignore this
                                       properly.                                   indication, your airbags may not
                                                                                   operate properly.
                                                                                                           CONTINUED


                                                                                                                      35
Additional Information About Your Airbags

  If your vehicle has a moderate to     Do not remove or modify a front         Do not recline the front passenger’s
  severe impact. Even if your           seat without consulting your            seat-back as far to the rear as
  airbags do not inflate, your dealer   dealer. This could make the             possible with the right rear seat
  should inspect the driver’s seat      driver’s seat position sensor or the    folded down. This will cause the
  position sensor, the front            front passenger’s weight sensors        front passenger’s weight sensors
  passenger’s weight sensors, the       ineffective. If it is necessary to      to work improperly. The system
  front seat belt tensioners, and all   remove or modify a front seat to        may shut off the front passenger’s
  seat belts worn during the crash to   accommodate a person with               airbag and the passenger airbag
  make sure they are operating          disabilities, first contact Acura       off indicator will come on. The
  properly.                             Client Services at 800-382-2238.        seat belt reminder indicator and a
                                                                                ‘‘PASSENGER FASTEN
Additional Safety Precautions           Do not cover or replace front seat-     SEATBELT’’ message in the multi-
  Do not attempt to deactivate your     back covers without consulting          information display may also work
  airbags. Together, airbags and        your dealer. Improperly replacing       improperly.
  seat belts provide the best           or covering front seat-back covers
  protection.                           can prevent your side airbags from      Make sure that the folded-down
                                        inflating during a side impact.         rear seat does not press the front
  Do not tamper with airbag                                                     passenger’s seat-back. Check the
  components or wiring for any          Do not expose the front seat-backs      passenger airbag off indicator to
  reason. Tampering could cause         to liquid. If water or another liquid   confirm that the passenger’s
  the airbags to deploy, possibly       soaks into a seat-back, it can          advanced front airbag is operating
  causing very serious injury.          prevent the side airbag cutoff          properly.
                                        system from working properly.




36
                                                              Protecting Children            General Guidelines

                                         All Children Must Be Restrained
                                         Each year, many children are injured
                                         or killed in vehicle crashes because      Children who are unrestrained
                                         they are either unrestrained or not       or improperly restrained can be




                                                                                                                           Driver and Passenger Safety
                                         properly restrained. In fact, vehicle     seriously injured or killed in a
                                         accidents are the number one cause        crash.
                                         of the death of children ages 12 and
                                         under.                                    Any child too small for a seat
                                                                                   belt should be properly
                                         To reduce the number of child             restrained in a child seat. A
                                         deaths and injuries, every state and      larger child should be properly
                                         Canadian province requires that           restrained with a seat belt and
                                         infants and children be properly          use a booster seat if necessary.
Children depend on adults to protect     restrained when they ride in a
them. However, despite their best        vehicle.
intentions, many adults do not know                                              Larger children must be restrained
how to properly protect child            Infants and small children must be      with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
passengers.                              restrained in an approved child seat    a booster seat until the seat belt fits
                                         that is properly secured to the         them properly (see pages 52       55 ).
If you have children, or ever need to    vehicle (see pages 42     51 ).
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.

                                                                                                                      37
Protecting Children            General Guidelines

All Children Should Sit in a Back       The Passenger’s Front Airbag               Small Children
Seat                                    Can Pose Serious Risks                     Placing a forward-facing child seat in
According to accident statistics,       Front airbags have been designed to        the front seat of a vehicle equipped
children of all ages and sizes are      help protect adults in a moderate to       with a passenger’s front airbag can
safer when they are restrained in a     severe frontal collision. To do this,      be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is
back seat. The National Highway         the passenger’s front airbag is quite      too far forward, or the child’s head is
Traffic Safety Administration and       large, and it can inflate with enough      thrown forward during a collision, an
Transport Canada recommend that         force to cause very serious injuries.      inflating front airbag can strike the
all children age 12 and under be                                                   child with enough force to kill or
properly restrained in a back seat.     Even though your vehicle has an            very seriously injure a small child.
                                        advanced front airbag system, which
Some states have laws restricting       can automatically turn the                 Larger Children
where children may ride.                passenger’s front airbag off (see          Children who have outgrown child
                                        page 35 ), please follow the               seats are also at risk of being injured
Children who ride in back are less      guidelines below.                          or killed by an inflating passenger’s
likely to be injured by striking                                                   front airbag. Whenever possible,
interior vehicle parts during a         Infants                                    larger children should sit in the back
collision or hard braking. Also,        Never put a rear-facing child seat in      seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
children cannot be injured by an        the front seat of a vehicle equipped       be properly restrained with a seat
inflating front airbag when they ride   with a passenger’s front airbag. If        belt (see page 52 for important
in the back.                            the airbag inflates, it can hit the back   information about protecting larger
                                        of the child seat with enough force        children).
                                        to kill or very seriously injure an
                                        infant.



38
                                                           Protecting Children   General Guidelines

To remind you of the passenger’s         U.S. Models                       DASHBOARD
front airbag hazards, and that             SUN VISOR
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has




                                                                                                      Driver and Passenger Safety
warning labels on the dashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.



                                         Canadian Models
                                           SUN VISOR




                                                                                                 39
Protecting Children             General Guidelines

If You Must Drive with Several           If a Child Requires Close                 If a child requires close physical
Children                                 Attention                                 attention or frequent visual
Your vehicle has a back seat where       Many parents say they prefer to put       contact, we strongly recommend
children can be properly restrained.     an infant or a small child in the front   that another adult ride with the
If you ever have to carry a group of     passenger seat so they can watch the      child in a back seat. The back seat
children, and a child must ride in       child, or because the child requires      is far safer for a child than the
front:                                   attention.                                front.

  Place the largest child in the front   Placing a child in the front seat
  seat, provided the child is large      exposes the child to hazards in a
  enough to wear the lap/shoulder        frontal collision, and paying close
  belt properly (see page 52 ).          attention to a child distracts the
                                         driver from the important tasks of
  Move the vehicle seat as far to the    driving, placing both of you at risk.
  rear as possible (see page 14 ).

  Have the child sit upright and well
  back in the seat (see page 15 ).

  Make sure the seat belt is properly
  positioned and secured (see page
   17 ).




40
                                                            Protecting Children          General Guidelines

Additional Safety Precautions            Use the childproof door locks to       Lock all doors and the trunk when
  Never hold an infant or a child on     prevent children from opening the      your vehicle is not in use. Children
  your lap. If you are not wearing a     rear doors. This can prevent           who play in vehicles can
  seat belt in crash, you could be       children from accidentally falling     accidentally get trapped inside.




                                                                                                                        Driver and Passenger Safety
  thrown forward and crush the           out (see page 129 ).                   Teach your children not to play in
  child against the dashboard or a                                              or around vehicles. Know how to
  seat-back. If you are wearing a        Do not leave children alone in a       operate the emergency trunk
  seat belt, the child can be torn       vehicle. Leaving children without      opener and decide if your children
  from your arms and be seriously        adult supervision is illegal in most   should be shown how to use this
  hurt or killed.                        states and Canadian provinces,         feature (see page 136 ).
                                         and can be very hazardous.
  Never put a seat belt over yourself                                           Keep vehicle keys and remote
  and a child. During a crash, the       For example, infants and small         transmitters out of the reach of
  belt could press deep into the child   children left in a vehicle on a hot    children. Even very young
  and cause serious or fatal injuries.   day can die from heatstroke. A         children learn how to unlock
                                         child left alone with the key in the   vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
  Never let two children use the         ignition switch can accidentally set   switch, and open the trunk, which
  same seat belt. If they do, they       the vehicle in motion, possibly        can lead to accidental injury or
  could be very seriously injured in a   injuring themselves or others.         death.
  crash.




                                                                                                                   41
Protecting Infants and Small Children

Protecting Infants                        Two types of seats may be used: a         Rear-facing Child Seat Placement
                                          seat designed exclusively for infants,    A rear-facing child seat can be placed
                                          or a convertible seat used in the rear-   in any seating position in the back
                                          facing, reclining mode.                   seat, but not in the front. Never put a
                                                                                    rear-facing child seat in the front
                                          Do not put a rear-facing child seat in    seat.
                                          a forward-facing position. If placed
                                          facing forward, an infant could be        If the passenger’s front airbag
                                          very seriously injured during a           inflates, it can hit the back of the
                                          frontal collision.                        child seat with enough force to kill or
                                                                                    seriously injure an infant.

                                                                                    When properly installed, a rear-
                                                                                    facing child seat may prevent the
Child Seat Type                                                                     driver or a front passenger from
An infant must be properly                                                          moving their seat as far back as
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining                                              recommended, or from locking their
child seat until the child reaches the                                              seat-back in the desired position.
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat, and the child is at least                                             Or, it can interfere with proper
one year old.                                                                       operation of the passenger’s
                                                                                    advanced front airbag system.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.


42
                                                                  Protecting Infants and Small Children

In any situation, we strongly          Protecting Small Children               We also recommend that a small
recommend that you install the child                                           child use the child seat as long as
seat directly behind the front                                                 possible, until the child reaches the
passenger’s seat, move the seat as                                             weight or height limit for the seat.




                                                                                                                        Driver and Passenger Safety
far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get
a smaller rear-facing child seat.



  Placing a rear-facing child seat
  in the front seat can result in
  serious injury or death during a
  collision.
                                       Child Seat Type
  Always place a rear-facing child     A child who is at least one year old,
  seat in the back seat, not the       and who fits within the child seat
  front.                               maker’s weight and height limits,
                                       should be restrained in a forward-
                                       facing, upright child seat.

                                       Of the different seats available, we
                                       recommend those that have a five-
                                       point harness system as shown.

                                                                                                         CONTINUED


                                                                                                                   43
Protecting Infants and Small Children

Child Seat Placement                     If it is necessary to put a forward-
We strongly recommend placing a          facing child seat in the front, move
forward-facing child seat in a back      the vehicle seat as far to the rear as    Placing a forward-facing child
seat, not the front.                     possible, and be sure the child seat is   seat in the front seat can result
                                         firmly secured to the vehicle and the     in serious injury or death if the
Placing a forward-facing child seat in   child is properly strapped in the seat.   front airbag inflates.
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s airbag can be                                                   If you must place a forward-
hazardous. If the vehicle seat is too                                              facing child seat in front, move
far forward, or the child’s head is                                                the vehicle seat as far back as
thrown forward during a collision, an                                              possible, and properly restrain
inflating airbag can strike the child                                              the child.
with enough force to cause very
serious or fatal injuries.

Even with advanced front airbags,
which can automatically turn the
passenger’s front airbag off (see
page 35 ), a back seat is the safest
place for a small child.




44
                                                                                           Selecting Child Seats

When buying a child seat, you need       We also recommend selecting a            2. The child seat should be of the
to choose either a conventional child    LATCH-compatible seat with a rigid,        proper type and size to fit the child.
seat, or one designed for use with       rather than a flexible, anchor (see        Rear-facing for infants, forward-
the lower anchors and tethers for        page 47 ).                                 facing for small children.




                                                                                                                             Driver and Passenger Safety
children (LATCH) system.
                                         In seating positions and vehicles not    3. The child seat should fit the
Conventional child seats must be         equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-              vehicle seating position (or
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt,   compatible child seat can be installed     positions) where it will be used.
whereas LATCH-compatible seats           using a seat belt.
are secured by attaching the seat to                                              Before purchasing a conventional
hardware built into the two outer        Whatever type of seat you choose, to     child seat, or using a previously
seating positions in the back seat.      provide proper protection, a child       purchased one, we recommend that
                                         seat should meet three                   you test the seat in the specific
Since LATCH-compatible child seats       requirements:                            vehicle seating position or positions
are easier to install and reduce the                                              where the seat will be used.
possibility of improper installation,    1. The child seat should meet U.S. or
we recommend selecting this style.         Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
                                           Standard 213. Look for FMVSS
                                           213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.




                                                                                                                        45
Installing a Child Seat

After selecting a proper child seat       A child seat secured with a seat belt     3. Secure the child in the child seat.
and a good place to install the seat,     should be installed as firmly as             Make sure the child is properly
there are three main steps in             possible. However, it does not need          strapped in the child seat
installing the seat:                      to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side      according to the child seat maker’s
                                          movement can be expected and                 instructions. A child who is not
1. Properly secure the child seat to      should not reduce the child seat’s           properly secured in a child seat
   the vehicle. All child seats must be   effectiveness.                               can be seriously injured in a crash.
   secured to the vehicle with the lap
   part of a lap/shoulder belt or with    If the child seat is not secure, try      The following pages provide
   the LATCH (lower anchors and           installing it in a different seating      guidelines on how to properly install
   tethers for children) system. A        position, or use a different style of     a child seat. A forward-facing child
   child whose seat is not properly       child seat that can be firmly secured.    seat is used in all examples, but the
   secured to the vehicle can be                                                    instructions are the same for rear-
   endangered in a crash.                                                           facing child seats.

2. Make sure the child seat is firmly
   secured. After installing a child
   seat, push and pull the seat
   forward and from side-to-side to
   verify that it is secure.




46
                                                                                       Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat with                                       BUTTON
LATCH
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (lower anchors and tethers




                                                                                                                        Driver and Passenger Safety
for children) at the outer rear seats.

The lower anchors are located
between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH.
                                          LOWER ANCHORS                         Rigid type
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the    To install a LATCH-compatible child   3. Place the child seat on the vehicle
anchor point.                            seat:                                    seat, then attach the seat to the
                                                                                  lower anchors according to the
                                         1. Move the seat belt buckle or          child seat maker’s instructions.
                                            tongue away from the lower
                                            anchors.                             Some LATCH-compatible seats
                                                                                 have a rigid-type connector as
                                         2. Make sure there are no objects       shown above.
                                            near the anchors that could
                                            prevent a secure connection
                                            between the child seat and the
                                            anchors.
                                                                                                         CONTINUED


                                                                                                                   47
Installing a Child Seat

                                           TETHER STRAP HOOK                       6. Attach the tether strap hook to the
                                                                                      tether anchor, then tighten the
                                                                                      strap as instructed by the child
                                                                                      seat maker.

                                                                                   7. Push and pull the child seat
                                                                                      forward and from side-to-side to
                                                                                      verify that it is secure.



 Flexible type                                                  ANCHOR

  Other LATCH-compatible seats            5. Lift the head restraint (see page
  have a flexible-type connector as           139 ), then route the tether strap
  shown above.                               through the legs of the head
                                             restraint and over the seat-back,
4. Whatever type you have, follow            making sure the strap is not
   the child seat maker’s instructions       twisted.
   for adjusting or tightening the fit.
                                            If the tether strap is too long and
                                            cannot be tightened firmly, find a
                                            route where the strap can be
                                            tightened securely.



48
                                                                                           Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the




                                                                                                                                Driver and Passenger Safety
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
all seating positions except the
driver’s have a locking mechanism
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.

                                         1. With the child seat in the desired     2. To activate the lockable retractor,
                                            seating position, route the belt          slowly pull the shoulder part of the
                                            through the child seat according          belt all the way out until it stops,
                                            to the seat maker’s instructions,         then let the belt feed back into the
                                            then insert the latch plate into the      retractor.
                                            buckle.
                                                                                   3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
                                                                                      it. If the belt is locked, you will not
                                                                                      be able to pull it out. If you can pull
                                                                                      the belt out, it is not locked, and
                                                                                      you will need to repeat these steps.

                                                                                                               CONTINUED


                                                                                                                         49
Installing a Child Seat

                                                                                       Installing a Child Seat with a
                                                                                       Tether
                                                                                                      ANCHORAGE POINTS




4. After confirming that the belt is        5. Push and pull the child seat                  ANCHOR         COVER
   locked, grab the shoulder part of           forward and from side-to-side to
   the belt near the buckle, and pull          verify that it is secure enough to      A child seat with a tether can be
   up to remove any slack from the             stay upright during normal driving      installed in any seating position in
   lap part of the belt. Remember, if          maneuvers. If the child seat is not     the back seat, using the anchorage
   the lap part of the belt is not tight,      secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to   points shown above.
   the child seat will not be secure.          retract fully, then repeat these
                                               steps.                                  Since a tether can provide additional
  To remove slack, it may help to                                                      security to the lap/shoulder belt
  put weight on the child seat, or          To deactivate the locking                  installation, we recommend using a
  push on the back of the seat while        mechanism and remove a child seat,         tether whenever one is required or
  pulling up on the belt.                   unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat       available.
                                            belt, and let the belt fully retract.

50
                                                                                       Installing a Child Seat

Using an Outer Anchor                   2. Lift the anchor cover, then attach   Using the Center Anchor
                                           the tether strap hook to the
 TETHER STRAP HOOK                         anchor, making sure the strap is     TETHER STRAP HOOK
                                           not twisted.




                                                                                                                        Driver and Passenger Safety
                                        3. Tighten the strap according to the
                                           seat maker’s instructions.




                 ANCHOR                                                                          ANCHOR

1. After properly securing the child                                            1. After properly securing the child
   seat (see page 49 ), lift the head                                              seat (see page 49 ), route the
   restraint, then route the tether                                                tether strap over the seat-back.
   strap over the seat-back and
   through the head restraint legs.                                             2. Follow steps 2 and 3 from the
                                                                                   previous column.
  If the tether strap is too long and
  cannot be tightened firmly, find a
  route where the strap can be
  tightened securely.



                                                                                                                   51
Protecting Larger Children

When a child reaches the                                                       Checking Seat Belt Fit
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the   Allowing a child age 12 or under
child should sit in a back seat on a   to sit in front can result in injury
booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder   or death if the passenger’s front
belt.                                  airbag inflates.

The following pages give               If a larger child must ride in front,
instructions on how to check proper    move the vehicle seat as far
seat belt fit, what kind of booster    back as possible, use a booster
seat to use if one is needed, and      seat if needed, have the child
important precautions for a child      sit up properly and wear the
who must sit in front.                 seat belt properly.

                                                                               To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
                                                                               properly fits a child, have the child
                                                                               put on the seat belt, then ask
                                                                               yourself:

                                                                               1. Does the child sit all the way back
                                                                                  against the seat?

                                                                               2. Do the child’s knees bend
                                                                                  comfortably over the edge of the
                                                                                  seat?


52
                                                                                    Protecting Larger Children

3. Does the shoulder belt cross            Using a Booster Seat                     Booster seats can be high-back or
   between the child’s neck and arm?                                                low-back. Whichever style you select,
                                                                                    make sure the booster seat meets
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as                                            federal safety standards (see page




                                                                                                                            Driver and Passenger Safety
   possible, touching the child’s                                                    45 ) and that you follow the booster
   thighs?                                                                          seat maker’s instructions.

5. Will the child be able to stay                                                   If a child who uses a booster seat
   seated like this for the whole trip?                                             must ride in front, move the vehicle
                                                                                    seat as far back as possible and be
If you answer yes to all these                                                      sure the child is wearing the seat
questions, the child is ready to wear                                               belt properly.
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the                                                  A child may continue using a booster
child needs to ride on a booster seat.     A child who has outgrown a forward-      seat until the tops of their ears are
                                           facing child seat should ride in a       even with the top of the vehicle’s or
                                           back seat and use a booster seat         booster’s seat-back. A child of this
                                           until the lap/shoulder belt fits them    height should be tall enough to use
                                           properly without the booster.            the lap/shoulder belt without a
                                           Some states and Canadian provinces       booster seat.
                                           also require children to use a booster
                                           seat until they reach a given age or
                                           weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be
                                           sure to check current laws in the
                                           states or provinces where you intend
                                           to drive.

                                                                                                                      53
Protecting Larger Children

When Can a Larger Child Sit in            Of course, children vary widely. And      If you decide that a child can safely
Front                                     while age may be one indicator of         ride up front, be sure to:
The National Highway Traffic Safety       when a child can safely ride in front,
Administration and Transport              there are other important factors you       Carefully read the owner’s manual,
Canada recommend that all children        should consider.                            and make sure you understand all
age 12 and under be properly                                                          seat belt instructions and all safety
restrained in a back seat.                Physical Size                               information.
                                          Physically, a child must be large
If the passenger’s front airbag           enough for the lap/shoulder belt to         Move the vehicle seat to the rear-
inflates in a moderate to severe          properly fit (see pages 17 and 52 ). If     most position.
frontal collision, the airbag can cause   the seat belt does not fit properly,
serious injuries to a child who is        with or without the child sitting on a      Have the child sit up straight, back
unrestrained, improperly restrained,      booster seat, the child should not sit      against the seat, and feet on or
sitting too close to the airbag, or out   in front.                                   near the floor.
of position.
                                          Maturity                                    Check that the child’s seat belt is
A side airbag also poses risks. If any    To safely ride in front, a child must       properly positioned and secured.
part of a larger child’s body is in the   be able to follow the rules, including
path of a deploying side airbag, the      sitting properly, and wearing the seat      Supervise the child. Even mature
child could receive possibly serious      belt properly throughout a ride.            children sometimes need to be
injuries.                                                                             reminded to fasten the seat belts
                                                                                      or sit properly.




54
                                                                             Protecting Larger Children

Additional Safety Precautions            Do not put any accessories on a
  Do not let a child wear a seat belt    seat belt. Devices intended to
  across the neck. This could result     improve a child’s comfort or
  in serious neck injuries during a      reposition the shoulder part of a




                                                                                                          Driver and Passenger Safety
  crash.                                 seat belt can make the belt less
                                         effective and increase the chance
  Do not let a child put the shoulder    of serious injury in a crash.
  part of a seat belt behind the back
  or under the arm. This could
  cause very serious injuries during
  a crash. It also increases the
  chance that the child will slide
  under the belt in a crash and be
  injured.

  Two children should never use the
  same seat belt. If they do, they
  could be very seriously injured in a
  crash.




                                                                                                     55
Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Your vehicle’s exhaust contains                                             With the trunk open, airflow can pull
carbon monoxide gas. You should                                             exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
have no problem with carbon             Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.       interior and create a hazardous
monoxide entering the vehicle in        Breathing it can cause              condition. If you must drive with the
normal driving if you maintain your     unconsciousness and even kill       trunk open, open all the windows and
vehicle properly.                       you.                                set the climate control system as
                                                                            shown below.
Have the exhaust system inspected       Avoid any enclosed areas or
for leaks whenever:                     activities that expose you to       If you must sit in your parked vehicle
                                        carbon monoxide.                    with the engine running, even in an
  The vehicle is raised for an oil                                          unconfined area, adjust the climate
  change.                                                                   control system as follows:
                                      High levels of carbon monoxide can
  You notice a change in the sound    collect rapidly in enclosed areas,    1. Select the fresh air mode.
  of the exhaust.                     such as a garage. Do not run the      2. Select the         mode.
                                      engine with the garage door closed.   3. Set the fan speed to high.
  The vehicle was in an accident      Even with the door open, run the      4. Set the temperature control to a
  that may have damaged the           engine only long enough to move the      comfortable setting.
  underside.                          vehicle out of the garage.




56
                                                              Safety Labels

These labels are in the locations      RADIATOR CAP   DASHBOARD
shown. They warn you of potential                     U.S. models only
hazards that could cause serious
injury. Read these labels carefully.




                                                                                     Driver and Passenger Safety
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which may be
removed by the owner), contact your
dealer for a replacement.

  HOOD
  U.S. models




  Canadian models




                                                                         CONTINUED


                                                                               57
Safety Labels

SUN VISOR         DOORJAMBS
U.S. models       U.S. models   Canadian models




Canadian models




58
                                                                                                     Instruments and Controls

This section gives information about   Control Locations ............................ 60            Trunk Main Switch.................... 136
the controls and displays that         Instrument Panel ............................. 61          Seat Heaters ................................... 137
contribute to the daily operation of   Instrument Panel Indicators ........... 62                 Seats ................................................ 138
your vehicle. All the essential        Gauges .............................................. 68     Power Seat Adjustment ............ 138
controls are within easy reach.        Multi-Information Display .............. 69                  Driver’s Lumbar Support .......... 138
                                       Controls Near the Steering                                   Head Restraints ......................... 139




                                                                                                                                                               Instruments and Controls
                                         Wheel .......................................... 118       Folding Rear Seat ...................... 140
                                       Windshield Wipers and                                      Driving Position Memory
                                         Washers ...................................... 119         System......................................... 142
                                       Turn Signal and Headlights.......... 120                   Mirrors ............................................ 145
                                         Fog Lights .................................. 121          Adjusting the Power Mirrors ... 146
                                       Automatic Lighting Off                                       Power Mirror Heaters............... 146
                                         Feature ........................................ 121     Power Windows ............................. 147
                                       Daytime Running Lights............... 121                  Moonroof ........................................ 150
                                       Instrument Panel Brightness ....... 122                    Parking Brake ................................ 151
                                       Hazard Warning ............................. 123           Sun Visor......................................... 152
                                       Rear Window Defogger ................ 123                  Vanity Mirror ................................. 152
                                       Steering Wheel Adjustment ......... 124                    Interior Lights ................................ 153
                                       Keys and Locks.............................. 125           Interior Convenience Items .......... 155
                                       Immobilizer System....................... 126                Beverage Holders ...................... 156
                                       Ignition Switch ............................... 127          Accessory Power Sockets......... 156
                                       Door Locks ..................................... 128         Console Compartment .............. 157
                                       Childproof Door Locks ................. 129                  Sunglasses Holder ..................... 158
                                       Remote Transmitter ...................... 130                Glove Box ................................... 158
                                       Trunk............................................... 135
                                         Emergency Trunk Opener ....... 136

                                                                                                                                                       59
Control Locations

                          INSTRUMENT PANEL (P.61)     MIRROR CONTROL AUTO BUTTON (P.145)   AUDIO SYSTEM
                          GAUGES(P.68)                                                     (P.170)

 DRIVING POSITION
 MEMORY SYSTEM
 (P.142)

 MIRRORS CONTROLS
 (P.146)
                                                                                           CLIMATE CONTROL
                                                                                           SYSTEM
                                                                                           (P.160)


 MASTER DOOR
 LOCK SWITCH
 (P.128)                                                                                   AUTOMATIC
                                                                                           TRANSMISSION
                                                                                           (P.244)
 POWER WINDOW                                                                              MANUAL
 SWITCHES                                                                                  TRANSMISSION
 (P.147)                                                                                   (P.242)



     TRUNK RELEASE LEVER (P.135)
     FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE
     HANDLE (P.229)                   HOOD RELEASE HANDLE     PARKING BRAKE LEVER
                                      (P.230)                 (P.151)
Vehicle without navigation system is shown.


60
                                                                                           Instrument Panel


IMMOBILIZER                                           LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.64)
SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.64)                                                       HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (P.66)
                                                                             VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)
FOG LIGHT                                                                    SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.65)




                                                                                                                      Instruments and Controls
INDICATOR
(P.66)                                                                                     VSA ACTIVATION
MULTI-INFORMATION                                                                          INDICATOR (P.65)
DISPLAY
(P.69)                                                                                        ANTI-LOCK BRAKE
                                                                                              SYSTEM (ABS)
SEAT BELT                                                                                     INDICATOR (P.66)
REMINDER
INDICATOR
(P.62)                                                                                              LOW FUEL
                                                                                                    INDICATOR
SYSTEM                                                                                              (P.66)
MESSAGE
INDICATOR
(P.67)

                                                                            PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE
                                                     CHARGING               SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.63)
                                                     SYSTEM
                                LOW OIL PRESSURE     INDICATOR     SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
      SECURITY INDICATOR (P.67) INDICATOR            (P.62)        (P.64)
                                (P.62)
                                             CRUISE MAIN       SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
                                             INDICATOR         SYSTEM (SRS) INDICATOR (P.63)
     MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (P.62)       (P.66)

: The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
                                                                                                                 61
Instrument Panel Indicators

The instrument panel has many            If your front passenger does not                     Low Oil Pressure
indicators to give you important         fasten their seat belt, the indicator                Indicator
information about your vehicle.          comes on about 6 seconds after the        The engine can be severely damaged
                                         ignition switch is turned to the ON       if this indicator flashes or stays on
           Seat Belt Reminder            (II) position.                            when the engine is running. For
           Indicator                                                               more information, see page 323 .
This indicator comes on when you         If either of you do not fasten your       You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
turn the ignition switch to the ON       seat belt while driving, the beeper       ENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ message in
(II) position. It reminds you and your   will sound and the indicator will flash   the multi-information display (see
passengers to fasten your seat belts.    again at regular intervals. For more      page 81 ).
A beeper also sounds if you and your     information, see page 21 .
front passenger have not fastened        You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT                    Charging System
your seat belts.                         BELT’’ or ‘‘PASSENGER FASTEN                         Indicator
                                         SEAT BELT’’ message in the multi-         If this indicator comes on when the
If you turn the ignition switch to the   information display (see page 78 ).       engine is running, the battery is not
ON (II) position before fastening                                                  being charged, and you will also see
your seat belts, the beeper sounds,                Malfunction Indicator           a ‘‘CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM’’
and the indicator flashes. If you do               Lamp                            message in the multi-information
not fasten your seat belts before the    You will also see a ‘‘CHECK               display (see page 83 ). For more
beeper stops, the indicator stops        EMISSION SYSTEM’’ message in              information, see page 324 .
flashing but remains on.                 the multi-information display (see
                                         page 83 ). For more information, see
                                         page 324 .




62
                                                                                  Instrument Panel Indicators

  U.S.    Canada                         2. If it stays on after you have fully             Supplemental Restraint
                                            released the parking brake while                System (SRS) Indicator
                                            the engine is running, or if it       This indicator comes on for several
Parking Brake and Brake System              comes on while driving, it can        seconds when you turn the ignition
Indicator                                   indicate a problem in the brake       switch to the ON (II) position. If it
This indicator has two functions:           system. You will also see a           comes on at any other time, it




                                                                                                                            Instruments and Controls
                                            ‘‘BRAKE FLUID LOW’’ or                indicates a potential problem with
1. It comes on when you turn the            ‘‘CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM’’                your front airbags. This indicator will
   ignition switch to the ON (II)           message in the multi-information      also alert you to a potential problem
   position. It is a reminder to check      display (see pages 79 , 83 ). For     with your side airbags, passenger’s
   the parking brake. Driving with          more information, see page 326 .      side airbag automatic cutoff system,
   the parking brake not fully                                                    automatic seat belt tensioners, side
   released can damage the rear                                                   curtain airbags, driver’s seat position
   brakes, axles, and tires.                                                      sensor, or the front passenger’s
                                                                                  weight sensors. You will also see a
  If you drive without releasing the                                              ‘‘CHECK AIRBAG SYSTEM’’
  parking brake, a beeper will sound,                                             message in the multi-information
  and you will also see a ‘‘RELEASE                                               display (see page 82 ). For more
  PARKING BRAKE’’ message in                                                      information, see page 34 .
  the multi-information display (see
  page 78 ).




                                                                                                                      63
Instrument Panel Indicators

 U.S.     Canada                                  Lights On Indicator                       Immobilizer System
                                                                                            Indicator
                                        This indicator reminds you that the        This indicator comes on for a few
Side Airbag Off Indicator               exterior lights are on. It comes on        seconds when you turn the ignition
This indicator comes on when you        when the light switch is in either the     switch to the ON (II) position. It will
turn the ignition switch to the ON             or      position. If you turn the   then go off if you have a properly-
(II) position. If it comes on at any    ignition switch to the ACCESSORY           coded ignition key. If it is not a
other time, it indicates that the       (I) or the LOCK (0) position without       properly-coded key, the indicator will
passenger’s side airbag has             turning off the light switch, this         blink and the engine will not start
automatically shut off. You will also   indicator will remain on. A reminder       (see page 126 ).
see a ‘‘PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG           chime will also sound when you open
OFF’’ message in the multi-             the driver’s door.                         This indicator also blinks several
information display (see page 81 ).                                                times when you turn the ignition
For more information, see page 34 .                                                switch from the ON (II) position to
                                                                                   the ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
                                                                                   position.




64
                                                                                     Instrument Panel Indicators

          Vehicle Stability Assist                   VSA Activation Indicator                          Turn Signal and
          (VSA) System Indicator                                                                       Hazard Warning
This indicator normally comes on for        This indicator has three functions.                        Indicators
a few seconds when you turn the                                                      The left or right turn signal indicator
ignition switch to the ON (II)              1. It comes on as a reminder that you    blinks when you signal a lane change
position.                                      have turned off the vehicle           or turn. If the indicator does not




                                                                                                                               Instruments and Controls
                                               stability assist (VSA) system.        blink or blinks rapidly, it usually
If it comes on and stays on at any                                                   means one of the turn signal bulbs is
other time, or it does not come on          2. It flashes when VSA is active (see    burned out (see page 293 ). Replace
when you turn the ignition switch to           page 255 ).                           the bulb as soon as possible, since
the ON (II) position, there is a                                                     other drivers cannot see that you are
problem with the VSA system. You            3. It comes on along with the VSA        signaling.
will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSA                    system indicator if there is a
SYSTEM’’ message in the multi-                 problem with the VSA system.          When you press the hazard warning
information display (see page 81 ).            You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSA       button, both turn signals blink. All
Take your vehicle to a dealer to have          SYSTEM’’ message in the multi-        turn signals on the outside of the
it checked. Without VSA, your                  information display (see page 81 ).   vehicle should flash.
vehicle still has normal driving ability,
but will not have VSA traction and          This indicator normally comes on for
stability enhancement. For more             a few seconds when you turn the
information, see page 255 .                 ignition switch to the ON (II)
                                            position. For more information, see
                                            page 255 .




                                                                                                                         65
Instrument Panel Indicators

           Anti-lock Brake System                  High Beam Indicator           Low Fuel Indicator
           (ABS) Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for      This indicator comes on with the
a few seconds when you turn the           high beam headlights. For more
ignition switch to the ON (II)            information, see page 120 .
position. If this indicator comes on at
any other time, there is a problem in     On Canadian models, this indicator
the ABS. If this happens, take the        comes on with reduced brightness
vehicle to your dealer to have it         when the daytime running lights
checked. With this indicator on, your     (DRL) are on (see page121).
vehicle still has normal braking
ability but no anti-lock function. You             Fog Light Indicator
will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABS                                                           LOW FUEL INDICATOR
SYSTEM’’ message in the multi-            This indicator comes on when you
information display (see page 82 ).       turn on the fog lights. For more       This indicator is in the fuel gauge. It
For more information, see page 253 .      information, see page 121 .            comes on as a reminder that you
                                                                                 must refuel soon. You will also see a
                                                   Cruise Main Indicator         ‘‘FUEL LOW’’ message in the multi-
                                                                                 information display (see page 80 ).
                                          This indicator comes on when you       When the indicator comes on, there
                                          turn on the cruise control system by   is about 2.3 U.S. gal (8.6 ) of fuel
                                          pressing the CRUISE button on the      remaining in the tank before the
                                          steering wheel (see page 204 ).        needle reaches E.




66
                                                                           Instrument Panel Indicators

          System Message                Security System Indicator
          Indicator
This indicator comes on when there
is a system message in the multi-
information display. Press the INFO
button on the steering wheel (see




                                                                                                         Instruments and Controls
page 70 ) to see the message (see
page 75 ).

Most of the time, this indicator
comes on along with other indicators
in the instrument panel such as the
seat belt reminder indicator, SRS        SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
indicator, VSA system indicator, etc.
                                        This indicator comes on when the
                                        security system is set. For more
                                        information, see page 203 .




                                                                                                    67
Gauges

                                                                                   Fuel Gauge
              TACHOMETER                         SPEEDOMETER                       This shows how much fuel you
                                                                                   have. It may show slightly more
     TEMPERATURE                                                                   or less than the actual amount.
     GAUGE                                                      FUEL GAUGE         The needle returns to the
                                                                                   bottom after you turn off the
                                                                                   ignition.



                                                                                   Avoid driving with an extremely low
                                                                                   f uel level. Running out of f uel could
                                                                                   cause the engine to misf ire, damaging
                                                                                   the catalytic converter.
           INFO KNOB
U.S. Model is shown.                                    SELECT/RESET KNOB

Temperature Gauge                         (Hot) mark, pull safely to the side of
This shows the temperature of the         the road. See page 321 for
engine’s coolant. During normal           instructions and precautions on
operation, the pointer should rise to     checking the engine’s cooling
about the middle of the gauge. In         system.
severe driving conditions, such as
very hot weather or a long period of
uphill driving, the pointer may rise to
the upper zone. If it reaches the red

68
                                                                                 Multi-Information Display

The multi-information display in the    Normal Display Messages
instrument panel displays various
information and messages when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position. Some of the messages help
you operate your vehicle more




                                                                                                                        Instruments and Controls
comfortably.
Others help to keep you aware of the
periodic maintenance your vehicle
needs for continued trouble-free
driving.

There are three types of messages;
normal display messages, engine oil
life and maintenance messages, and      When you unlock and open the            If you use the key to unlock the
system messages.                        driver’s door with the remote           driver’s door, the display only shows
                                        transmitter, the display shows          ‘‘Welcome.’’ This means the system
You can also customize some vehicle     ‘‘Welcome DRIVER 1’’ or ‘‘Welcome       cannot recognize either ‘‘DRIVER 1’’
control settings to your liking with    DRIVER 2’’ depending on which           or ‘‘DRIVER 2.’’ In this case, you
the multi-information display and the   remote transmitter you use. The         cannot use the customize settings in
two buttons on the steering wheel       driver’s ‘‘ID’’ is detected by the      the multi-information display (see
(see page 85 ).                         transmitter. For more information       page 85 ).
                                        about driver’s ‘‘ID’’, see page 131 .   When you turn the ignition switch to
                                                                                the ACCESSORY (I) position, the
                                                                                display shows ‘‘Goodbye.’’
                                                                                                         CONTINUED


                                                                                                                  69
Multi-Information Display

                                                                              The primary display always shows its
                                                                              default setting, ‘‘INST. MPG’’ (U.S.
 PRIMARY DISPLAY                                                              models) or ‘‘INST. L/100 km’’
                   UPPER SEGMENT                                              (Canadian models) even if you press
                                                                              the INFO button. It only changes the
                                                                              secondary display. You can
                                                                              customize this setting to your liking
                                                                              (see page 101 ).

                                                                              Messages in the trip computer
                                                                              include:
 SECONDARY DISPLAY                                                              INST. MPG (U.S. models)/
              LOWER SEGMENT
                                         INFO KNOB       INFO BUTTON            INST.L/100 km (Canadian
                                                                                models): Your vehicle’s current
The multi-information display          The upper segment is divided into        fuel mileage.
consists of two segments; an upper     two displays; primary and secondary.
segment and a lower segment.           When you turn the ignition switch to     AVG. FUEL A/AVG. FUEL B:
                                       the ON (II) position, what you last      Your vehicle’s average fuel
In normal display mode, the upper      selected is displayed. Each time you     economy since you last reset the
segment displays trip computer. The    press the INFO button on the             Trip A or Trip B. When you select
lower segment displays the             steering wheel or the INFO knob in       Trip B in the lower segment by
odometer, Trip A/B, outside            the instrument panel, the secondary      pressing the SEL/RESET button
temperature, and engine oil life and   display of the trip computer changes     on the steering wheel or Select/
maintenance message.                   as shown on the next page.               Reset knob in the instrument
                                                                                panel, the AVG. FUEL B appears
                                                                                in the secondary display.

70
                               Multi-Information Display

                               RANGE: The estimated distance
                               you can travel on the fuel
                               remaining in the tank. This
                               distance is estimated from the fuel
                               economy you received over the
                               last several miles, so it will vary




                                                                      Instruments and Controls
                               with changes in speed, traffic, etc.

                               ELAPSED TIME: The time
                               traveled since you last reset the
                               trip computer.
                               When you turn the ignition switch
                               to the ON (II) position, ELAPSED
                               TIME is reset.

                               AVG. SPEED: The average speed
                               you are traveling.




   : Press SEL/RESET Button.
   : Press INFO Button.
U.S. model is shown


                                                                71
Multi-Information Display




                                                    LOWER SEGMENT
  SEL/RESET
  BUTTON                                       : Press the INFO Button.
                   SELECT/RESET
                   KNOB                     U.S.model is shown

In the lower segment, each time you       You can also change the display by     Trip Meter
press the SEL/RESET button on the         pushing the Select/Reset knob in the   While a trip meter is displayed, you
steering wheel, the display changes       instrument panel.                      can change the display between
from ‘‘Trip A/Odometer’’ to ‘‘Trip A/                                            ‘‘TRIP A’’ and ‘‘TRIP B’’ by pressing
Outside Temperature’’ to ‘‘Trip B/        When you turn the ignition switch to   the SEL/RESET button on the
Outside Temperature’’ to ‘‘Engine         the ON (II) position, what you last    steering wheel, or the Select/Reset
Oil Life’’, and then back to the ‘‘Trip   selected is displayed.                 knob in the instrument panel.
A/Odometer’’ as shown in the next
column.




72
                                                                               Multi-Information Display

To reset a trip meter, display it, and   Outside Temperature                  The temperature sensor is in the
press and hold the SEL/RESET                                                  front bumper. The temperature
button or Select/Reset knob until the                                         reading can be affected by heat
number resets to ‘‘0.0.’’ When you                                            reflection from the road surface,
reset ‘‘Trip B’’ , ‘‘AVG. FUEL B’’ is                                         engine heat, and the exhaust from
also reset. If you reset ‘‘Trip A’’,                                          surrounding traffic. This can cause




                                                                                                                     Instruments and Controls
‘‘AVG. FUEL A’’ and ‘‘AVG. SPEED’’                                            an incorrect temperature reading
will be reset at the same time.                                               when your speed is under
                                                                              19 mph (30 km/h). When you start
In the customizing mode, you can set                                          your trip, the sensor is not fully
‘‘Trip A’’ and ‘‘AVG. FUEL A’’ to                                             acclimatized, therefore it may take
reset at the same time when you               OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE             several minutes until the proper
refuel your vehicle (see page 97 ).       U.S.model is shown                  temperature is displayed.

                                         This shows the outside Fahrenheit    In certain weather conditions,
                                         temperature in U.S. models, and      temperature readings near freezing
                                         Centigrade temperature in Canadian   (32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
                                         models.                              forming on the road surface.

                                                                              You can adjust the outside
                                                                              temperature display (see page 95 ).




                                                                                                                73
Multi-Information Display

Engine Oil Life                          Maintenance Messages




               ENGINE OIL LIFE
  U.S.model is shown                      U.S.model is shown

This shows the remaining life of the     When the engine oil life reaches 15 %,   Have your dealer do the indicated
engine oil. It shows 100% after the      the display shows ‘‘SERVICE DUE          maintenance as soon as you see this
engine oil is replaced and the display   SOON’’ and the code for the              message, and have them reset the
is reset. The engine oil life is         maintenance items to be performed.       display after completing the service.
calculated based on engine operating
conditions and accumulated engine        When the engine oil life reaches 5 %,    If you do not perform the indicated
revolutions. For more information,       the display shows ‘‘SERVICE DUE          maintenance or do not reset the
see page 266 .                           NOW’’ along with the same                display, the message changes to
                                         maintenance items.                       ‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ when the
                                                                                  engine oil life becomes 0 %.



74
                                                                                Multi-Information Display

These messages appear in the multi-    System Messages
information display each time you      If there is a problem with your
turn the ignition switch to the ON     vehicle, for example, the engine oil
(II) position.                         level is low or a door is not fully
                                       closed, the multi-information display
For more information about             will show you the problem. It does




                                                                                                                      Instruments and Controls
Maintenance Messages, see              this by interrupting the current
‘‘Maintenance Minder’’ on page         message with one or more messages.
 266 .

Also refer to page 264 for important
maintenance safety precautions.                                                   SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR

                                                                               These messages also trigger the
                                                                               appropriate indicator(s) on the
                                                                               instrument panel and cause the
                                                                               system message indicator to come
                                                                               on. The system message indicator
                                                                               does not go off until the problem(s)
                                                                               are corrected.




                                                                                                        CONTINUED


                                                                                                                 75
Multi-Information Display

When there are several warnings to
be shown, the system switches the
messages every 5 seconds.             See page   See page
The message is shown until you           78         79
push the INFO button.
To see the message again, press the
INFO button, 5 seconds after the
display disappears.                   See page   See page
                                         78         80
Here is a list of messages shown in
the multi-information display:

                                      See page   See page
                                         78         80



                                      See page   See page
                                         79         81



                                      See page   See page
                                         79         81



76
                      Multi-Information Display



See page   See page
   81         83




                                                  Instruments and Controls
See page   See page
   82         83



See page   See page
   82         84



See page   See page
   82        121



See page
   83

                                      CONTINUED


                                             77
Multi-Information Display

Fasten Seat Belt                        Door and Trunk Open                      Release Parking Lever

                                                                                    U.S.                Canada




In addition to the Seat Belt Reminder   If the trunk or any door is not closed   If you start driving without releasing
in the instrument panel, the multi-     tightly, the display reminds you to      the parking brake, the multi-
information display interrupts the      close the open trunk or the door(s)      information display interrupts the
current display and shows ‘‘FASTEN      before you start driving.                current display and shows
SEAT BELT’’ or ‘‘PASSENGER                                                       ‘‘RELEASE PARKING BRAKE.’’
FASTEN SEAT BELT’’ if either the                                                 This message continues, and a
driver or a front passenger does not                                             chime sounds, until you release the
fasten their seat belt while driving.                                            parking brake, or the vehicle speed
This message remains displayed if                                                slows down to less than 1.8 mph (3
you or your passenger ignores it and                                             km/h).
does not wear your seat belt while
the vehicle is moving.

78
                                                                                  Multi-Information Display

Remove Key                             Brake Fluid Low                           Tighten Fuel Cap

                                         U.S.                Canada




                                                                                                                           Instruments and Controls
If you leave the key in the ignition   If the brake fluid level is at or below   If the fuel fill cap is missing or not
switch in the LOCK (0) or              the MIN mark on the side of the           tightened properly, you will see
ACCESSORY (I) position and open        brake fluid reservoir in the engine       ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP.’’ Make sure
the driver’s door, you will see        compartment, you will see ‘‘BRAKE         the fuel cap is installed and tightened
‘‘REMOVE KEY’’ in the display and      FLUID LOW.’’ If you see this              at least one click.
hear a reminder beeper.                message, have the brake system
                                       checked by your dealer (see page
                                        288 ).



                                                                                                           CONTINUED


                                                                                                                     79
Multi-Information Display

The TIGHTEN FUEL CAP message              Fuel Low                                 Washer Fluid Low
should go off after tightening the
fuel cap, turning the ignition switch
off and on, then driving over 30 mph
(48 km/h) for at least 45 seconds.
Due to different driving conditions, it
may take a few driving trips to make
the message go off.

If a loose or missing fuel cap was not
the cause of the ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL
CAP’’ message coming on, the
message will turn off and the
Malfunction Indicator Lamp will
come on. If this happens, have your       If the level of the fuel in the tank     Canadian models only
vehicle checked by your dealer as         gets low, you will see ‘‘FUEL LOW’’      If the fluid level in the windshield
soon as possible.                         in the multi-information display, and    washer reservoir gets low, you will
                                          you must refuel soon. The low fuel       see ‘‘WASHER FLUID LOW’’ in the
                                          indicator in the instrument panel will   multi-information display.
                                          also come on.




80
                                                                                  Multi-Information Display

Passenger Side Airbag Off               Check VSA System                         Check Engine Oil Level

   U.S.              Canada




                                                                                                                          Instruments and Controls
If the passenger’s side airbag has      If there is a problem with the vehicle   If the engine oil is very low or has
automatically shut off, you will see    stability assist (VSA) system, you       lost pressure, you will see ‘‘CHECK
‘‘PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG OFF’’           will see ‘‘CHECK VSA SYSTEM’’ in         ENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ in the multi-
in the multi-information display. See   the multi-information display. If you    information display. You will also see
page 34 for more information.           see this message, have the VSA           the low oil pressure indicator in the
                                        system checked by your dealer (see       instrument panel flashing or staying
                                        page 255 ).                              on. If you see this message, you
                                                                                 should take immediate action since
                                                                                 serious engine damage is possible.
                                                                                 Follow the procedure on page 323 .

                                                                                                           CONTINUED


                                                                                                                    81
Multi-Information Display

Check Transmission                     Check ABS System                         Check Airbag System




Automatic transmission:                If there is a problem in the anti-lock   If there is a problem with your front
If there is a problem with the         brake system (ABS), you will see         airbags, side airbags, passenger’s
automatic transmission, you will see   ‘‘CHECK ABS SYSTEM’’ in the              side airbag automatic cutoff system,
‘‘CHECK TRANSMISSION’’ in the          multi-information display. If you see    automatic seat belt tensioners, side
multi-information display. Avoid       this message, have your vehicle          curtain airbags, driver’s seat position
rapid acceleration, and have the       checked by a dealer (see page 253 ).     sensor, or the front passenger’s
transmission checked by a dealer as                                             weight sensors, you will see
soon as possible.                                                               ‘‘CHECK AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ in the
                                                                                multi-information display. Take your
                                                                                vehicle to a dealer as soon as
                                                                                possible (see page 34 ).


82
                                                                                Multi-Information Display

Check Charging System                  Check Emission System                   Check Brake System
                                                                                  U.S.             Canada




                                                                                                                      Instruments and Controls
If you see ‘‘CHECK CHARGING            If you see ‘‘CHECK EMISSION             If there is a problem with the brake
SYSTEM’’ in the multi-information      SYSTEM’’ in the multi-information       system, you will see ‘‘CHECK
display, it means the battery is not   display, it means one of the engine’s   BRAKE SYSTEM’’ in the multi-
being charged. See page 324 for        emission systems may have a             information display. The parking
more information.                      problem. Have your vehicle checked      brake and brake system indicator in
                                       by a dealer (see page 324 ).            the instrument panel will also come
                                                                               on. See page 326 for more
                                                                               information.



                                                                                                        CONTINUED


                                                                                                                 83
Multi-Information Display

Check DRL System                         Cruise Control                        HandsFreeLinkTM




                                          U.S. model is shown

Canadian models only                     This message comes on when you        You can receive or make phone-calls
If there is a problem in the high        set the cruise control. The Cruise    from your cell phone through your
beam headlight’s circuit, you will see   Control indicator in the instrument   vehicle’s HandsFreeLink (HFL)
‘‘CHECK DRL SYSTEM’’ in the              panel will also come on. See page     system without touching your cell
multi-information display. If you see     204 for information on the cruise    phone.
this message, have your vehicle          control operation.                    To use the system, your cell phone
checked by a dealer.                                                           and the HFL system must be linked.
                                                                               Not all cell phones are compatible
                                                                               with this system. Refer to page
                                                                                213 for instructions on how to link
                                                                               your cell phone to the HFL and how
                                                                               to receive or make phone calls.

84
                                                                              Multi-Information Display

Customized Settings
With the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, press and hold the
INFO button for more than 3
seconds. ‘‘CUSTOMIZE ENTRY’’
appears in the multi-information




                                                                                                                    Instruments and Controls
display.
                                      DRIVER’S
                                      ID




                                     You can customize some vehicle          If you use the key to unlock the
                                     control settings for ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ and   driver’s door, the system cannot
                                     ‘‘DRIVER 2’’ separately.                recognize either ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ or
                                                                             ‘‘DRIVER 2.’’ In this case, when you
                                     To have the driver’s ID detected,       try to enter the customizing mode,
                                     make sure you use your transmitter      ‘‘DRIVER UNKNOWN
                                     to unlock the driver’s door.            CUSTOMIZE IMPOSSIBLE’’ will be
                                                                             displayed, and you cannot customize
                                                                             some of the settings.



                                                                                                      CONTINUED


                                                                                                               85
Multi-Information Display

                                         The first customizing menu is:          If you want to change any vehicle
                                           CHANGE SETTING                        control settings, select ‘‘CHANGE
                                           DEFAULT ALL                           SETTING,’’ and follow the
                                                                                 instructions on page 91 .
                                         Every time you press the INFO
                                         button, the display cycles from         If you do not make any changes,
                                         ‘‘CHANGE SETTING,’’ ‘‘DEFAULT           select ‘‘EXIT,’’ the display returns to
                                         ALL,’’ ‘‘EXIT’’ and then back to        normal display.
                                         ‘‘CHANGE SETTING.’’ Press the
                                         SEL/RESET button to enter your          You can also use the Select/Reset
                                         selection.                              knob in the instrument panel. Turn
     AT model          MT model                                                  the knob to select a setting and press
                                         If you want the settings as they were   it to enter your selection.
To change the settings, stop the         when the vehicle left the factory,
vehicle, and make sure to set the        select ‘‘DEFAULT ALL,’’ as
parking brake and put the                described on page 89 .
transmission in Park (A/T) or
neutral (M/T). If you try to enter the
customizing mode while the vehicle
is moving, the above message
appears and you cannot change the
settings.




86
                                                                             Multi-Information Display

Here are the settings you can       CUSTOMIZE GROUP       CUSTOMIZE MENU          CUSTOMIZE SET UP
customize in this mode:               METER SETUP     LANGUAGE                 ENGLISH                  See page
                                                      SELECTION                FRENCH                      93
Refer to pages in the next column                                              SPANISH
about the settings you want to                        ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.       5°F    0 F    5°F      See page
customize.                                            DISPLAY                    3°C    0 C    3°C         95




                                                                                                                   Instruments and Controls
                                                      TRIP A & AVG. FUEL       ON                       See page
                                                      RESET with REFUEL        OFF                         97
                                                      ELAP. TIME RESET         IGN RESET                See page
                                                      CONDITION                TRIP A RESET                99
                                                                               TRIP B RESET
                                                      PRIMARY DISP             INST. FUEL               See page
                                                      SELECTION                AVG. FUEL                  101
                                                                               RANGE
                                                                               ELAPSED TIME
                                                                               AVG. SPEED
                                    POSITION SETUP    MEMORY POSITION          ON                       See page
                                                      LINK                     OFF                        103


                                                                               : Default setting




                                                                                                     CONTINUED


                                                                                                              87
Multi-Information Display

 LIGHTING SETUP   INTERIOR LIGHT       15 sec                    See page
                  DIMMING TIME         30 sec                      105
                                       60 sec
                  HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF   0 sec                     See page
                  TIMER                15 sec                      107
                                       30 sec
                                       60 sec
 DOOR · WINDOW    DOOR LOCK MODE       DRIVER DOOR               See page
 SETUP                                 ALL DOORS                   110
                  KEYLESS LOCK         ON                        See page
                  ACKNOWLEDGEMENT      OFF                         112
                  SECURTY RELOCK       30 sec                    See page
                  TIMER                60 sec                      114
                                       90 sec
 WIPER SETUP      FRONT WIPER ACTION   WITH VEH SPD              See page
                                       INTERMITTENT                116

                                             : Default setting




88
                                                                               Multi-Information Display

DEFAULT ALL




                                                                                                                       Instruments and Controls
If you want to set the customizable       If you want to cancel ‘‘DEFAULT     To set the default settings, press the
vehicle control settings to the default   ALL,’’ press the SEL/RESET button   INFO button until the display
setting, press the INFO button on         while ‘‘CANCEL’’ is shown. The      changes as shown above. Press the
the steering wheel until ‘‘DEFAULT        display goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE    SEL/RESET button to select
ALL’’ is displayed.                       ENTRY.’’                            ‘‘DEFAULT ALL.’’

Press the SEL/RESET button to
enter ‘‘DEFAULT ALL.’’ You can
change the display between
‘‘CANCEL,’’ ‘‘OK’’ and ‘‘EXIT’’ each
time you press the INFO button.
                                                                                                        CONTINUED


                                                                                                                 89
Multi-Information Display




When ‘‘DEFAULT ALL’’ is                  If ‘‘DEFAULT ALL’’ is not completed     To exit ‘‘DEFAULT ALL,’’ press the
completed successfully, you will see     successfully, you will see the above    INFO button until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’
the above display for several seconds,   display for several seconds, then the   then press the SEL/RESET button.
and the display will return to           display goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE
‘‘CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.’’                     ENTRY.’’ Repeat the procedure to
                                         select ‘‘DEFAULT ALL.’’




90
                                                                     Multi-Information Display

Change Setting
You can customize some of the
vehicle control settings to your
preference. Here are the settings
you can customize:




                                                                                                 Instruments and Controls
  METER SETUP
  POSITION SETUP
  LIGHTING SETUP
  DOOR/WINDOW SETUP
  WIPER SETUP

While the multi-information display
is showing ‘‘CHANGE SETTING,’’
press the SEL/RESET button. The
display will start showing the initial
‘‘CUSTOMIZE GROUP.’’ Each time
you press the INFO button, the
display changes as shown in the next
column. Press the INFO button until
you see the setup you want to
customize, and press the SEL/
RESET button to enter your
selection.                               : Press SEL/RESET Button.
                                         : Press the INFO Button.



                                                                                            91
Multi-Information Display

Meter Setup
There are five custom settings in the
Meter Setup:

  LANGUAGE SELECTION
  ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.
  DISPLAY
  TRIP A & AVG. FUEL A RESET
  with REFUEL
  ELAP. TIME RESET
  CONDITION
  PRIMARY DISP SELECTION

While ‘‘METER SETUP’’ is displayed,
press the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel. Then, press the
INFO button repeatedly. Each time
you press the INFO button, the
display changes as shown.

To customize a setting, press the
INFO button repeatedly until you see
the setting you want to customize,
and press the SEL/RESET button.
Then follow the procedures
described on the following pages.       : Press the INFO Button.


92
                                                                                 Multi-Information Display

Language Selection




                                                                                                                      Instruments and Controls
                                            : Press the INFO Button.

While the multi-information display     There are three selectable languages,   Select the language you want by
is showing ‘‘METER SETUP,’’ press       English, French, and Spanish. Each      pressing the INFO button, and press
the SEL/RESET button on the             time you press the INFO button, the     the SEL/RESET button to enter
steering wheel. The display changes     display changes as shown.               your selection.
to ‘‘LANGUAGE SELECTION.’’
Press the SEL/RESET button again
to enter the language selection mode.




                                                                                                        CONTINUED


                                                                                                                93
Multi-Information Display




When language selection is            If you fail to select a language        To exit ‘‘LANGUAGE SELECTION,’’
successfully completed, the display   properly, you will see the above        press the INFO button repeatedly
changes to the screen shown above     display for several seconds, then the   until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ then press the
for several seconds, then goes back   display goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE        SEL/RESET button. The display
to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’                MENU.’’ Repeat the setup.               goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’

All the messages in the multi-
information display will be in the
language you selected.




94
                                                                             Multi-Information Display

Adjust Outside Temp. Display
If you find that the temperature
reading is always a few degrees
below or above the actual
temperature, adjust it as described
on the following columns.




                                                                                                                  Instruments and Controls
                                                                              U.S. model is shown

                                      While the multi-information display   Press the SEL/RESET button. The
                                      shows ‘‘METER SETUP,’’ press the      display changes as shown above.
                                      SEL/RESET button on the steering      The highlighted number is the
                                      wheel. The display changes to the     current adjustment above or below
                                      ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ Press the         the outside temperature. Press the
                                      INFO button once, and you will see    INFO button repeatedly until the
                                      ‘‘ADJUST. OUTSIDE TEMP.               appropriate number appears, then
                                      DISPLAY’’ as shown above.             press the SEL/RESET button to
                                                                            enter your selection.



                                                                                                    CONTINUED


                                                                                                             95
Multi-Information Display




  U.S. model is shown

When your selection is successfully     If you fail to enter the desired        To exit ‘‘ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.
entered, you will see the above         adjustment properly, you will see the   DISPLAY,’’ press the INFO button
display for several seconds, and then   above display for several seconds,      until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ and press the
the display goes back to                then the display goes back to           SEL/RESET button. The display
‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’                     ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ Repeat the          goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
                                        adjustment.




96
                                                                               Multi-Information Display

Trip A & Avg. Fuel Reset with Refuel
To reset ‘‘Trip A’’ and ‘‘AVG. FUEL
A’’ to reset every time you refuel
your vehicle, follow the procedure
described from the next column.




                                                                                                                     Instruments and Controls
                                       While the multi-information display    Press the SEL/RESET button. The
                                       shows ‘‘METER SETUP’’ press the        display changes as shown above.
                                       SEL/RESET button on the steering       The lower segment changes
                                       wheel. The display changes to          between ‘‘ON’’ and ‘‘OFF’’ each time
                                       ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ Press the          you press the INFO button. Enter
                                       INFO button repeatedly until you see   your selection by pressing the SEL/
                                       ‘‘TRIP A & AVG. FUEL RESET             RESET button.
                                       WITH REFUEL’’ in the lower
                                       segment as shown above.



                                                                                                       CONTINUED


                                                                                                                97
Multi-Information Display




When your selection is successfully     If you fail to enter your selection,   To exit ‘‘TRIP A & AVG. FUEL
entered, you will see the above         you will see the above display for     WITH REFUEL,’’ press the INFO
display for several seconds, and then   several seconds, then the display      button until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ and
the display goes back to                goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’       press the SEL/RESET button. The
‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’                     Repeat the setup.                      display goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE
                                                                               MENU.’’




98
                                                                             Multi-Information Display

Elap. Time Reset Condition
‘‘ELAPSED TIME’’ is the driving
time since you last reset the trip
computer. You can customize the
condition when the ‘‘ELAPSED
TIME’’ is reset.




                                                                                                                   Instruments and Controls
When the ‘‘ELAP. TIME RESET
CONDITION’’ is completed, the
‘‘ELAPSED TIME’’ is reset
regardless of the condition you
selected.

                                     While the multi-information display    Press the SEL/RESET button. The
                                     shows ‘‘METER SETUP,’’ press the       display changes as shown above.
                                     SEL/RESET button on the steering       The lower segment changes
                                     wheel. The display changes to the      between ‘‘IGN RESET,’’ ‘‘TRIP A
                                     ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ Press the          RESET’’ and ‘‘TRIP B RESET’’ each
                                     INFO button repeatedly until you see   time you press the INFO button.
                                     ‘‘ELAP. TIME RESET                     Enter your selection by pressing the
                                     CONDITION’’ in the lower segment       SEL/RESET button.
                                     as shown above.



                                                                                                     CONTINUED


                                                                                                              99
Multi-Information Display




When your selection is successfully     If you fail to enter your selection,   To exit ‘‘ELAP. TIME RESET
entered, you will see the above         you will see the above display for     CONDITION,’’ press the INFO
display for several seconds, and then   several seconds, then the display      button until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ and
the display goes back to                goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’       press the SEL/RESET button. The
‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’                     Repeat the setup.                      display goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE
                                                                               MENU.’’




100
                                                                               Multi-Information Display

Primary Disp Selection
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the primary
display of the trip computer always
shows ‘‘INST. MPG’’ (U.S. models)
or ‘‘INST. L/100 km’’ (Canadian




                                                                                                                     Instruments and Controls
models) in default setting. You can
customize this setting to your liking
in following procedure.




                                        While the multi-information display   Press the SEL/RESET button. The
                                        shows ‘‘METER SETUP,’’ press the      display changes as shown above.
                                        SEL/RESET button on the steering      The lower segment changes from
                                        wheel. Press the INFO button until    ‘‘INST. FUEL,’’ to ‘‘AVG. FUEL,’’ to
                                        you see ‘‘PRIMARY DISP                ‘‘RANGE,’’ to ‘‘ELAPSED TIME,’’
                                        SELECTION’’ as shown above.           then to ‘‘AVG. SPEED’’ each time
                                                                              you press the INFO button. Enter
                                                                              your selection by pressing the SEL/
                                                                              RESET button.



                                                                                                       CONTINUED


                                                                                                               101
Multi-Information Display




When your selection is successfully     If you fail to enter your selection,   To exit ‘‘PRIMARY DISP
entered, you will see the above         you will see the above display for     SELECTION,’’ press the INFO
display for several seconds, and then   several seconds, then the display      button until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ and
the display goes back to                goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’       press the SEL/RESET button. The
‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’                     Repeat the setup.                      display goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE
                                                                               MENU.’’




102
                                                                                Multi-Information Display

Position Setup                           Memory Position Link
If ‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINK’’ is
‘‘ON,’’ the driver’s seat moves to the
position stored in the memory when
you open the driver’s door, using the
remote transmitter.




                                                                                                                        Instruments and Controls
Refer to page 142 for setting the seat
position memory. Also refer to page
 131 for remote transmitter use.




                                         While the multi-information display   Press the SEL/RESET button. The
                                         shows ‘‘POSITION SETUP,’’ press       display changes as shown above.
                                         the SEL/RESET button on the
                                         steering wheel. The display changes   Select ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF ’’ by pressing
                                         to ‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINK’’ as        the INFO button, and enter your
                                         shown above.                          selection by pressing the SEL/
                                                                               RESET button.




                                                                                                          CONTINUED


                                                                                                                  103
Multi-Information Display




When your selection is entered, you      If you fail to enter your selection,    To exit ‘‘MEMORY POSITION
will see the above display for several   you will see the above display for      LINK,’’ press the INFO button until
seconds, then the display goes back      several seconds, and the display goes   you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ then press the SEL/
to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’                   back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’             RESET button. The display goes
                                         Repeat the setup.                       back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’




104
                                                                                  Multi-Information Display

Lighting Setup                         Interior Light Dimming Time
There are two custom settings in the
Lighting Setup:

  INTERIOR LIGHT
  DIMMING TIME




                                                                                                                           Instruments and Controls
  HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER

While the ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP’’ is
displayed, press the SEL/RESET
button on the steering wheel. Each
time you press the INFO button, the
display changes between
‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING
TIME’’ and ‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO            The interior lights fade out when you     Press the SEL/RESET button. The
OFF TIMER.’’ To make your              close all doors. You can change the       display changes as shown above.
selection, press the SEL/RESET         time that the interior lights fade out.
button.                                                                          Each time you press the INFO
                                       While the multi-information display       button, the highlighted number
                                       shows ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP,’’ press           changes from ‘‘15 sec,’’ to ‘‘30 sec,’’
                                       the SEL/RESET button on the               and then to ‘‘60 sec.’’ To make your
                                       steering wheel. The display changes       selection, press the SEL/RESET
                                       to ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING               button.
                                       TIME’’ as shown above.

                                                                                                             CONTINUED


                                                                                                                     105
Multi-Information Display




When your selection is entered, you      If you fail to enter your selection,    To exit ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT
will see the above display for several   you will see the above display for      DIMMING TIME,’’ press the INFO
seconds, and then the display goes       several seconds, and the display goes   button until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ then
back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’              back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’             press the SEL/RESET button. The
                                         Repeat the setup.                       display goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE
                                                                                 MENU.’’




106
                                                                                   Multi-Information Display

Headlight Auto Off Timer




                                                                                                                           Instruments and Controls
While the multi-information display   Press the SEL/RESET button. The             Press the INFO button repeatedly
shows ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP,’’ press       display changes as shown above.             until the desired time appears, then
the SEL/RESET button on the                                                       press the SEL/RESET button to
steering wheel. Then press the        Each time you press the INFO                enter your selection.
INFO button to display                button, the highlighted number
‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER’’          changes from ‘‘0 sec,’’ to ‘‘15 sec,’’ to   When your selection is entered, you
as shown above.                       ‘‘30 sec,’’ and then to ‘‘60 sec.’’         will see the above display for several
                                                                                  seconds, and then the display goes
                                                                                  back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’


                                                                                                            CONTINUED


                                                                                                                    107
Multi-Information Display

The headlights, parking lights,
taillights, and license plate lights
turn off after the selected time when
you remove the key from the ignition
switch and close the driver’s door.




                                        If you fail to enter your selection,   To exit ‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF
                                        you will see the above display for     TIMER,’’ press the INFO button
                                        several seconds, then the display      until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ then press the
                                        goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’       SEL/RESET button. The display
                                        Repeat the setup.                      goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’




108
                                                                  Multi-Information Display

Door · Window Setup
There are three custom settings in
the Door · Window Setup:

  DOOR LOCK MODE
  KEYLESS LOCK




                                                                                              Instruments and Controls
  ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
  SECURITY RELOCK TIMER

While the multi-information display
shows ‘‘DOOR · WINDOW SETUP,’’
press the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel. Each time you press
the INFO button, the display
changes as shown in the next
column.

To customize a setting, press the
INFO button repeatedly until you see
the setting you want to customize,
and press the SEL/RESET button.
Then follow the procedures
described on the following pages.
                                       : Press the INFO Button.

                                                                                  CONTINUED


                                                                                        109
Multi-Information Display

Door Lock Mode
In default setting, if you push the
UNLOCK button once on the remote
transmitter or turn the key clockwise
in the driver’s door lock, only the
driver’s door unlocks.

You can select whether only the
driver’s door unlocks or all the doors
unlock in ‘‘DOOR LOCK MODE.’’



                                         While the multi-information display   Press the SEL/RESET button. The
                                         is showing ‘‘DOOR · WINDOW            display changes as shown above.
                                         SETUP,’’ press the SEL/RESET
                                         button on the steering wheel. The     Select ‘‘DRIVER DOOR’’ or ‘‘ALL
                                         display changes to ‘‘DOOR LOCK        DOORS’’ by pressing the INFO
                                         MODE’’ as shown above.                button, and enter your selection by
                                                                               pressing the SEL/RESET button.




110
                                                                                Multi-Information Display




                                                                                                                     Instruments and Controls
When your selection is successfully     If you fail to enter your selection,   To exit ‘‘DOOR LOCK MODE,’’
entered, you will see the above         you will see the above display for     press the INFO button until you see
display for several seconds, and then   several seconds, then the display      ‘‘EXIT,’’ then press the SEL/RESET
the display goes back to                goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’       button. The display goes back to
‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’                     Repeat the setup.                      ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’




                                                                                                       CONTINUED


                                                                                                               111
Multi-Information Display

Keyless Lock Acknowledgment
When you push the LOCK button on
the remote transmitter, the doors
and the trunk are set, and some
exterior lights flash, and a beeper
sounds when you push the LOCK
button again within 5 seconds, and
the security system has set and a
horn sounds (see page 203 ). You
can customize the exterior lights not
to flash and the beeper not to sound.


                                        While the multi-information display    Press SEL/RESET button, then
                                        shows ‘‘DOOR·WINDOW SETUP,’’           press the INFO button.
                                        press the SEL/RESET button on the
                                        steering wheel. Then press the         Each time you press the INFO
                                        INFO button repeatedly until you see   button, the display changes to ‘‘ON,’’
                                        ‘‘KEYLESS LOCK                         to ‘‘OFF,’’ then to ‘‘EXIT.’’
                                        ACKNOWLEDGMENT’’ as shown
                                        above.                                 Select ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’ by pressing
                                                                               the INFO button, and enter your
                                                                               selection by pressing the SEL/
                                                                               RESET button.



112
                                                                                  Multi-Information Display




                                                                                                                       Instruments and Controls
When your selection is entered, you      If you fail to enter your selection,    To exit ‘‘KEYLESS LOCK
will see the above display for several   you will see the above display for      ACKNOWLEDGMENT,’’ press the
seconds, and then the display            several seconds, and the display goes   INFO button until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’
changes to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’           back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’             then press the SEL/RESET button.
                                         Repeat the setup.                       The display goes back to
                                                                                 ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’




                                                                                                          CONTINUED


                                                                                                                 113
Multi-Information Display

Security Relock Timer
If you unlock the doors with the
remote transmitter, but do not open
any of the doors within 30 seconds,
the doors automatically relock and
the security system sets.

You can change this relock time
from 30 seconds to 60 or 90 seconds.




                                       While the multi-information display    Press the SEL/RESET button, then
                                       shows ‘‘DOOR·WINDOW SETUP,’’           press the INFO button.
                                       press the SEL/RESET button on the
                                       steering wheel. Then press the         Each time you press the INFO
                                       INFO button repeatedly until you see   button, the time changes from ‘‘30
                                       ‘‘SECURITY RELOCK TIMER’’ as           sec,’’ to ‘‘60 sec,’’ and then to ‘‘90 sec.’’
                                       shown above.




114
                                                                                  Multi-Information Display




                                                                                                                          Instruments and Controls
Select the desired relock time by        If you fail to enter your selection,    To exit ‘‘SECURITY RELOCK
pressing the INFO button, and enter      you will see the above display for      TIMER,’’ press the INFO button
your selection by pressing the SEL/      several seconds, and the display goes   until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ then press the
RESET button.                            back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’             SEL/RESET button. The display
                                         Repeat the setup.                       goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
When your selection is entered, you
will see the above display for several
seconds, and then the display goes
back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’




                                                                                                                  115
Multi-Information Display

Wiper Setup                            Front Wiper Action
When ‘‘WIPER SETUP’’ is shown in
the multi-information display, the
action of the windshield wipers can
be changed. To do this, refer to the
following procedure.




                                       With ‘‘WIPER SETUP’’ shown in the      Each time you press the INFO
                                       multi-information display, press the   button, the display changes from
                                       SEL/RESET button on the steering       ‘‘WITH VEH SPD,’’ to
                                       wheel. The display changes to          ‘‘INTERMITTENT,’’ and then to
                                       ‘‘FRONT WIPER ACTION’’ as              ‘‘EXIT.’’
                                       shown above.
                                                                              Press the INFO button to select
                                       Press the SEL/RESET button, then       ‘‘WITH VEH SPD’’ or
                                       press the INFO button.                 ‘‘INTERMITTENT,’’ and enter your
                                                                              selection by pressing the SEL/
                                                                              RESET button.


116
                                                                                  Multi-Information Display




                                                                                                                       Instruments and Controls
If you set the front wiper action to     seconds, and then the display goes      To exit ‘‘FRONT WIPER ACTION,’’
‘‘WITH VEH SPD,’’ the front wipers       back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’             press the INFO button until you see
run intermittently and the wiper                                                 ‘‘EXIT,’’ then press the SEL/RESET
interval is varied automatically         If you fail to enter your selection,    button. The display goes back to
according to the vehicle’s speed         you will see the above display for      ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
when the wiper switch is in the          several seconds, and the display goes
‘‘INT’’position. If you set it to        back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
‘‘INTERMITTENT,’’ the wipers run         Repeat the setup.
at regular intervals.

When your selection is entered, you
will see the above display for several

                                                                                                                 117
Controls Near the Steering Wheel


                                                 1
      HEADLIGHTS/FOG LIGHTS/              HORN       INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS            WINDSHIELD WIPERS/
      TURN SIGNALS (P.120-121)                       CONTROL (P.122)                        WASHERS (P.119)




                                                                                            HAZARD WARNING
                                                                                            BUTTON (P.123)
      REMOTE AUDIO
      CONTROL BUTTONS                                                                       CRUISE CONTROL
      (P.200)                                                                               BUTTONS (P.204)

      MOONROOF
      SWITCH                                                                                REAR WINDOW
      (P.150)                                                                               DEFOGGER BUTTON
                                                                                            (P.123)

      VEHICLE STABILITY
      ASSIST (VSA) OFF
      SWITCH (P.256)             STEERING WHEEL
                                 ADJUSTMENT LEVER
                                 (P.124)
   HANDSFREE LINKTM BUTTONS/             MULTI-INFORMATION
   VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS 2 (P.212) BUTTONS (P.70, 72)
 Vehicle without navigation system is shown.                       SEAT HEATER SWITCHES (P.137)

  1 : To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘Acura’’ logo.
  2 : Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.
118
                                                                         Wipers and Washers

Windshield Wiper        Push the right lever up or down to      LO    The wipers run at low speed.
                        select a position.
                                                                HI    The wipers run at high speed.
                        MIST     The wipers run at high
                        speed until you release the lever.      Windshield Washer        Pull the
                                                                wiper control lever toward you, and




                                                                                                       Instruments and Controls
                        OFF     The wipers are not activated.   hold it. The washers spray until you
                                                                release the lever. The wipers run at
                        INT     The length of the wiper         low speed, then complete one more
                        interval is varied automatically        sweep after you release the lever.
                        according to the vehicle’s speed.
                        Vary the delay by turning the INT
                        TIME ring. If you turn it to the
                        shortest delay, the wipers will
1. MIST                 change to low speed operation when
2. OFF                  the vehicle speed exceeds 12 mph
3. INT   Intermittent   (20 km/h).
4. LO Low speed
5. HI High speed        To change the ‘‘FRONT WIPER
6. Windshield washers   ACTION’’ setting, see page 116 .




                                                                                                 119
Turn Signal, Headlights

Turn Signal and Headlights       Turn Signal Push down on the               Headlights Turning the switch
                                 left lever to signal a left turn and up    on the left lever to the
                                 to signal a right turn. To signal a lane   ‘‘      ’’position turns on the parking
                                 change, push lightly on the lever in       lights, taillights, instrument panel
                                 the proper direction and hold it. The      lights, side-marker lights, and rear
                                 lever will return to center when you       license plate lights.
                                 release it or complete a turn.
                                                                            Turning the switch to the ‘‘      ’’
                                                                            position turns on the headlights.

                                                                            When the light switch is in the
                                                                            ‘‘     ’’ or the ‘‘    ’’ position, the
                                                                            Lights On indicator comes on as a
                                                                            reminder. This indicator stays on if
1. Turn signal                                                              you leave the light switch on and
2. Off                                                                      turn the ignition switch to the
3. Parking and interior lights                                              ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
4. Headlights                                                               position.
5. High beams
6. Flash high beams                                                         If you leave the lights on with the
7. Fog lights off                                                           key removed from the ignition
8. Fog lights on                                                            switch, you will hear a reminder
                                                                            beeper when you open the driver’s
                                                                            door.



120
                         Headlights, Automatic Lighting Off Feature, Daytime Running Lights

High Beams To switch from low           Automatic Lighting Off Feature            The lights will turn on again when
beams to high beams, push the left      This feature turns off the headlights,    you unlock or open the driver’s door.
lever forward until you hear a click.   parking lights, taillights, and license   If you unlock the door, but do not
The high beam indicator will come       plate lights within 15 seconds of         open it within 15 seconds, the lights
on (see page 66 ). Pull it back to      removing the key from the ignition        will go off. With the driver’s door
return to low beams. To flash the       switch and closing the driver’s door.     open, you will hear a Lights-On




                                                                                                                          Instruments and Controls
high beams, pull the lever back                                                   reminder beeper.
lightly, then release it. The high      You can change this 15 second timer
beams will stay on as long as you       to 0, 30, or 60 seconds (see page         Daytime Running Lights
hold the lever back.                     107 ).                                   (Canadian Models)
                                                                                  With the headlight switch in the off
Fog Lights                              This feature activates if you leave       or       position, the high beam
Turn the fog lights on and off by       the headlight switch in the       or      headlights and the high beam
turning the switch next to the                position, remove the key, then      indicator come on with reduced
headlight switch.                       open and close the driver’s door.         brightness when you turn the
                                                                                  ignition switch to the ON (II)
You can use the fog lights only when    If you remove the key from the            position and release the parking
the headlights are on low beam.         ignition switch with the headlight        brake. They remain on until you turn
They will go off when you turn the      switch on, but do not open the door       the ignition switch off, even if you
headlights off or onto high beam.       and get out, the lights will turn off     set the parking brake.
                                        after 10 minutes.




                                                                                                           CONTINUED


                                                                                                                   121
Daytime Running Lights, Instrument Panel Brightness

The headlights revert to normal          Instrument Panel Brightness
operation when you turn them on
with the switch.                                                                   U.S. model is shown


If you see a ‘‘CHECK DRL
SYSTEM’’ message in the multi-
information display, there is a
problem in the high beam headlight’s
circuit. Take your vehicle to a dealer
to have it checked.

When the multi-information display
shows a ‘‘DRL OFF’’ message, the           SELECT/RESET KNOB                          BRIGHTNESS LEVEL
daytime running lights are off.
Follow the procedure in the previous     The knob on the instrument panel         The level of brightness is shown in
page to turn them on.                    controls the brightness of the instru-   the multi-information display while
                                         ment panel lights. Turn the knob to      you adjust it. It goes out 5 seconds
                                         adjust the brightness.                   after you finish adjusting.

                                                                                  To reduce glare at night, the instru-
                                                                                  ment panel illumination dims when
                                                                                  you turn the light switch to       or
                                                                                         . Turning the Select/Reset
                                                                                  knob fully to the right until you hear
                                                                                  a click will cancel the reduced bright-
                                                                                  ness.

122
                                                                  Hazard Warning, Rear Window Defogger

Hazard Warning                           Rear Window Defogger




                                                                                                                            Instruments and Controls
                                         Without navigation system                   With navigation system

Push the button between the center       The rear window defogger will clear         Make sure the rear window is clear
vents to turn on the hazard warning      fog, frost, and thin ice from the           and you have good visibility before
lights (four-way flashers). This         window. Push the defogger button to         starting to drive.
causes all four outside turn signal      turn it on and off. The indicator
lights and both turn signal indicators   above the button comes on to show           The defogger and antenna wires on
in the instrument panel to flash. Use    the defogger is on. If you do not turn      the inside of the rear window can be
the hazard warning lights if you need    it off, the defogger will shut itself off   accidentally damaged. When
to park in a dangerous area near         after about 35 minutes. It also shuts       cleaning the glass, always wipe side
heavy traffic, or if your vehicle is     off when you turn off the ignition          to side.
disabled.                                switch. You have to turn the
                                         defogger on again when you restart
                                         the vehicle.

                                                                                                                     123
Steering Wheel Adjustment

Make any steering wheel adjustment                                           3. Push the lever up to lock the
before you start driving.                                                       steering wheel in that position.

                                                                             4. Make sure you have securely
                                                                                locked the steering wheel in place
  Adjusting the steering wheel                                                  by trying to move it up, down, in,
  position while driving may                                                    and out.
  cause you to lose control of the
  vehicle and be seriously injured
  in a crash.

  Adjust the steering wheel only
  when the vehicle is stopped.
                                     1. Push the lever under the steering
                                        column all the way down.

                                     2. Move the steering wheel up or
                                        down, and in or out to the desired
                                        position. Make sure you can see
                                        the instrument panel gauges and
                                        the indicator lights.




124
                                                                                             Keys and Locks

  KEY         MASTER VALET KEY         You should have received a key           Do not drop the keys or set heavy
  NUMBER      KEY     (LIGHT GREY)     number tag with your keys. You will      objects on them.
  TAG         (BLACK)                  need this key number if you ever
                                       have to get a lost key replaced. Use     Keep the keys away from liquids.
                                       only Acura-approved key blanks.          If they get wet, dry them
                                                                                immediately with a soft cloth.




                                                                                                                     Instruments and Controls
                                       These keys contain electronic
                                       circuits that are activated by the     The keys do not contain batteries.
                                       immobilizer system. They will not      Do not try to take them apart.
                                       work to start the engine if the
                                       circuits are damaged.                  Remote Transmitter
                                                                              Your vehicle also comes with two
                                         Protect the keys from direct         remote transmitters; see page
The master key fits all the locks on     sunlight, high temperature, and      130 for an explanation of how to
your vehicle. The valet key works        high humidity.                       operation.
only in the ignition and the door
locks. You can keep the trunk
release handle, rear seat trunk
access, and glove box locked when
you leave your vehicle and the valet
key at a parking facility.




                                                                                                               125
Immobilizer System

The immobilizer system protects           If the system repeatedly does not        As required by the FCC:
your vehicle from theft. If an            recognize the coding of your key,        This device complies with Part 15 of the
improperly-coded key (or other            contact your dealer.                     FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
device) is used, the engine will not                                               following two conditions: (1) This device
start.                                    Do not attempt to alter this system      may not cause harmful interference, and
                                          or add other devices to it. Electrical   (2) this device must accept any
When you turn the ignition switch to      problems could result that may make      interference received, including
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer     your vehicle undrivable.                 interference that may cause undesired
system indicator should come on for                                                operation.
a few seconds, then go off. If the        If you lose your key and you cannot
indicator starts to blink, it means the   start the engine, contact your dealer.   Changes or modifications not expressly
system does not recognize the                                                      approved by the party responsible for
coding of the key. Turn the ignition                                               compliance could void the user’s
switch to the LOCK (0) position,                                                   authority to operate the equipment.
remove the key, reinsert it, and turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)                                                 This device complies with Industry
position again.                                                                    Canada Standard RSS-210.
The system may not recognize your                                                  Operation is subject to the following two
key’s coding if another immobilizer                                                conditions: (1) this device may not cause
key or other metal object (i.e. key                                                interference, and (2) this device must
fob) is near the ignition switch when                                              accept any interference that may cause
you insert the key.                                                                undesired operation of the device.




126
                                                                                                    Ignition Switch

                                          If the front wheels are turned, the      You will hear a reminder beeper if
                                          anti-theft lock may make it difficult    you leave the key in the ignition
                                          to turn the key. Firmly turn the         switch in the LOCK (0) or the
                                          steering wheel to the left or right as   ACCESSORY (I) position and open
                                          you turn the key.                        the driver’s door. Remove the key to
                                                                                   turn off the beeper.




                                                                                                                           Instruments and Controls
                                          ACCESSORY (I) You can
                                          operate the audio system and the         If your vehicle has an automatic
                                          accessory power sockets in this          transmission, the shift lever must be
                                          position.                                in Park before you can remove the
                                                                                   key from the ignition switch.
                                          ON (II) This is the normal key
                                          position when driving. Several of the
The ignition switch has four              indicators on the instrument panel
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY            come on as a test when you turn the        Removing the key from the
(I), ON (II), and START (III).            ignition switch from the                   ignition switch while driving
                                          ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)               locks the steering. This can
LOCK (0) You can insert or                position.                                  cause you to lose control of the
remove the key only in this position.                                                vehicle.
To turn the key, you must push the        START (III) Use this position
key in slightly. If your vehicle has an   only to start the engine. The switch       Remove the key from the
automatic transmission, the shift         returns to the ON (II) position when       ignition switch only when
lever must also be in park.               you let go of the key.                     parked.




                                                                                                                    127
Door Locks

 LOCK TAB                              All doors can be locked from the          Power Door Locks
                                       outside by using the key in the
                                       driver’s door. To unlock only the         DRIVER’S DOOR     Lock
                                       driver’s door or all doors (depending
                                       on the ‘‘DOOR LOCK MODE’’
                                                                                 Unlock
                                       setting), insert the key, turn the key,
                                       and release it. The remaining doors
                                       unlock when you turn the key a
                                       second time within a few seconds.
                                       To change this setting, see page 110 .

                                       You can open or close the windows
                                       by using the key in the driver’s door              MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
Each door has a lock tab on the top.   (see page 149 ).
Push the tab down to lock the door                                               Each front door has a master door
and pull it up to unlock.                                                        lock switch. Either switch locks and
                                                                                 unlocks all doors. On the driver’s
To lock the passenger’s door when                                                door, push the top of the master
getting out of the vehicle, push the                                             door lock switch to lock all doors.
lock tab down and close the door. To                                             Push the bottom to unlock them.
lock the driver’s door, remove the
key from the ignition switch and
push the lock tab down or push the
top of the master switch, then close
the door.


128
                                                                    Door Locks, Childproof Door Locks

                                       Lockout Prevention                      Childproof Door Locks
                                       With the driver’s door open and the
 MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH               key in the ignition, both master door                                  Unlock
                                       lock switches are disabled. You will
       Unlock                          see a ‘‘REMOVE KEY’’ message in
                                       the multi-information display (see




                                                                                                                        Instruments and Controls
                                       page 79 ). If you try to lock an open
                                       driver’s door by pushing in the lock                                    Lock
        Lock                           tab, all doors will unlock when you
                                       close the driver’s door.


        FRONT PASSENGER’S DOOR

On the front passenger’s door, push                                            The childproof door locks are
the master door lock switch down to                                            designed to prevent children seated
lock the all doors, and up to unlock                                           in the rear from accidentally opening
them.                                                                          the rear doors. Each rear door has a
                                                                               lock lever near the edge. With the
                                                                               lever in the LOCK position, the door
                                                                               cannot be opened from inside
                                                                               regardless of the position of the lock
                                                                               tab. To open the door, pull the lock
                                                                               tab up, and use the outside door
                                                                               handle.


                                                                                                                 129
Remote Transmitter

                                        closed.                            UNLOCK          Press this button once
 LED                       LOCK
                           BUTTON                                          to unlock the driver’s door or all the
                                        To change the ‘‘KEYLESS LOCK       doors (depending on the ‘‘DOOR
                                        ACKNOWLEDGEMENT’’ setting,         LOCK MODE’’ setting). Press it
                                        see page 112 .                     twice to unlock the other doors.
                           TRUNK                                           Some exterior lights will flash twice
                           RELEASE      You can open and close all power   each time you press the button.
                           BUTTON
 UNLOCK                                 windows from outside the vehicle   The ceiling light (if the ceiling light
 BUTTON                                 with the key. With the remote      switch is in the Door Activated
                                        transmitter, you can open the      position) will come on when you
                           PANIC        windows. Refer to Power Windows    press the UNLOCK button. If you do
                           BUTTON       on page 149 .                      not open any doors within 30
                                                                           seconds (or whatever setting the
When the key is in the ignition                                            ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING
switch, the functions of each button                                       TIME’’ is set to), the light fades out.
are disabled.                                                              If you relock the doors with the
LOCK        Press this button once to                                      remote transmitter before 30
lock all doors. Some exterior lights                                       seconds have elapsed, the light will
will flash. When you push LOCK                                             go off immediately.
twice within 5 seconds, you will hear
a horn (depending on the ‘‘KEYLESS                                         To change the ‘‘DOOR LOCK
LOCK ACKNOWLEDGEMENT’’                                                     MODE’’ setting, see page 110 .
setting) to verify that the doors are
locked and the security system has
set. The Lock button will not work
this way if any door is not fully

130
                                                                                          Remote Transmitter

To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT         PANIC Press this button for               Recalling a Memorized Driving
DIMMING TIME,’’ see page 105 .         about 1 second to attract attention;      Position
                                       the horn will sound and the exterior
If you unlock the doors with the       lights will flash for about 30 seconds.       With Driver 1   With Driver 2
remote transmitter, but do not open    To cancel panic mode, press any
any doors within 30 seconds, the       other button on the remote




                                                                                                                           Instruments and Controls
doors automatically relock and the     transmitter, or turn the ignition
security system sets. To change this   switch to the ON (II) position.
setting, refer to ‘‘SECURITY
RELOCK TIMER’’ on page 114 .           TRUNK        Press this button for
                                       about 1 second to open the trunk.
                                       You cannot open the trunk with the
                                       remote transmitter if the trunk main
                                       switch is turned off (see page 136 ).

                                                                                 Each remote transmitter also
                                                                                 activates the Driving Position
                                                                                 Memory System and changes the
                                                                                 ‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINK’’
                                                                                 setting according to that remote (see
                                                                                 page 142 ).




                                                                                                           CONTINUED


                                                                                                                     131
Remote Transmitter

When you open the driver’s door        The driving position memory            Remote Transmitter Care
after unlocking it with the remote     activated (Driver 1, Driver 2) is        Avoid dropping or throwing the
transmitter, you will hear a beep      shown on the back of each                transmitter.
(depending on the ‘‘KEYLESS            transmitter. Make sure you store
LOCK ACKNOWLEDGEMENT’’                 your desired driving position in the     Protect the transmitter from
setting see page 112 ). The driver’s   memory that is activated by the          extreme temperature.
seat move to the positions stored in   transmitter you normally carry.
that memory location. You will hear                                             Do not immerse the transmitter in
two beeps when the movement is         You can turn off this system             any liquid.
completed.                             activation. Press and hold the LOCK
                                       and UNLOCK buttons at the same           If you lose a transmitter, the
To stop the system’s automatic         time. The LED in the remote              replacement needs to be
adjustment, do any of these actions:   transmitter will blink twice. Then       reprogrammed by your dealer.
  Press any button on the driver’s     release the buttons. Doing this also
  door: MEMO, memory button 1 or       cancels the ‘‘MEMORY POSITION
  2.                                   LINK’’ setting for that remote and
  Push any of the adjustment           restores the default settings.
  switches for the seat.
  Shift out of Park (A/T).             To turn it back on, repeat this
                                       procedure. The LED will come on
                                       for 1 second to indicate the feature
                                       has been turned on.




132
                                                                                       Remote Transmitter

Replacing the Transmitter Battery
If it takes several pushes on the
button to lock or unlock the doors,
replace the battery as soon as
possible.                                                                     BATTERY




                                                                                                                      Instruments and Controls
Battery type: CR2025




                                      To replace the battery:                2. Remove the old battery and note
                                                                                the polarity. Make sure the
                                      1. Place a cloth on the edge of the       polarity of the new battery is the
                                         transmitter, and remove the upper      same ( side facing up), then
                                         half by carefully prying on the        insert it in the transmitter.
                                         edge with a small flat-tip
                                         screwdriver.                        3. Snap the two halves of the
                                                                                transmitter case back together.




                                                                                                        CONTINUED


                                                                                                                133
Remote Transmitter

As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.




134
                                                                                                             Trunk


                        Pull




                                                                                                                          Instruments and Controls
                                              TRUNK RELEASE SWITCH
             TRUNK RELEASE LEVER                                                   MASTER KEY

You can open the trunk in any of        To close the trunk, press down on       To protect items in the trunk when
three ways:                             the trunk lid.                          you need to give the key to someone
                                                                                else:
  Pull up on the trunk release lever    See page 237 for cargo loading and
  located to the left of the driver’s   weight limit information. Keep the      1. Lock the trunk release lever with
  seat.                                 trunk lid closed at all times while        the master key. Also make sure
  Press and hold the trunk release      driving to avoid damaging the lid,         the rear seat is not folded down
  button on the remote transmitter.     and to prevent exhaust gas from            (see page 140 ).
  If the doors are unlocked, press      getting into the interior. See Carbon
  the trunk release switch on the       Monoxide Hazard on page 56 .            2. Give the person the valet key.
  trunk lid.

                                                                                                          CONTINUED


                                                                                                                    135
Trunk

Emergency Trunk Opener                  To open the trunk, push the release   Trunk Main Switch
                                        lever to the left.
             TRUNK RELEASE LEVER
                                        Parents should decide if their
                                        children should be shown how to use
                                        this feature.

                                        For more information about child
                                        safety, see page 41 .




As a safety feature, your vehicle has                                         To protect items in the trunk, you
a release lever on the trunk latch so                                         can disable the trunk-release lever
the trunk can be opened from the                                              on the left of the driver’s seat, the
inside.                                                                       trunk-release switch on the trunk lid,
                                                                              and the trunk-release button on the
                                                                              remote by turning off the trunk main
                                                                              switch in the glove box and locking
                                                                              the glove box. Make sure the rear
                                                                              seat is not folded down.
                                                                              If you need to give the key to
                                                                              someone else, give them the valet
                                                                              key.

136
                                                                                                  Seat Heaters

                                       In HI, the heater turns off when the   Follow these precautions whenever
                                       seat gets warm, and turns back on      you use the seat heaters:
                                       after the seat temperature drops.
                                                                                Use the HI setting only to heat the
                                       In LO, the heater runs continuously.     seats quickly, because it draws
                                       It does not cycle with temperature       large amounts of current from the




                                                                                                                      Instruments and Controls
                                       changes.                                 battery.

                                                                                If the engine is left idling for an
                                                                                extended period, do not use the
                                                                                seat heaters even on the LO
      SEAT HEATER SWITCHES                                                      setting. It can weaken the battery,
                                                                                causing hard starting.
Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters. The passenger seat
only has heaters in the seat bottom
because of the side airbag system.
The ignition switch must be in the
ON (II) position to use the heaters.
Push the top of the switch, HI, to
rapidly heat up the seat. After the
seat reaches a comfortable
temperature, select LO by pushing
the bottom of the switch. This will
keep the seat warm.


                                                                                                               137
Seats

Power Seat Adjustment                                               Driver’s Lumbar Support
See pages 13 15 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position seats and seat-backs.

The controls for the power
adjustable front seats are on the
outside edge of each seat bottom.
You can adjust the seats with the
ignition switch in any position. Make     Moves the seat
all seat adjustments before you start     forward and backward.
driving.
                                          Driver’s seat only:
Moving the long horizontal switch         Moves the front of the
adjusts the seat bottom in several        seat up or down and       To change the lumbar support, move
directions. The seat bottom adjusts       the rear of the seat up   the lever on the right side of the
in the direction you move the switch.     or down.                  seat-back forward or backward.
The short vertical switch adjusts the                               Keep moving the lever forward or
seat back angle.                          Driver’s seat only:       backward until you find a suitable
                                          Raises or lowers the      position.
                                          seat.

                                          Adjusts the seat-back
                                          angle forward or
                                          backward.


138
                                                                                                                     Seats

Head Restraints                            FRONT                                      REAR OUTSIDE POSITION
See page 15 for important safety
information and a warning about how to
properly position the head restraints.

Your vehicle has adjustable head




                                                                                                                                Instruments and Controls
restraints on the front seats and on
the outside positions of the rear seat.

The head restraints help protect you
and your passengers from whiplash
and other injuries. They are most                           RELEASE BUTTON                               RELEASE BUTTON
effective when you adjust them so
the back of the occupant’s head rests     The head restraints adjust for height.     To remove a head restraint for
against the center of the restraint. A    You need both hands to adjust the          cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as
taller person should adjust the           restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it     it will go. Push the release button
restraint as high as possible.            while driving. To raise it, pull upward.   and pull the restraint out of the seat-
                                          To lower the restraint, push the           back.
                                          release button sideways, and push
                                          the restraint down.




                                                                                                                 CONTINUED


                                                                                                                         139
Seats

Folding Rear Seat
The back of the rear seat folds down
to give you direct access to the trunk.
Each side folds down separately.
With only half the seat folded, you
can still carry a passenger in the
back seat. The seat-back can be
released from inside the vehicle or
inside the trunk.
                                                                                                                GUIDE

                                            MASTER KEY                                        CENTER SHOULDER BELT

                                          To fold down either side of the seat-   When storing cargo, you can move
                                          back from inside the vehicle, insert    the rear center shoulder belt out of
                                          the master key in the lock on the       the way by removing the belt from
                                          rear shelf. To fold down the driver’s   the guide.
                                          side, turn the key clockwise, pull
                                          down the top of the seat-back, then
                                          release the key. To fold down the
                                          passenger’s side, turn the key
                                          counterclockwise and perform the
                                          same procedure.




140
                                                                                                                  Seats

                                         Make sure that the folded seat-back         Do not put any heavy items on the
                                         does not interfere with the front           seat-back when it is folded.
                                         passenger’s seat-back. This will
                                         cause the front passenger’s weight          Make sure all items in the trunk, or
                                         sensors to work improperly (see             items extending through the opening
                                         page 30 ). Also check the passenger         into the back seat, are secured.




                                                                                                                            Instruments and Controls
                                         airbag off indicator to assure proper       Loose items can fly forward and
                                         operation of the passenger’s                cause injury if you have to brake
                                         advanced front airbag.                      hard. See Carrying Cargo on page
                                                                                      236 .
                                         Make sure all rear shoulder belts are
                     RELEASE LOOP        positioned in front of the rear seat-       Never drive with the seat-back
                                         back, and the center shoulder belt is       folded down and the trunk lid open.
To release the seat-back from inside     re-positioned in the guide whenever         See Carbon Monoxide Hazard on
the trunk, pull the release loop under   the seat-back is in its upright position.   page 56 .
the trunk panel.                         Be sure there are no twists in the
Push the seat-back down, then let go     center shoulder belt.
of the release.

To lock the seat-back upright, push it
firmly against the trunk panel. Make
sure it is latched in place by pulling
on the top of the seat.




                                                                                                                     141
Driving Position Memory System

Your vehicle has a memory feature       Storing a Driving Position in                                 MEMO BUTTON
for the driver’s seat position.         Memory
                                        Store a driving position only when
Two seat positions can be stored in     the vehicle is parked.
separate memories. You select a
memorized position by pushing the       1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
appropriate button or appropriate          (II) position. You cannot add a
remote transmitter (Driver 1 or            new driving position in the
Driver 2).                                 memory unless the ignition switch
                                           is in the ON (II) position. You can
This setting can be linked or              recall a memorized position with          INDICATORS
unlinked with the remote transmitter.      the ignition switch in any position.                   MEMORY BUTTONS
To customize the setting ‘‘MEMORY
POSITION LINK’’, see page 103 .         2. Adjust the seat to a comfortable       3. Press and release the MEMO
                                           position (see page 138 ).                 button on the driver’s door. You
                                                                                     will hear a beep. Then, both
                                                                                     indicators in the memory buttons
                                                                                     will start to blink. Press and hold
                                                                                     one of the memory buttons (1 or
                                                                                     2) within 5 seconds after you press
                                                                                     the MEMO button. When the
                                                                                     system completes to store a new
                                                                                     driving position, you hear two
                                                                                     beeps. The indicator in the stored
                                                                                     memory button will come on.


142
                                                                        Driving Position Memory System

Doing any of the following after       Selecting a Memorized Position           The system will move the driver’s
pressing the MEMO button will                                                   seat to the memorized position. The
cancel the storing procedure.                                                   indicator in the selected memory
                                                                                button will flash during movement.
  Not pressing a memory button                                                  When the adjustment is complete,
  within 5 seconds.                                                             you will hear two beeps, and the




                                                                                                                         Instruments and Controls
                                                                                indicator will stay on.
  Pressing the MEMO button again
  within 5 seconds.                                                             Notes for vehicles with M/T
                                                                                  You cannot select a memorized
  Readjusting the seat position.                                                  position if the transmission is in
                                                                                  reverse. Shift to another gear,
Each memory button stores only one                MEMORY BUTTONS                  then select.
driving position. Storing a new
position erases the previous setting   To select a memorized position, do         If the parking brake is not set, you
stored in that button’s memory. If     this:                                      must press and hold the memory
you want to add a new position while                                              button until the adjustment is
retaining the current one, use the     1. Make sure the parking brake is set      complete.
other memory button.                      (M/T) or the shift lever is in Park
                                          (A/T).
All stored driving positions will be
lost if your vehicle’s battery goes    2. Press the desired memory button
dead or is disconnected.                  (1 or 2) until you hear a beep.


                                                                                                           CONTINUED


                                                                                                                  143
Driving Position Memory System

To stop the system’s automatic         If desired, you can use the
adjustment, do any of these actions:   adjustment switches to change the
                                       seat position after it is in its
  Press any button on the driver’s     memorized position. If you change
  door: MEMO, memory button 1 or       the memorized position, the
  2.                                   indicator in the memory button will
                                       go out. To keep this seat position for
  Push any of the adjustment           later use, you must store it in the
  switches for the seat.               driver’s seat position memory.

  Shift out of Park (A/T), or into
  reverse (M/T).




144
                                                                                  Mirrors

                                          The inside mirror can automatically
 OFF BUTTON                INDICATOR
                                          darken to reduce glare. To turn on
                                          this feature, press the AUTO button
                                          on the bottom of the mirror. The
                                          indicator comes on as a reminder.
                                          When it is on, the mirror darkens




                                                                                            Instruments and Controls
                                          when it senses the headlights of a
                                          vehicle behind you, then returns to
                                          normal visibility when the lights are
                                          gone. Press the OFF button to turn
                                          off this feature.
 AUTO BUTTON

Keep the inside and outside mirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.




                                                                                      145
Mirrors

Adjusting the Power Mirrors             3. Push or pull the adjustment knob       Power Mirror Heaters
                                           right, left, up, or down to move the
  ADJUSTMENT KNOB                          mirror.                                HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

                                        4. When you finish, turn the
                                           adjustment knob to the center
                                           (off) position. This turns off the
                                           adjustment knob to keep your
                                           settings.




1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON                                             The outside mirrors are heated to
   (II) position.                                                                 remove fog and frost. With the
                                                                                  ignition switch in the ON (II)
2. Turn the adjustment knob to L                                                  position, turn on the heaters by
   (driver’s side) or R (passenger’s                                              pressing the button. The indicator in
   side).                                                                         the button comes on as a reminder.
                                                                                  Press the button again to turn the
                                                                                  heaters off.




146
                                                                                                 Power Windows

                                                                                  AUTO To open the driver’s
                                                                                  window, push the window switch
                                           Closing a power window on              firmly down, then release it. To stop
                                           someone’s hands or fingers can         the window from going all the way
                                           cause serious injury.                  down, pull back on the window
                                                                                  switch briefly.




                                                                                                                           Instruments and Controls
                                           Make sure your passengers are
                                           away from the windows before           To close the driver’s window fully,
                                           closing them.                          pull back the window switch firmly,
                                                                                  then release it. To stop the window
                   MAIN SWITCH                                                    from going all the way up, push
 DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH                  If the MAIN switch is pushed down        down on the window switch briefly.
                                         (OFF), the passenger windows
Turn the ignition switch to the ON       cannot be raised or lowered. Keep        To open or close the driver’s window
(II) position before operating any of    the MAIN switch off when you have        partially, push down or pull back on
the window switches. To open a           children in the vehicle so they do not   the window switch lightly and hold it.
window, push the switch down and         injure themselves by operating the       The window will stop when you
hold it. To close the window, pull the   windows unintentionally.                 release the switch.
switch up and hold it. Release the
switch to stop the window.




                                                                                                            CONTINUED


                                                                                                                   147
Power Windows

AUTO REVERSE If the driver’s           If your vehicle’s battery is           The power window system has a key-
window senses any obstacle while it    disconnected or goes dead, or the      off delay function. The windows will
is closing automatically, it will      driver’s window fuse is removed, the   still operate for up to 10 minutes
reverse direction, and then stop. To   AUTO function will be disabled. The    after you turn off the ignition switch.
close the window, remove the           power window system needs to be        Opening either front door cancels
obstacle, then use the window switch   reset after reconnecting the battery   the delay function. You must turn
again.                                 or installing the fuse.                the ignition switch to the ON (II)
                                                                              position again before you can raise
Auto reverse stops sensing when the    1. Start the engine. Push down and     or lower the windows.
window is almost closed. You should       hold the driver’s window switch
always check that all passengers and      until the window is fully open.
objects are away from the window
before closing it.                     2. Pull and hold the driver’s window
                                          switch to close the window
                                          completely, then hold the switch
                                          for about 2 seconds.

                                       If the power windows do not operate
                                       properly after resetting, have your
                                       vehicle checked by your dealer.




148
                                                                                                 Power Windows

Opening the Windows with the                            UNLOCK BUTTON            3. Turn the key clockwise again, and
Remote Transmitter                                                                  hold it. All four windows start to
You can open all of the windows                                                     open. To stop the windows,
from the outside with the remote                                                    release the key.
transmitter.                                           Open
                                                                                 4. To open the windows further, turn




                                                                                                                          Instruments and Controls
1. Press the UNLOCK button once                                                     and hold the key again (within
   to unlock the driver’s door             Close                                    10 seconds).
   (depending on the ‘‘DOOR LOCK
   MODE’’ setting).                                                              To close:
                                                                                 1. Insert the key in the driver’s door
2. Press the UNLOCK button a                                                        lock.
   second time, and hold it. The
   passenger’s doors unlock, and all   Opening/Closing the Windows with          2. Turn the key counterclockwise,
   four windows start to open. To      the Key                                      then release it.
   stop the windows, release the       You can open and close the windows
   button.                             with the key in the driver’s door lock.   3. Turn the key counterclockwise
                                                                                    again, and hold it. All four
3. To open the windows further,        To open:                                     windows start to close. To stop the
   press the button again (within 10   1. Insert the key in the driver’s door       windows, release the key.
   seconds).                              lock.
                                                                                 4. To close the windows further, turn
You cannot close the windows with      2. Turn the key clockwise, then              and hold the key again (within
the remote transmitter.                   release it.                               10 seconds).



                                                                                                                    149
Moonroof

                                           To tilt up the back of the moonroof,    The moonroof has a key-off delay
                                           press and hold the center button        function. You can still open and close
                                           (       ). To close the moonroof,       the moonroof for up to 10 minutes
                                           press and hold the upper part of the    after you turn off the ignition switch.
                                           switch (        ). To open the          The key-off delay function cancels as
                                           moonroof, press and hold the lower      soon as you open either front door.
                                           part of the switch (       ). Release   You must then turn the ignition
                                           the switch when the moonroof gets       switch to the ON (II) position to
                                           to the desired position. Make sure      operate the moonroof.
                                           everyone’s hands are away from the
                                           moonroof before opening or closing
                                           it.
                                                                                   If you try to open the moonroof in
The moonroof has two positions: it                                                 below-f reezing temperatures, or when
can be tilted up in the back for                                                   it is covered with snow or ice, you can
ventilation, or it can be slid back into     Opening or closing the                damage the moonroof panel or motor.
the roof. Use the switch under the           moonroof on someone’s hands
left dashboard vent to operate the           or fingers can cause serious
moonroof. The ignition switch must           injury.
be in the ON (II) position.
                                             Make sure all hands and fingers
                                             are clear of the moonroof
                                             before opening or closing it.




150
                                                                                    Parking Brake

                                          If you drive without releasing the
                                          parking brake, a beeper will sound,
                                          and you will also see a ‘‘RELEASE
                                          PARKING BRAKE’’ message in the
                                          multi-information display (see page
                                           78 ).




                                                                                                    Instruments and Controls
                                          Driving the vehicle with the parking
                                          brake applied can damage the rear
                                          brakes and hubs. A beeper will sound if
                                          the vehicle is put into gear with the
To apply the parking brake, pull the      parking brake on.
lever up fully. To release it, pull up
slightly, push the button, and lower
the lever. The parking brake
indicator on the instrument panel
should go out when the parking
brake is fully released (see page 63 ).




                                                                                              151
Sun Visor, Vanity Mirror

Sun Visor                               Vanity Mirror




To use the sun visor, pull it down.     To use a vanity mirror on the back of
You can also use the sun visor at the   the sun visor, pull up the cover.
side window. Remove the support
rod from the clip and swing the sun     The lights come on when you pull up
visor toward the side window.           the cover.




152
                                                                                                 Interior Lights

Ceiling Light                                                                  In the Door Activated position, the
                                                                               light comes on when you:
 DOOR ACTIVATED                          Front                                    Open either door.
                                                                                  Remove the key from the ignition
                                                                                  switch.
                                                                                  Unlock the doors with the key or




                                                                                                                         Instruments and Controls
                     ON
                                                                                  remote transmitter.
                                                                                  If you do not open a door, the light
                                                                                  fades out in about 10 seconds.
        OFF
                                                                               After all doors are closed tightly, the
                                                                               light dims slightly, then fades out in
 Rear                                            DOOR ACTIVATED                about 30 seconds.

The rear ceiling light has a three-     The front ceiling lights have a two-   To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT
position switch. In the OFF position,   position switch. In the Door           DIMMING TIME,’’ see page105.
the light does not come on. In the      Activated position, the lights come
Door Activated position, the ceiling    on when you open any door. In the      Turn on the front ceiling lights by
light comes on when you open any        OFF position, the lights do not come   pushing the lens. Push the lens again
door. After all doors are closed        on.                                    to turn if off. You can use these
tightly, the light fades out in about                                          lights at all times.
30 seconds. In the ON position, the
ceiling light stays on continuously.


                                                                                                          CONTINUED


                                                                                                                  153
Interior Lights

Courtesy Light                         Individual Interior Lights
                                       The courtesy lights in the front
              COURTESY LIGHT           doors and around the ignition switch
                                       come on when you open any door.
                                       After you close the door, the ignition
                                       switch light stays on for several
                                       seconds.




The courtesy light between the
spotlights comes on when you turn
the parking lights on. To adjust its
brightness, turn the Select/Reset
knob on the instrument panel.




154
                                                      Interior Convenience Items


CONSOLE COMPARTMENT/         FRONT DOOR POCKET/BEVERAGE HOLDER
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
                                                            CENTER POCKET




                                                                                        Instruments and Controls
                                                            GLOVE BOX




                    CENTER ARMREST/                         UTILITY POCKET/
                    BEVERAGE HOLDERS                        ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
          TRUNK                        BEVERAGE HOLDERS


                                                                            CONTINUED
                                                                                 155
Interior Convenience Items

Beverage Holders                         Accessory Power Sockets
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid        Front                                    Rear
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Liquid can also spill
from the door pocket beverage
holders when you close the doors.
Use only resealable containers in the
door pockets.

Spilled liquids can damage the
upholstery, carpeting, and electrical
components in the interior.

                                         To use the accessory power socket,       None of the sockets will power an
                                         pull up the cover. The ignition switch   automotive type cigarette lighter
                                         must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or          element. When more than one
                                         ON (II) position.                        socket is being used, the combined
                                                                                  power rating of the accessories
                                         These sockets are intended to supply     should be 120 watts or less
                                         power for 12 volt DC accessories         (10 amps).
                                         that are rated 120 watts or less (10
                                         amps).




156
                                                                                 Interior Convenience Items

Console Compartment




                                                                                                              Instruments and Controls
            CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

To open the console compartment,          You can put small items in the tray
pull up on the right lever and lift the   located in the console compartment
armrest.                                  lid. To use the tray, pull up on the
                                          left lever and lift up the armrest.
To close, lower the armrest, and
push it down until it latches.            The tray in the console compartment
                                          has a coin holder.




                                                                                                        157
Interior Convenience Items

Sunglasses Holder                         Glove Box

                                                                                     An open glove box can cause
                                                                                     serious injury to your passenger
                                                                                     in a crash, even if the
                                                                                     passenger is wearing the seat
                                                                                     belt.

                                                                                     Always keep the glove box
                                                                                     closed while driving.


                                                                 GLOVE BOX

To open the sunglasses holder, push       Open the glove box by pulling the
on the front edge. Make sure the          handle to the left. Close it with a firm
holder is closed while you are driving.   push. Lock or unlock the glove box
                                          with the master key.

                                          The glove box light comes on when
                                          the parking lights are on.




158
                                                                                                                                  Features

The climate control system in your     Climate Control System ................ 160                Removing CDs from the
vehicle provides a comfortable           Voice Control System................ 162                    Changer .................................. 192
driving environment in all weather     Dual Temperature Control ........... 167                 CD Changer Error Messages ...... 193
conditions.                            Climate Control Sensors ............... 169              Protecting your CDs...................... 194
                                       Playing the AM/FM Radio ........... 170                    General Information .................. 194
The standard audio system has            Voice Control System................ 172                 Protecting CDs........................... 194
many features. This section de-          To Play the AM/FM Radio ...... 172                     Playing a Tape ................................ 195
scribes those features and how to        To Select a Station ..................... 172            To Play a Tape ........................... 197




                                                                                                                                                      Features
use them.                              Adjusting the Sound ...................... 175             To Stop Playing a Tape ............. 197
                                       AM/FM Radio Reception ............. 177                    Tape Search Functions ............. 198
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio     Radio Frequencies ..................... 177              Caring the Tape and Player...... 199
system that requires a code number       Radio Reception ......................... 177          Steering Wheel Controls .............. 200
to enable it.                          Playing the XM Satellite                                 Radio Theft Protection.................. 201
                                            Radio ....................................... 179   Setting the Clock ........................... 202
The security system helps to dis-        Satellite Digital Radio ................ 179           Security System ............................. 203
courage vandalism and theft of your      Operating the XM Radio........... 180                  Cruise Control ................................ 204
vehicle.                                 Satellite Radio Signals ............... 182            HomeLink Universal
                                         Receiving Satellite Radio                                Transceiver................................. 207
                                            Service..................................... 183    HandsFreeLinkTM ........................... 211
                                       Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 184
                                       Playing Discs .................................. 185
                                         Operating the CD Changer ...... 187
                                         Loading CDs in the CD
                                            Changer .................................. 187
                                         To Play a CD .............................. 188
                                         To Stop Playing a CD ................ 192

                                                                                                                                             159
Climate Control

Without navigation system
                                   DRIVER’S SIDE            PASSENGER’S SIDE
                                   TEMPERATURE DISPLAY      TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

                            FAN CONTROL BAR                          A/C BUTTON

                                                                         MODE BUTTON




        FAN SPEED
        INDICATOR
                                                                                       PASSENGER’S SIDE
        DRIVER’S SIDE                                                                  TEMPERATURE
        TEMPERATURE                                                                    CONTROL BAR
        CONTROL BAR

        AUTO BUTTON
                                         OFF BUTTON              REAR WINDOW
                                                                 DEFOGGER BUTTON
                                              DUAL BUTTON    WINDSHIELD
                                                             DEFROST BUTTON
                                                 RECIRCULATION BUTTON




160
                                                                       Climate Control

With navigation system


             DRIVER’S SIDE                                          PASSENGER’S SIDE
             TEMPERATURE DISPLAY                                    TEMPERATURE DISPLAY




                                                                                            Features
                                                                    A/C ICONS



             DRIVER’S SIDE                                          PASSENGER’S SIDE
             TEMPERATURE                                            TEMPERATURE
             CONTROL BAR                                            CONTROL BAR
             AUTO BUTTON                                            RECIRCULATION BUTTON
                                                                    WINDSHIELD
             OFF BUTTON                                             DEFROST BUTTON
             DUAL BUTTON                                            REAR WINDOW
                                                                    DEFOGGER BUTTON
                                                                    A/C BUTTON




                                   MODE ICONS   FAN CONTROL ICONS


                                                                                      161
Climate Control

Proper use of the climate control       Voice Control System                  Automatic Operation
system can make the interior dry        On vehicles with navigation system    The automatic climate control
and comfortable, and keep the           The climate control system for your   system adjusts the fan speed and
windows clear for best visibility.      vehicle can also be operated using    airflow levels to maintain the interior
                                        the voice control system. See         temperature you select.
For the climate control system to       Navigation section in your Quick
provide heating and cooling, the        Start Guide for an overview of this   On vehicles without navigation system
engine must be running.                 system and the Navigation System      1. Press the AUTO button. You will
                                        manual for complete details.             see AUTO in the display.
You can adjust the temperatures of                                            2. Set the desired temperature by
the driver’s side and the passenger’s                                            pushing or of the driver’s
side independently (see page 167 ).                                              side temperature control bar. The
                                                                                 selected temperature will show in
                                                                                 the upper display.




162
                                                                                                   Climate Control

On vehicles with navigation system      When you push the passenger’s side         Semi-automatic Operation
In the AUTO mode, the vehicle’s         temperature control bar, the               You can manually select various
interior temperature is                 indicator in the DUAL button comes         functions of the climate control
independently regulated for the         on and the driver’s side and               system when it is in the AUTO mode.
driver and passenger. If the driver’s   passenger’s side temperature can be        All other features remain
side of the vehicle is getting too      controlled independently (see page         automatically controlled.
much sun, the system will adjust to a    167 ).
lower temperature.                                                                 On vehicles without navigation system




                                                                                                                              Features
                                        The system automatically selects the       Making any manual selection causes
1. Press the AUTO button. The           proper mix of conditioned and/or           the word AUTO in the display to go
   indicator in the button comes on.    heated air that will, as quickly as        out.
2. Set the desired temperature by       possible, raise or lower the interior
   pushing or of the driver’s           temperature to your preference.            On vehicles with navigation system
   side temperature control bar. The                                               Press the A/C button to view the
   selected temperature will show in    When you set the temperature to its        A/C manual control display.
   the upper display.                   lowest limit (          ) or its highest   Making any manual selection causes
                                        limit (         ), the system runs at      the indicator in the AUTO button to
                                        full cooling or heating only. It does      turn off.
                                        not regulate the interior temperature.

                                        In cold weather, the fan will not
                                        come on automatically until the
                                        heater starts to develop warm air.


                                                                                                              CONTINUED


                                                                                                                        163
Climate Control

Fan Control                             Temperature Control                  Air Conditioning (A/C) Button/
On vehicles without navigation system   To adjust the desired temperature,   Icons
Select the fan speed by pressing the    push       or      of the            On vehicles without navigation system
fan control bar (         or       ).   temperature control bar.             Press the A/C button to turn the air
The fan speed is represented by                                              conditioning on and off. You will see
vertical bars in the display.           Dual Button                          A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.
                                        Press the DUAL button to select
On vehicles with navigation system      dual temperature control mode (see   On vehicles with navigation system
Press the A/C button to view the        page 167 ). The indicator in the     Press the A/C button to view the
A/C manual control display. Touch       DUAL button comes on.                A/C manual control display.
the fan control icons to the desired                                         Touching ON or OFF icon in the
speed.                                  When you press the DUAL button       display turns the air conditioning on
                                        again (indicator turns off), both    and off.
                                        sides adjust to the driver’s side
                                        temperature.                         When you turn the A/C off, the
                                                                             system cannot regulate the inside
                                                                             temperature if you set the
                                                                             temperature control below the
                                                                             outside temperature.




164
                                                                                                 Climate Control

Recirculation Button                     The system should be left in fresh      Windshield Defroster Button
When the indicator in the button is      air mode under almost all conditions.   This button turns the windshield
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is   Keeping the system in recirculation     defrost on and off.
sent throughout the system again.        mode, particularly with the A/C off,
When the indicator is off, air is        can cause the windows to fog up.        When you push this button, air flows
brought in from the outside of the                                               from the defroster vents at the base
vehicle (fresh air mode).                Switch to recirculation mode when       of the windshield, and the system
                                         driving through dusty or smoky          automatically switches to fresh air




                                                                                                                          Features
The outside air intakes for the          conditions, then return to fresh air    mode and turns on the A/C. When
climate control system are at the        mode.                                   the indicator in the button is on, the
base of the windshield. Keep this                                                passenger’s temperature cannot be
area clear of leaves and other debris.                                           set separately from the driver’s.

                                                                                 Rear Window Defogger Button
                                                                                 This button turns the rear window
                                                                                 defogger off and on (see page123 ).




                                                                                                           CONTINUED


                                                                                                                    165
Climate Control

Mode Control                                      Air flows from the center      To Turn Everything Off
Use the mode control buttons or           and corner vents in the dashboard.     If you press the OFF button, the
icons to select the vents the air flows                                          climate control system shuts off
from. Some air flows from the                     Airflow is divided between     completely.
dashboard corner vents in all modes.      the vents in the dashboard and the        Keep the system off for short
                                          floor vents.                              periods only.
On vehicles with navigation system                                                  To keep stale air and mustiness
Press the A/C button to view the                   Air flows from the floor         from collecting, you should have
A/C manual control display, then          vents.                                    the fan running at all times.
touch any of the mode icons on the
display.                                           Airflow is divided between    On vehicles with navigation system
                                          the floor vents and the defroster      When the climate control system is
                                          vents at the base of the windshield.   turned off, the temperature in the
                                                                                 upper display will also turn off.




166
                                                                               Dual Temperature Control

Your vehicle has two temperature         Without navigation system
control bars, one for the driver, and
one for the passenger.                                DRIVER’S SIDE           PASSENGER’S SIDE
                                                      TEMPERATURE DISPLAY     TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
The driver’s side and the passenger’s
side can be controlled independently
by adjusting these bars when the
                                          DRIVER’S SIDE                                     PASSENGER’S SIDE
green indicator in the DUAL button




                                                                                                                Features
                                          TEMPERATURE                                       TEMPERATURE
is lit.                                   CONTROL BAR                                       CONTROL BAR

To set the driver’s side temperature                                 DUAL BUTTON
to a different value than the
passenger’s, press the DUAL button,      With navigation system
then press the temperature control
bars ( or side) on the driver’s
side. To set the passenger’s side to a    DRIVER’S SIDE                                     PASSENGER’S SIDE
different value than the driver’s,        TEMPERATURE                                       TEMPERATURE
                                          CONTROL BAR                                       CONTROL BAR
press the temperature control bars
( or side) on the passenger’s
side. You can adjust the passenger’s
side without pressing the DUAL            DUAL BUTTON
button first.



                                                                                                    CONTINUED


                                                                                                         167
Dual Temperature Control

Temperature Control Bars
Push AUTO or          . The selected
temperatures appear in the upper
display. For vehicles with navigation      DRIVER’S SIDE   PASSENGER’S SIDE
system when the indicator in the
DUAL button is off, you can adjust
both sides to the same temperature
by adjusting the driver’s side
temperature control bar ( or
side).

When you set the temperature to its
lower or upper limit, it is displayed as
        or        .




168
                                                            Climate Control Sensors

Sunlight Sensor/Temperature
Sensor
         SUNLIGHT SENSOR               TEMPERATURE SENSOR




                                                                                      Features
The climate control system has two
sensors. A sunlight sensor is in the
top of the dashboard, and a
temperature sensor is next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.




                                                                                169
Playing the AM/FM Radio

Without navigation system


                            AM/FM BUTTON   STEREO INDICATOR




                                                                            A. SEL BUTTON

         SCAN BUTTON                                                        SEEK BAR




                            PWR/VOL KNOB   PRESET BUTTONS     TUNE/SOUND KNOB


  U.S. model is shown.

170
                                                       Playing the AM/FM Radio

With navigation system
                                 UPPER DISPLAY




                                                                                       Features
                                                          PRESET ICONS
          A.SEL ICON                                      SOUND ICON
                                                          SCAN ICON


          PWR/VOL KNOB                                    TUNE/SOUND KNOB


          SEEK/SKIP BAR                                   AUDIO DISPLAY BUTTON

U.S. model is shown.      SCAN BUTTON   AM/FM BUTTON


                                                                                 171
Playing the AM/FM Radio

Voice Control System                   To Play the AM/FM Radio                  To Select a Station
On vehicles with navigation system     The ignition switch must be in the       You can use any of five methods to
The audio system for your vehicle      ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)             find radio stations on the selected
can also be operated using the voice   position. Turn the system on by          band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTO
control system. See the Navi section   pushing the PWR/VOL knob or the          SELECT, and the preset buttons or
in your Quick Start Guide for an       AM/FM button. Adjust the volume          icons.
overview of this system, and the       by turning the same knob.
navigation system manual for                                                    TUNE Use the TUNE/SOUND
complete details.                      On vehicles with navigation system       knob to tune the radio to a desired
                                       Pushing the AUDIO DISPLAY                frequency. Turn the knob right to
                                       button will also turn on the system.     tune to a higher frequency, and turn
                                                                                the knob left to tune to a lower
                                       The band and frequency that the          frequency.
                                       radio was last tuned to is displayed.
                                       To change bands, press the FM/AM         SEEK       The SEEK function
                                       button. On the FM band, ST will be       searches up and down from the
                                       displayed if the station is broadcast-   current frequency to find a station
                                       ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction on    with a strong signal. To activate it,
                                       AM is not available.                     press the       or      side of the
                                                                                SEEK bar, then release it.
                                       On U.S. models
                                       XM satellite radio information is
                                       available on page 183 .




172
                                                                                    Playing the AM/FM Radio

On vehicles with navigation system        Preset     Each preset button or icon   3. Pick the preset number (1 6)
To use the SCAN, preset and A.SEL         can store one frequency on AM, and         you want for that station. Press
function, press the AUDIO DISPLAY         two frequencies on FM.                     the button or icon and hold it until
button to view these icons.                                                          you hear a beep.
                                          1. Select the desired band, AM or
SCAN The SCAN function                       FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store        4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
samples all stations with strong             two frequencies with each preset        total of six stations on AM and
signals on the selected band. To             button or icon.                         twelve stations on FM.




                                                                                                                            Features
activate it, press the SCAN button, or
touch the SCAN icon (models with          2. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCAN          The preset frequencies will be lost if
navigation system), then release it.         function to tune the radio to a      your vehicle’s battery goes dead, is
You will see SCAN in the display.            desired station.                     disconnected, or the radio fuse is
The system will scan for a station                                                removed.
with a strong signal. When it finds
one, it will stop and play that station
for about 5 seconds.

If you do nothing, the system will
then scan for the next strong station
and play it for 5 seconds. When it
plays a station you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button or touch the
SCAN icon again.


                                                                                                             CONTINUED


                                                                                                                     173
Playing the AM/FM Radio

AUTO SELECT            If you are        If you do not like the stations Auto
traveling far from home and can no       Select has stored, you can store
longer receive your preset stations,     other frequencies on the preset
you can use the auto select feature to   buttons or icons. Use the TUNE,
find stations in the local area.         SEEK, or SCAN function to find
                                         stations, then store them in the
Press the A. SEL button or touch the     preset buttons or icons as described
A. SEL icon. A. SEL will appear in       previously.
the display, and the system will go
into scan mode for several seconds.      To turn off Auto Select, press the
It stores the frequencies of six AM,     A.SEL button or touch the A.SEL
and twelve FM stations in the preset     icon. This restores the presets you
buttons (1 6) or icons. You will         originally set.
see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after pressing a
preset button or icon if Auto Select
cannot find a strong station for every
preset button or icon.




174
                                                                                            Adjusting the Sound

Adjusting the Sound                      On vehicles without navigation system    On vehicles with navigation system
Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader are     You select which of these you want
each adjustable.                         to adjust by pressing the TUNE/
                                         SOUND knob. The mode changes
Balance/Fader       These two            from BASS to TREBLE to FADER to
modes adjust the strength of the         BALANCE, and then back to the
sound coming from each speaker.          selected audio mode, each time you
BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,   press the knob. Turn the knob to




                                                                                                                             Features
while FAD adjusts the front-to-back      adjust the setting to your liking.
strength.                                When the level reaches the center,
                                         you will see ‘‘     ’’ in the display.
Treble/Bass Use the TRE/BAS
modes to adjust the tone to your         The system will automatically return
liking.                                  the display to the selected audio
                                         mode about 5 seconds after you stop      If you want to adjust the sound while
                                         adjusting a mode.                        the radio or CD is playing, push the
                                                                                  AUDIO DISPLAY button and then
                                                                                  push the TUNE/SOUND knob or
                                                                                  touch the SOUND icon in the display.
                                                                                  The current setting is shown on the
                                                                                  display.




                                                                                                             CONTINUED


                                                                                                                       175
Adjusting the Sound

                                        To adjust the TREBLE and BASS,
                                        touch or on each side of the
                                        TREBLE or BASS adjustment bar.
                                        The adjustment bar shows you the
                                        current setting.

                                        The Left/Right BALANCE adjusts
                                        the side-to-side strength, while
                                        Front/Rear FADER adjust the front-
                                        to-back strength. To adjust the Left/
                                        Right BALANCE, touch the ‘‘L’’ or
                                        ‘‘R’’ icon. To adjust the Front/Rear
  ADJUSTMENT BARS                       FADER, touch the ‘‘FR’’ or ‘‘RR’’ icon.

You select which of these you want      The system will automatically return
to adjust by pressing the TUNE/         the display to the selected audio
SOUND knob. The mode changes            mode about 5 seconds after you stop
from BASS to TREBLE to FADER to         adjusting a mode.
BALANCE, and then back to the
selected audio mode, each time you
press the button. You can also select
the mode by touching the
adjustment bar on the display
directly.



176
                                                                                       AM/FM Radio Reception

Radio Frequencies                         Radio Reception
The radio can receive the complete        How well the radio receives stations
AM and FM bands.                          is dependent on many factors, such
Those bands cover these frequen-          as the distance from the station’s
cies:                                     transmitter, nearby large objects,
                                          and atmospheric conditions.
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz                A radio station’s signal gets weaker




                                                                                                                             Features
                                          as you get farther away from its
Radio stations on the AM band are         transmitter. If you are listening to an
assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz      AM station, you will notice the sound
apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the    volume becoming weaker, and the
FM band are assigned frequencies at       station drifting in and out. If you are
least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).   listening to an FM station, you will      Driving very near the transmitter of
                                          see the stereo indicator flickering off   a station that is broadcasting on a
Stations must use these exact             and on as the signal weakens.             frequency close to the frequency of
frequencies. It is fairly common for      Eventually, the stereo indicator will     the station you are listening to can
stations to round-off the frequency in    go off and the sound will fade            also affect your radio’s reception.
their advertising, so your radio could    completely as you get out of range of     You may temporarily hear both
display a frequency of 100.9 even         the station’s signal.                     stations, or hear only the station you
though the announcer may identify                                                   are close to.
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’



                                                                                                              CONTINUED


                                                                                                                      177
AM/FM Radio Reception

                                                                                  As required by the FCC:
                                                                                  Changes or modifications not expressly
                                                                                  approved by the party responsible for
                                                                                  compliance could void the user’s
                                                                                  authority to operate the equipment.




Radio signals, especially on the FM        Radio reception can be affected by
band, are deflected by large objects       atmospheric conditions such as
such as buildings and hills. Your          thunderstorms, high humidity, and
radio then receives both the direct        even sunspots. You may be able to
signal from the station’s transmitter,     receive a distant radio station one
and the deflected signal. This causes      day and not receive it the next day
the sound to distort or flutter. This is   because of a change in conditions.
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.                           Electrical interference from passing
                                           vehicles and stationary sources can
                                           cause temporary reception problems.



178
                                                        Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. Models)

Satellite Digital Radio                  without navigation system            with navigation system
U.S. Models only
Your vehicle is capable of receiving
                                                                              PWR/VOL           PRESET ICONS
XM Satellite Radio anywhere in the       SCAN BUTTON
                                                                              KNOB
United States, except Hawaii and                  CATEGORY/CHANNEL MODE                 UPPER DISPLAY
Alaska.                                                                        MODE
                                                  INDICATOR                    ICON
XM is a registered trade mark of          XM BUTTON
XM Satellite Radio, Inc.                                   DISP/MODE BUTTON




                                                                                                                     Features
XM Satellite Radio receives signals
from two satellites to produce clear,
high-quality digital reception. It
offers many channels in several
categories. Along with a large
                                                                                                          SOUND
selection of different types of music,                                                                    ICON
XM Satellite Radio also allows you to                                                                     SCAN
view channel and category selections                                                                      ICON
in the audio display.
                                                                                      SCAN          TUNE/
                                         PWR/VOL       PRESET        TUNE/            BUTTON        SOUND
                                         KNOB          BUTTONS       SOUND                          KNOB
                                                                     KNOB                      AUDIO DISPLAY
                                                                                               BUTTON
                                                              SEEK/SKIP       SEEK/SKIP
                                                              CATEGORY BAR    CATEGORY BAR XM BUTTON

                                                                                                       CONTINUED


                                                                                                               179
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. Models)

Operating the XM Radio                 MODE To switch between the               TUNE Turn the TUNE knob to
To listen to the XM satellite Radio,   category mode and channel mode,          change channel selections. Turn the
turn the ignition switch to the        press and hold the DISP/MODE             knob right for higher numbered
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.     button until the mode changes. On        channels and left for lower
Push the PWR/VOL knob to turn on       models with navigation system,           numbered channels. In the category
the audio system, and press the XM     touch the MODE icon on the display.      mode, you can only select channels
button. Adjust the volume turning      In channel mode, you can select all      within that category.
the PWR/VOL knob. The last             of the available channels. In category
channel you listened to will show in   mode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical,
the display.                           etc., you can select all of the
                                       channels within that category.
On vehicles with navigation system
To operate the XM Radio, Press the     On vehicles without navigation system
AUDIO DISPLAY button to view the       DISP Each time you press and
XM Radio control display.              release the DISP/MODE button, the
                                       display changes in the following
                                       sequence: Channel name, category,
                                       artist name, and music title.




180
                                                         Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. Models)

SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY)                     Preset     You can store up to 12       3. Pick a preset number (icon) you
Press either side of the CATEGORY        preset channels using each side of         want for that channel. Press and
bar (      or      ) to select another   the preset bar or preset icons on the      hold the bar (icon) until you hear a
category.                                screen. Each side of the bar stores        beep.
                                         one channel from the XM1 band and
SCAN The scan function gives             one channel from the XM2 band.          4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
you a sampling of all channels while                                                first six channels.
in the channel mode. In the category     To store a channel:




                                                                                                                           Features
mode, only the channels within that                                              5. Press the XM button again or
category are scanned. To activate        1. Press the XM button. Either XM1         touch the other XM icon (XM1 or
scan, press the SCAN button or              or XM2 will show in the display.        XM2) on the audio display. Store
touch the SCAN icon on the screen.                                                  the next six channels using steps 2
The system plays each channel in         2. Use the tune, seek, or scan             and 3.
numerical order for a few seconds,          function to tune to a desired
then selects the next channel. When         channel.                             Once a channel is stored, press and
you hear a channel you want to listen                                            release the proper side of the preset
to, press the button or touch the icon   In category mode, only channels         bar (icon) to tune to it.
again.                                   within that category can be selected.
                                         In channel mode, all channels can be
                                         selected.




                                                                                                           CONTINUED


                                                                                                                   181
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. Models)

                                               Satellite Radio Signals
                                               Satellite radio receives signals from
      Signal may be                            two satellites to produce clear, high-
      blocked by                               quality digital reception. It offers
      mountains or
      large obstacles                          many channels in several categories.
      to the south.                            Along with a large selection of
                                               different types of music, satellite
                                               radio also allows you to view channel
                                               and category selections in the audio
                                               display.

                                               The XM satellites are in orbit over
                                               the equator; therefore, objects south
      SATELLITE                                of the vehicle may cause satellite
                                               reception interruptions. To help
                                               compensate for this, ground-based
                                               repeaters are placed in major
                                               metropolitan areas. Satellite signals
                                               are more likely to be blocked by tall
                                               buildings and mountains the farther
                                               north you travel from the equator.


                              GROUND
                              REPEATER



182
                                                            Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. Models)

Depending on where you drive, you           As required by the FCC:                  To get your XM Satellite radio ID
may experience reception problems.          Changes or modifications not expressly   number:
Interference can be caused by any of        approved by the party responsible for    Turn the TUNE knob until ‘‘0’’
these conditions:                           compliance could void the user’s         appears in the display. Your I.D. will
                                            authority to operate the equipment.      appear in the display.
  Driving on an east/west road with
  a mountain on the south side of           Receiving Satellite Radio Service        After you have registered with XM
  the road.                                 If your XM Radio service has expired     Radio, keep your audio system in the




                                                                                                                               Features
  Driving on the north side of a            or you purchased your vehicle from       SAT Radio mode while you await
  large commercial truck on an              a previous owner, you can listen to a    activation. This should take about 30
  east/west road.                           sampling of the broadcasts available     minutes.
  Driving in tunnels.                       on XM Satellite Radio. With the
  Driving on a road beside a vertical       ignition switch in the ACCESSORY         While awaiting activation, make sure
  wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south   (I) or ON (II) position, push the        your vehicle remains in an open area
  of you.                                   PWR/VOL knob to turn on the audio        with good reception. Once your
  Driving on the lower level of a           system and press the CD/AUX XM           audio system is activated, ‘‘category’’
  multi-tiered road.                        button. A variety of music types and     or ‘‘CH’’ will appear in the display
  Driving on a single lane road             styles will play.                        and you will be able to listen to XM
  alongside dense trees taller than                                                  Radio broadcasts. XM Radio will
  50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.        If you decide to purchase XM             continue to send an activation signal
                                            satellite radio service, contact XM      to your vehicle for at least 12 hours
There may be other geographic               Radio at www.xmradio.com, or at          from activation request. If the
situations that could affect satellite      1-800-852-9696. You will need to give    service has not been activated after
radio reception.                            them your radio I.D. number and          36 hours, contact XM Radio.
                                            your credit card number.
                                                                                                                CONTINUED


                                                                                                                        183
Auxiliary Input Jack

Auxiliary Input Jack                To use the jack, turn down the
                                    volume of the portable unit, and
                                    pivot the cover up, then plug in a
                                    mini-jack cable between the portable
                                    unit and the jack. You will see AUX
                                    in the display and the system
                                    automatically switches to AUX mode.
                                    To adjust the volume, turn the PWR/
                                    VOL knob.

                                    To take the system out of AUX mode,
                                    press the AM/FM, or CD/AUX or
                                    CD/AUX/XM (U.S. models only)
                                    button. To return to AUX mode
Your audio system will accept       while the jack is connected, press the
auxiliary inputs from a portable    CD/AUX or CD/AUX/XM button.
cassette player, MP3 player, etc.




184
                                                                                     Playing Discs

Without navigation system
                                                      TRACK NUMBER
                                          DISC NUMBER                REPEAT BUTTON




                                                                                                           Features
 AM/FM BUTTON

 CD BUTTON                                                                           RANDOM BUTTON

                                                                                     SEEK/SKIP BAR




 CD LOAD INDICATOR




                            LOAD BUTTON     CD SLOT             EJECT BUTTON

                                                        PRESET BUTTONS
U.S. model is shown.

                                                                                                     185
Playing Discs

With navigation system                           UPPER DISPLAY




             DISC ICON


             TRACK ICON                                                        TRACK REPEAT ICON
             DISC SCAN ICON                                                    CH DISC ICONS
             TRACK SCAN ICON                                                   SOUND ICON

             CD LOAD INDICATOR                                                 TRACK RANDOM ICON

                                                                               DISC REPEAT ICON
             LOAD BUTTON



                                 SEEK/SKIP BAR                   CH DISC BAR
                                    SCAN BUTTON            AUDIO DISPLAY BUTTON
                                      CD/AUX BUTTON      CD SLOT
U.S. model is shown.

186
                                                                                                         Playing Discs

Operating the CD Changer                 Loading CDs in the Changer                  You cannot load and play 3-inch
Your audio system has an in-dash         To load multiple discs in one               (8-cm) discs in this system.
CD changer that holds up to six CDs,     operation:
providing several hours of               1. Press the LOAD button until you          4. When the CD load indicator turns
continuous entertainment. You               hear a beep and see ‘‘LOAD’’ in             green and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in the
operate this CD changer with the            the display.                                display again, insert the next CD
same controls used for the radio.                                                       in the slot.
To load CDs or operate the CD              To load only one CD, press and




                                                                                                                                 Features
changer, the ignition switch must be       release the LOAD button.                    Do not try to insert a disc until
in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)                                                        ‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You could
position.                                2. The disc number for an empty               damage the audio unit.
                                            position is highlighted and the red
                                            light starts blinking.                   5. Repeat steps 1 through 3 until all
                                                                                        six positions are loaded. If you are
Do not use CDs with adhesive labels.     3. Insert the disc into the CD slot            not loading all six positions, the
The label can curl up and cause the CD      when the green CD load indicator            system begins playing the last CD
to jam in the unit.                         comes on. Insert it only about              loaded.
                                            halfway; the drive will pull it in the
For best results when using CD-R or         rest of the way. You will see
CD-RW discs, use only high quality          ‘‘BUSY’’ in the display as the CD
discs labeled for audio use. When           load indicator turns red and blinks
recording a CD-R or CD-RW, the              as the CD is loaded.
recording must be closed in order
for the disc to be used by CD player.

                                                                                                                CONTINUED


                                                                                                                           187
Playing Discs

If you are not loading CDs into all six   To Play a CD                            To select a different disc, press an
positions, press the LOAD button          Select the CD changer by pressing       appropriate preset button (1 6) or
again after the last CD has loaded.       the CD button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in   use the Preset 5 (DISC ) to select
The system will begin playing the         the display. The system will begin      the previous disc or Preset 6 (DISC
last CD loaded.                           playing the last selected CD in the       ) to select the next disc in
                                          CD changer. You will see the disc       sequence. On vehicles with
If you stop loading discs before all      and track numbers displayed.            navigation system, touch the
six positions are filled, the system                                              appropriate disc icon or press the
will wait for 15 seconds, stop the load   When that CD ends, the next CD in       or side of the CH/DISC bar. If
operation, and begin playing the last     the CD changer is loaded and played.    you select an empty position in the
disc loaded.                              After the last CD finishes, the         CD changer, the system will try to
                                          system returns to the first CD.         load the CD in the next available slot.
You can also load a CD into an empty
position while a CD is playing. Select
the empty position (the disc number
indicator is not highlighted) and
press the appropriate preset bar or
touch a disc icon. The current CD
stops playing and starts the loading
sequence. The CD just loaded will
play.




188
                                                                                                   Playing Discs

SEEK/SKIP Each time you                 On vehicles without navigation system    RANDOM by pressing the RDM
press and release         side of the   REPEAT         To activate the repeat    button again.
SEEK/SKIP bar, the system skips         feature, press and release the RPT
forward to the beginning of the next    button. You will see RPT in the          SCAN The SCAN function
track. Press and release         side   display as a reminder. The system        samples all the tracks on the
of the bar to skip backward to the      continuously replays the current         selected disc in the order they are
beginning of the current track. Press   track. Press the RPT button again to     recorded on the CD. To activate it,
it again to skip to the beginning of    turn it off. Pressing either of the      press and release the SCAN button.




                                                                                                                         Features
the previous track.                     SKIP buttons also turns off the          You will see SCAN in the display as a
                                        repeat feature.                          reminder. The system will then play
To move rapidly within a track, press                                            the first track for approximately 10
and hold the     or       side of the   DISC REPEAT         Press and hold       seconds. If you do nothing, the
SEEK/SKIP bar.                          the RPT button to continuously           system will then play the following
                                        replay the current CD. You will see      tracks for 10 seconds each. When it
                                        D-RPT in the display as a reminder.      plays a track that you want to
                                        Press the button again to turn it off.   continue listening to, press the
                                                                                 SCAN button again.
                                        RANDOM The RANDOM
                                        function plays the tracks within a CD
                                        in random order, rather than in the
                                        order they are recorded on the CD.
                                        To activate it, press the RDM button.
                                        You will see RDM in the display as a
                                        reminder. The system will then
                                        select and play tracks randomly.
                                        This continues until you deactivate                               CONTINUED


                                                                                                                  189
Playing Discs

DISC SCAN This feature, when             On vehicles with navigation system    TRACK SCAN This function
activated, samples each first track of   To use the functions described as     samples all the tracks on the
all the discs in the CD changer in the   follows, press the AUDIO DISPLAY      selected disc in the order they are
order they are stored. To activate       button to view the CD control icons   recorded on the CD. To activate it,
the DISC SCAN feature, press and         in the display.                       touch the TRACK SCAN icon or
hold the SCAN button. You will see                                             press and release the SCAN button.
D-SCAN in the display as a reminder.                                           You will see SCAN on the left side of
The system will then play the first                                            TRACK icon on the display as a
track of the first CD for                                                      reminder. Also, it appears on the
approximately 10 seconds. If you do                                            upper display. The system will then
nothing, the system will then play                                             play the first track for approximately
the next CD’s first track. When it                                             10 seconds. If you do nothing, the
plays a disc that you want to                                                  system will then play the following
continue listening to, press the                                               tracks for 10 seconds each. When it
SCAN button again.                                                             plays a track that you want to
                                                                               continue listening to, touch the
                                                                               TRACK SCAN icon or press the
                                                                               SCAN button again.




190
                                                                                                    Playing Discs

DISC SCAN This function                  TRACK REPEAT           Touch the         TRACK RANDOM The TRACK
samples each first track of all the      TRACK REPEAT icon to                     RANDOM function plays the tracks
discs in the CD changer in the order     continuously replay a track. You will    within a CD in random order, rather
they are stored. To activate it, touch   see REPEAT on the left side of the       than in the order they are recorded
the DISC SCAN icon or press and          TRACK icon on the display as a           on the CD. To activate it, press the
hold the SCAN button. You will see       reminder. Also, RPT appears on the       TRACK RANDOM icon. You will see
SCAN on the left side of the DISC        upper display. Press the icon again to   RANDOM on the left side of the
icon on the display as a reminder.       turn it off.                             TRACK icon on the display as a




                                                                                                                         Features
Also, D-SCAN appears on the upper                                                 reminder. The system will then
display. The system will then play       DISC REPEAT         Touch the DISC       select and play tracks randomly.
the first track of the first CD for      REPEAT icon to continuously replay       This continues until you deactivate
approximately 10 seconds. If you do      the current CD. You will see             TRACK RANDOM by touching the
nothing, the system will then play       REPEAT on the left side of the DISC      TRACK RANDOM icon again.
the next CD’s first track. When it       icon. Also, D-RPT appears on the
plays a disc that you want to            upper display. Press the icon again to
continue listening to, touch the DISC    turn it off.
SCAN icon or press the SCAN
button again.




                                                                                                          CONTINUED


                                                                                                                  191
Playing Discs

To Stop Playing a CD                      Removing CDs from the Changer           After that disc is ejected, pressing
If you turn off the system while a CD     To remove the disc that is currently    the eject button again will eject the
is playing, either by pushing the         playing, press and release the eject    next disc in numerical order. By
PWR/VOL knob or by turning off            (      ) button. You will see EJECT     doing this six times, you can remove
the ignition, the CD will stay in the     in the display. When you remove the     all the CDs from the changer.
drive. When you turn the system           disc from the slot, the system begins
back on, it will begin at the same disc   the load sequence so you can load       If you press the eject button while
and track.                                another disc in that position. If you   listening to the radio, or with the
                                          do not load another CD within 15        audio system turned off, the disc
To take the system out of CD mode,        seconds, the system selects the         that was last selected is ejected.
press the AM/FM or CD/AUX, or             previous mode [AM, FM1, FM2, or
CD/AUX/XM button to switch to             XM Radio (U.S. models)].                In any mode, if you press the eject
the radio or satellite radio (U.S.                                                button and hold it until you hear a
models only), or optional tape player     If you do not remove the CD from        beep, the system will eject all of the
(if the tape is in it) while a CD is      the slot, the system will reload the    discs in the changer.
playing. When you return to CD            CD after 15 seconds and put the CD
mode by pressing the CD/AUX or            changer in pause mode. To begin         You can also eject discs when the
CD/AUX/XM button, play will               playing the CD, press the CD button.    ignition switch is off by pressing the
continue at the same point that it left                                           eject button. The disc that was last
off.                                      To remove a different CD from the       selected is ejected first. You can
                                          changer, first select it with the       eject up to 5 discs, one at a time.
                                          appropriate preset button, or the
                                          appropriate icon or CH/DISC bar.
                                          When that CD begins playing, press
                                          the eject button.


192
                                                                                              CD Player Error Messages

If you see an error message in the
display while playing a CD, find the        Error Message                   Cause                            Solution
cause in the chart to the right. If you
cannot clear the error message, take                                                       Press the eject button and pull out the disc.
the vehicle to your dealer.               (without navigation system)   FOCUS Error        Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD
                                                                                           player.
                                           (with navigation system)                        Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
                                                                                           Press the eject button and pull out the disc.




                                                                                                                                                Features
                                                                                           Check the disc for damage or deformation.
                                          (without navigation system)   Mechanical Error   If the CD cannot be pulled out or the error
                                                                                           indication does not disappear after the disc is
                                                                                           ejected, see your dealer.
                                           (with navigation system)
                                                                                           Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
                                                                        High Temperature   Will disappear when the temperature returns to
                                          (without navigation system)                      normal.




                                                                                                                                          193
Protecting Your CDs

General Information                    Protecting CDs
 When using CD-R discs, use only       When a CD is not being played, store
 high quality CDs labeled for audio    it in its case to protect it from dust
 use.                                  and other contamination. To prevent
                                       warpage, keep CDs out of direct
  When recording a CD-R, the           sunlight and extreme heat.
  recording must be closed for it to
  be used by the system.               To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.
                                       Wipe across the CD from the center
  Play only standard round CDs.        to the outside edge.
  Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the
  drive or cause other problems.       A new CD may be rough on the
                                       inner and outer edges. The small
  Handle your CDs properly to          plastic pieces causing this roughness    Handle a CD by its edges; never
  prevent damage and skipping. See     can flake off and fall on the re-        touch either surface. Do not place
  this page.                           cording surface of the CD, causing       stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
                                       skipping or other problems. Remove       These, along with contamination
                                       these pieces by rubbing the inner        from fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip
                                       and outer edges with the side of a       pens, can cause the CD to not play
                                       pencil or pen.                           properly or possibly jam in the drive.

                                       Never try to insert foreign objects in
                                       the CD player or the magazine.




194
                                                                         Playing a Tape (Optional)

Without navigation system
                            AM/FM BUTTON          TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR

                                                             NOISE REDUCTION INDICATOR




                                                                                                          Features
                                                                                    REPEAT BUTTON

    CD/AUX BUTTON

                                                                                    SEEK/SKIP BAR




                            PWR/VOL KNOB   PRESET BUTTONS


U.S. model is shown.

                                                                                                    195
Playing a Tape (Optional)

With Navigation System
                                    UPPER DISPLAY
                                                       TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR




                REW ICON
                                                       FF ICON
                REPEAT ICON
                                                       NR ICON


                PWR/VOL KNOB


                SEEK/SKIP BAR
                                CD/AUX BUTTON          AUDIO DISPLAY BUTTON
                                        AM/FM BUTTON
U.S. model is shown.

196
                                                                                    Playing a Tape (Optional)

To Play a Tape                            Dolby noise reduction turns on          To Stop Playing a Tape
The ignition switch must be in the        when you insert a tape. The             If you turn the system off while a
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.              indicator will light in the       tape is playing, either with the PWR/
Make sure the open side of the tape       display. If the tape was not recorded   VOL knob or by turning off the
is facing right, then insert the tape     in Dolby, turn it off by pressing the   ignition, the cassette will remain in
most of the way into the slot. The        Preset 4 (NR) or touching the NR        the drive. When you turn the system
system will pull the tape in the rest     icon. Dolby remains off until you       back on, the tape will begin playing
of the way, and begin to play it.         press the preset button or the icon     where it left off.




                                                                                                                          Features
                                          again.
The tape direction indicator will light                                           To switch to the radio or CD player
to show you which side of the tape is        Dolby noise reduction                while a tape is playing, press the
playing. The indicates the side             manufactured under license from       AM/FM, or CD/AUX button or CD/
you inserted upward is now playing.         Dolby laboratories licensing          AUX XM button. To change back to
If you want to play the other side,         Corporation. ‘‘Dolby’’ and the        the tape player, push the CD/AUX
press the Preset 3 (PLAY/PROG) or           double-D symbol are trademarks        button or CD/AUX XM button.
press the AUDIO DISPLAY button              of the Dolby Laboratories
and touch either        or       icon.      Licensing Corporation.
When the player reaches the end of
the tape, it will automatically reverse
direction and play the other side.




                                                                                                           CONTINUED


                                                                                                                  197
Playing a Tape (Optional)

Tape Search Functions                   REPEAT       Press the RPT button       NOTE: The skip and repeat
SKIP Each time you press and            to continuously play a track or         functions use silent periods on the
release the      side of the SEEK/      passage. You will see RPT displayed.    tape to find the end of a song or
SKIP bar, the player skips forward to   The track will repeat until you press   passage. These features may not
the beginning of the next track. On     the RPT button again.                   work if there is almost no gap
vehicles without Navigation System,                                             between selections, a high noise
you will see FF in the display. Press   On vehicles with navigation system      level, or a silent period in the middle
and release the       side of the       To use the functions described as       of a selection.
SKIP bar to skip backward to the        follow, press the AUDIO DISPLAY
beginning of the current track. On      button to view the control icons in     If you see the error message
vehicles without Navigation System,     the display.                            ‘‘        ’’ on the display, press the
you will see REW in the display.                                                tape eject button to remove the tape
                                        FF/REW        To rewind the tape,       from the unit. Make sure the tape is
On vehicles without navigation system   touch the REW icon. To fast forward     not damaged. If the tape will not
FF/REW       To rewind the tape,        the tape, touch the FF icon. Press      eject or the error message stays on
push the Preset 1 (REW). You will       either      or      icon to take the    after the tape ejects, take your
see REW in the display. To fast         system out of fast forward or rewind.   vehicle to your dealer.
forward the tape, push the Preset 2
(FF). You will see FF displayed.        REPEAT        Touch the REPEAT
Press the Preset 1, 2, or 3 (PLAY/      icon to continuously play a track.
PRG) to take the system out of          You will see REPEAT displayed. The
rewind or fast forward.                 track will repeat until you touch the
                                        REPEAT icon again.




198
                                                                                 Playing a Tape (Optional)

Caring for the Tape and Player          If you do not clean the tape player   If the tape is loose, tighten it by
The tape player picks up dirt and       regularly, it may eventually become   turning the hub with a pencil or your
oxides from the tape. This              impossible to remove the              finger. If the label is peeling off,
contamination builds up over time       contamination with a normal           remove it or it could cause the tape
and causes the sound quality to         cleaning kit. Your dealer has a       to jam in the player. Never try to
degrade. To prevent this, you should    cleaning kit available.               insert a warped or damaged tape in
clean the player after every 30 hours                                         the player.
of use.                                 Use 100-minute or shorter tapes.




                                                                                                                        Features
                                        Tapes longer than that may break or   Store tapes in their cases to protect
                                        jam the drive.                        them from dust and moisture. Never
                                                                              place tapes where they will be
                                                                              exposed to direct sunlight, high heat,
                                                                              or high humidity. If a tape is exposed
                                                                              to extreme heat or cold, let it reach a
                                                                              moderate temperature before
                                                                              inserting it into the player.

                                                                              Never try to insert foreign objects
                                                                              into the tape player.




                                                                                                                199
Steering Wheel Controls

                                      The VOL button adjusts the volume        If you are playing a CD, the system
                     MODE BUTTON
                                      up ( ) or down ( ). Press the top        skips to the beginning of the next
                                      or bottom of the button, hold it until   track each time you press the top
                                      the desired volume is reached, then      ( ) of the CH button. Press the
                                      release it.                              bottom ( ) to return to the
                                                                               beginning of the current track. Press
                                      The MODE button changes the              it twice to return to the previous
                                      mode. Pressing the button                track. You will see the disc and track
                                      repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,         numbers in the display.
                                      CD (if a CD is loaded), or a tape (if
                                      equipped). On models with satellite      If you are playing a tape in the
 VOL BUTTON     CH BUTTON             radio system, you can also select        optional tape player, press the top
                                      XM1 and XM2.                             ( ) of the CH button to advance to
Three controls for the audio system                                            the next selection. Press the bottom
are mounted in the steering wheel     If you are listening to the radio, use   ( ) to go back to the previous
hub. These let you control basic      the CH button to change stations.        selection. The system senses a silent
functions without removing your       Each time you press the top ( ) of       period, then resumes playing.
hand from the wheel.                  the button, the system goes to the
                                      next preset station on the band you
                                      are listening to. Press the bottom
                                      ( ) to go back to the previous
                                      station.




200
                                                                                          Radio Theft Protection

Your vehicle’s audio system will         If your vehicle’s battery is discon-       If the code card is lost, a dealer can
disable itself if it is disconnected     nected or goes dead, the audio             access your code with your radio’s
from electrical power for any reason.    system will disable itself. If this        serial number. To access the serial
To make it work again, you must          happens, you will see ‘‘CODE’’ in the      number, turn the radio on. It must
enter a specific code with the preset    frequency display the next time you        display ‘‘CODE’’, then turn the radio
buttons (icons on vehicles with          turn on the system. Use the preset         off. Push the preset 1, preset 6, and
navigation system). Because there        buttons (icons on vehicles with            power buttons at the same time, then
are hundreds of number                   navigation system) to enter the five-      quickly release.




                                                                                                                             Features
combinations possible, making the        digit code. The code is on the radio
system work without knowing the          code card included in your owner’s         You will have to store your favorite
exact code is nearly impossible.         manual kit. When it is entered             stations on each side of the preset
                                         correctly, the radio will start playing.   buttons (1 6) after the system
You should have received a card that                                                begins working. Your original
lists your audio system code number      If you make a mistake entering the         settings were lost when power was
and serial number. It is best to store   code, do not start over; complete the      disconnected.
this card in a safe place at home. In    five-digit sequence, then enter the
addition, you should write the audio     correct code. You have 10 tries to
system’s serial number in this owner’s   enter the correct code. If you are
manual.                                  unsuccessful in 10 attempts, you
                                         must then leave the system on for 1
If you lose the card, you must obtain    hour before trying again.
the code number from a dealer. To
do this, you will need the system’s
serial number.



                                                                                                                      201
Setting the Clock

On vehicles without navigation system                                  DIGITAL CLOCK
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, you will
need to set the clock.

Press and hold the TUNE/SOUND
knob. Change the hours by pressing
the until you hear a beep. The
displayed time begins to blink. Press
on the H (Preset 4) until the
numbers advance to the desired time.                                                                 TUNE/SOUND
Change the minutes by pressing the                                                                   KNOB
M (Preset 5) until the numbers
                                              H BUTTON                                               R BUTTON
advance to the desired time. When                                              M BUTTON
you are finished, press the TUNE/
SOUND knob again to set the time.       You can quickly set the time to the    For example:
                                        nearest hour. Pressing and holding       1:06 would RESET to 1:00.
                                        the TUNE/SOUND knob, then                1:52 would RESET to 2:00.
                                        pressing the R (Preset 6) sets the
                                        clock back to the previous hour. If    On vehicles with navigation system
                                        the displayed time is after the half   Refer to the Navigation System
                                        hour, the clock sets the clock         Owner’s Manual to set up the time.
                                        forward to the beginning of the next
                                        hour.



202
                                                                                                 Security System

The security system helps to protect         SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR           With the system set, you can still
your vehicle and valuables from theft.                                           open the trunk with the remote
The horn sounds and a combination                                                transmitter without triggering the
of headlights, parking lights, side                                              alarm. The alarm will sound if the
marker lights and taillights flash if                                            trunk lock is forced, or the trunk is
someone attempts to break into your                                              opened with the trunk release handle
vehicle or remove the radio. This                                                or the emergency trunk opener.
alarm continues for 2 minutes, then




                                                                                                                         Features
the system resets. To reset an                                                   The security system will not set if
alarming system before the 2                                                     the hood, trunk, or any door is not
minutes have elapsed, unlock the                                                 fully closed. Before you leave the
driver’s door with the key or use the                                            vehicle, make sure the doors, trunk,
remote transmitter.                                                              and hood are securely closed.
                                         To change the ‘‘SECURITY
The security system automatically        RELOCK TIMER’’ setting, see page        NOTE: To see if the system is set
sets 15 seconds (depending on the        114 .                                   after you exit the vehicle, press the
‘‘SECURITY RELOCK TIMER’’                                                        LOCK button on the remote
setting) after you lock the doors,       Once the security system is set,        transmitter within 5 seconds. If the
hood, and trunk. For the system to       opening any door (without using the     system is set, the horn will beep
activate, you must lock the doors        key or the remote transmitter), the     once.
from the outside with the key, lock      hood, or the trunk will cause it to
tab, door lock switch, or remote         sound. It also sounds if the radio is   Do not attempt to alter this system
transmitter. The security system         removed from the dashboard or the       or add other devices to it.
indicator in the instrument panel        wiring is cut.
starts blinking immediately to show
you the system is setting itself.

                                                                                                                   203
Cruise Control

Cruise control allows you to maintain   Using the Cruise Control
a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)
without keeping your foot on the          CRUISE CONTROL MASTER BUTTON               CRUISE CONTROL MESSAGE
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open                                    RES/ACCEL
highways. It is not recommended for                               BUTTON
city driving, winding roads, slippery   CANCEL
                                        BUTTON
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.



  Improper use of the cruise
  control can lead to a crash.                   DECEL/SET BUTTON                U.S. model is shown

  Use the cruise control only           1. Push the Cruise Control Master       3. Press and release the DECEL/
  when traveling on open                   Button on the steering wheel. The       SET button on the steering wheel.
  highways in good weather.                CRUISE MAIN indicator in the            The ‘‘CRUISE CONTROL’’
                                           instrument panel comes on.              message appears in the multi-
                                                                                   information display to show the
                                        2. Accelerate to the desired cruising      system is now activated.
                                           speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).




204
                                                                                                Cruise Control

The cruise control may not hold the       Push on the accelerator pedal. Ac-     Tap the brake or clutch pedal
set speed when you are going up and       celerate to the desired cruising       lightly with your foot. The
down hills. If your speed increases       speed and press the DECEL/SET          ‘‘CRUISE CONTROL’’ message in
going down a hill, use the brakes to      button.                                the multi-information display goes
slow down. This will cancel the                                                  out. When the vehicle slows to the
cruise control. To resume the set         To increase the speed in very          desired speed, press the DECEL/
speed, press the RES/ACCEL button.        small amounts, tap the RES/            SET button.
The ‘‘CRUISE CONTROL’’ message            ACCEL button. Each time you do




                                                                                                                        Features
in the multi-information display will     this, your vehicle will speed up     Even with the cruise control turned
come back on.                             about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).              on, you can still use the accelerator
                                                                               pedal to speed up for passing. After
Changing the Set Speed                  You can decrease the set cruising      completing the pass, take your foot
You can increase the set cruising       speed in any of these ways:            off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed in any of these ways:                                                    will return to the set cruising speed.
                                          Press and hold the DECEL/SET
  Press and hold the RES/ACCEL            button. Release the button when      Resting your foot on the brake or
  button. When you reach the              you reach the desired speed.         clutch pedal causes the cruise
  desired cruising speed, release the                                          control to cancel.
  button.                                 To slow down in very small
                                          amounts, tap the DECEL/SET
                                          button repeatedly. Each time you
                                          do this, your vehicle will slow
                                          down about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).




                                                                                                                205
Cruise Control

Canceling Cruise Control               Resuming the Set Speed                   Pressing the Cruise Control Master
You can cancel cruise control in any   When you push the CANCEL button,         Button turns the system off and
of these ways:                         or tap the brake or clutch pedal, the    erases the previous cruising speed.
                                       system remembers the previously
  Tap the brake or clutch pedal.       set cruising speed. To return to that
                                       speed, accelerate to above 25 mph
  Push the CANCEL button on the        (40 km/h) then press and release
  steering wheel.                      the RES/ACCEL button. The
                                       ‘‘CRUISE CONTROL’’ message in
  Push the cruise control master       the multi-information display comes
  button.                              on, and the vehicle accelerates to the
                                       same cruising speed as before.




206
                                                                           HomeLink Universal Transceiver

The HomeLink universal                   reverse if an obstacle is detected       Training HomeLink
transceiver built into your vehicle      during closing, increasing the risk of   Before you begin      If you just
can be programmed to operate up to       injury.                                  received your vehicle and have not
three remotely controlled devices                                                 trained any of the buttons in
around your home, such as garage         Important Safety Precautions             HomeLink before, you should erase
doors, lighting, or home security        Always refer to the opening              any previously learned codes before
systems.                                 instructions and safety information      training the first button.
                                         that came with your garage door




                                                                                                                          Features
General Information                      opener or other equipment you            To do this, press and hold the two
If you are training HomeLink to          intend to operate with HomeLink. If      outside buttons on the HomeLink
operate a garage door or gate, you       you do not have this information,        transceiver for about 20 seconds,
should unplug the motor for that         contact the manufacturer of the          until the red indicator flashes.
device during training. Repeatedly       equipment.                               Release the buttons, then proceed to
pressing the remote control button                                                step 1.
could burn out the motor.                For quick and accurate training,         If you are training the second or
                                         make sure the remote control             third buttons, go directly to step 1.
HomeLink stores the code in a            transmitter for the device (garage
permanent memory. There should           door, automatic gate, security           1. Unplug the garage door opener
be no need to retrain HomeLink if        system, etc.) has a fresh battery.          motor from the electrical outlet.
your vehicle’s battery goes dead or is
disconnected. If your garage door                                                 2. Hold the end of the garage door
opener was manufactured before                                                       opener remote 2 to 5 inches from
April 1982, you may not be able to                                                   HomeLink. Make sure you are not
program HomeLink to operate it.                                                      blocking your view of the red
They do not have the safety feature                                                  indicator in HomeLink.
that causes the motor to stop and                                                                           CONTINUED


                                                                                                                    207
HomeLink Universal Transceiver

                                             If the red indicator in HomeLink       second.
                                             continues to flash slowly (does          If the button works,
                                             not flash rapidly), your remote          programming is complete.
                                             transmitter may stop                     If the button does not work go
                                             transmitting after a short time.         to step 6.
                                             Go to step 4.
                                                                                  6. Push and hold the HomeLink
                                         4. Press and hold the remote                button for a few seconds, then
                                            transmitter button and one of the        watch the red indicator on
                                            HomeLink buttons at the same             HomeLink.
                                            time. While continuing to hold the         If the indicator stays on or
                                            HomeLink button, press and                 flashes slowly, repeat steps 2
                                            release the remote transmitter             thru 5.
3. Press and hold the remote                button every 2 seconds.                    If the indicator flashes rapidly
   transmitter button and one of the           If the red indicator in HomeLink        for 2 seconds then stays on, you
   HomeLink buttons at the same                begins to flash slowly at first,        have a rolling code transmitter:
   time.                                       then rapidly, release both              go to ‘‘Training with a Rolling
      If the red indicator in HomeLink         buttons, and go to step 5.              Code System’’ (see page 209 ).
      begins to flash slowly at first,         If the red indicator in HomeLink
      then rapidly, release both               continues to flash slowly (does    7. Repeat these steps to train the
      buttons, and go to step 5.               not begin to flash rapidly),          other two HomeLink buttons to
                                               repeat steps 2 thru 4.                operate any other compatible
                                                                                     remotely controlled devices
                                         5. Plug in the garage door opener           around your home (lighting,
                                            motor, then test the HomeLink            automatic gate, security system,
                                            button by pushing it for about 1         etc.).

208
                                                                           HomeLink Universal Transceiver

Training With a Rolling Code                               TRAINING BUTTON        4. Press and hold the button on
System                                                                               HomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.
For security purposes, newer garage
door opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’                                            5. Press and hold the HomeLink
or variable code. Information from                                                   button again for 3 to 4 seconds.
the remote control and the garage                                                    This should turn off the training
door opener are needed before                                                        indicator on the garage door
HomeLink can operate the garage                                                      opener unit. (Some systems may




                                                                                                                          Features
door opener.                                                                         require you to press the button up
                                                                                     to three times.)
The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’
procedure trains HomeLink to the                                                  6. Press the HomeLink button again.
proper garage door opener code.                                                      It should operate the garage door.
The following procedure                   3. Press the training button on the
synchronizes HomeLink to the                 garage door opener unit until the
garage door opener so it sends and           indicator next to the button comes
receives the correct codes.                  on. The indicator may blink, or
                                             come on and stay on. You then
1. Make sure you have properly               have approximately 30 seconds to
   completed the ‘‘Training                  complete the following steps.
   HomeLink’’ procedure.

2. Find the ‘‘training’’ button on your
   garage door opener unit. The
   location will vary, depending on
   the manufacturer.

                                                                                                                    209
HomeLink Universal Transceiver

Erasing Codes                                  If a standard transmitter was        As required by the FCC:
To erase the codes stored in all three         programmed, the indicator will       This device complies with Part 15 of the
buttons, press and hold the two                stay on for about 25 seconds.        FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
outside buttons until the red                                                       following two conditions: (1) This device
indicator begins to flash, then            2. Once the HomeLink indicator           may not cause harmful interference, and
release the buttons.                          begins to flash slowly, continue to   (2) this device must accept any
                                              hold the HomeLink button, and         interference received, including
You should erase all three codes              follow steps 3 thru 6 under           interference that may cause undesired
before selling the vehicle.                   ‘‘Training HomeLink’’ (see page       operation.
                                                207 ).
Retraining a Button                                                                 Changes or modifications not expressly
If you want to retrain a programmed        Customer Assistance                      approved by the party responsible for
button for a new device, you do not        If you have problems with training       compliance could void the user’s
have to erase all button memory.           the HomeLink Universal Transceiver,      authority to operate the equipment.
You can replace the existing memory        or would like information on home
code using this procedure:                 products that can be operated by         This device complies with Industry
                                           HomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. On        Canada Standard RSS-210.
1. Press and hold the HomeLink             the Internet, go to                      Operation is subject to the following two
   button to be trained until the          www.homelink.com.                        conditions: (1) this device may not cause
   HomeLink indicator begins to                                                     interference, and (2) this device must
   flash slowly.                           HomeLink is a registered                 accept any interference that may cause
      If a rolling code transmitter was    trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.      undesired operation of the device.
      previously programmed, the
      indicator will flash rapidly for 2
      seconds, and then stay on for
      about 23 seconds.

210
                                                                                              HandsFreeLinkTM

Your vehicle is equipped with the      Bluetooth Wireless Technology             Incoming/Outgoing Calls
HandsFreeLink (HFL). HFL uses          Bluetooth is a registered trademark       With a linked phone, the HFL allows
Bluetooth technology as a wireless     of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.                    you to send and receive calls in your
link between it and your Bluetooth     Bluetooth is the wireless technology      vehicle without holding the phone.
compatible cell phone. When you are    that links your phone to the HFL.
in your vehicle and your phone is      The HFL uses a Class 3 Bluetooth,         Phonebook
linked to the HFL, you’ll enjoy        which means the maximum range             The HFL can store up to 50 names
hands-free phone use. The HFL is       between your phone and vehicle is         and phone numbers in its phonebook.




                                                                                                                         Features
available in both English and French   30 feet (10 meters).                      With a linked phone, you can then
(Canadian models only). To change                                                automatically dial any name or
the language, see page 225 .           To use the HFL, your phone must           number in the phonebook.
                                       have approved Bluetooth capability
Here are the main features of the      along with the Hands Free Profile.        Here are the main components of
HFL. Instructions for using the HFL    This type of phone is available           the HFL system:
begin on page 214 .                    through many phone makers and
                                       cellular carriers. You can also find an   Microphone
Voice Control                          approved phone by visiting                The HFL microphone is on the
HFL recognizes simple voice            www.acura.com. ( In Canada, visit         ceiling console. The microphone is
commands, such as phone numbers        www.acura.ca.) or by calling the Hands    shared with the navigation system.
and names. It uses these commands      Free Link customer support at
to automatically dial, receive, and    (888) 528-7876.
store numbers. For more
information on voice control, see
Using Voice Control on page 214 .



                                                                                                                  211
HandsFreeLinkTM

Audio System                            HFL Buttons                             Here is the function of each HFL
When the HFL is in use, the sound                                               button:
comes through the vehicle’s front        Vehicle with navigation
audio system speakers. If the audio      system is shown                        HFL Talk: This button is used before
system is in use while making a call,                              HFL TALK
                                                                                you give a command, to answer
the HFL over-rides the audio system.                               BUTTON       incoming calls, and to confirm
To change the volume level, use the                                             system information.
audio system volume knob.                                          HFL BACK
                                                                   BUTTON       HFL Back: This button is used to
                                                                                end a call, go back to the previous
                                                                                voice control command, and to
                                                                                cancel an operation.
                                         VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS

                                        To operate the HFL, use the HFL
                                        Talk and Back buttons on the left
                                        side of the steering wheel. Below the
                                        HFL buttons is another set of voice
                                        control buttons for the navigation,
                                        climate control, and audio systems.




212
                                                                                        HandsFreeLinkTM

Multi-Information Display              Signal Strength       Indicates the   HFL Mode Message Indicates
                                       network signal strength of the        when you are dialing and receiving
 SIGNAL      BATTERY LEVEL STATUS      current phone call. Five bars         calls.
 STRENGTH                              equals full strength.
                                                                             Phone Dialing Indicates the
                                       ROAM Status       Indicates your      number you entered or the
                                       phone is roaming.                     number of the incoming call.




                                                                                                                  Features
                                       Battery Level Status      Indicates   : Some phones do not send this
                           ROAM        the power remaining in your             information to the HFL.
                           STATUS      phone’s current battery charge.
                                       Five bars equals full battery
 HFL MODE
 MESSAGE     PHONE DIALING             strength.

When you are operating the HFL, or
when you manually select HFL in the
multi-information display, you will
see this information in the display:




                                                                                                            213
HandsFreeLinkTM

How to Use the HFL                       Using Voice Control                       To hear a list of available options
The HFL is operated by the HFL           Here are some guidelines for using        at any time, press the Talk button,
Talk and Back buttons on the left        voice control:                            wait for the beep, and say, ‘‘Hands
side of the steering wheel. The next       To enter a command, press the           free help.’’
few pages provide instructions for all     Talk button. Then, after the beep,
basic features of the HFL.                 say your command in a clear,            Many commands can be spoken
                                           natural tone.                           together. For example, you can
NOTE: All phones may not                                                           say, ‘‘Dial 123-456-7891.’’
operate identically, and some may          For best system operation, set the
cause inconsistent operation of the        climate control fan speed to low,       To enter a string of numbers in a
HFL.                                       and direct the center vents away        Call or Dial command, you can say
                                           from the microphone in the ceiling.     them all at once, or you can
                                                                                   separate them in blocks of 3, 4, 7,
                                           If the HFL does not recognize a         10, or 11.
                                           command, its response is, ‘‘Pardon.’’
                                           If it doesn’t recognize the             To skip a voice prompt, press the
                                           command a second time, its              Talk button while the HFL is
                                           response is, ‘‘Please repeat.’’ If it   speaking. The HFL will then begin
                                           doesn’t recognize the command a         listening for your next command.
                                           third time, it plays the Help
                                           prompt.




214
                                                                                               HandsFreeLinkTM

To go back one step in a command          When you finish a command              2. Press and release the Talk button.
process, say, ‘‘Go back,’’ or press       sequence, the HFL goes back to            After the beep, say ‘‘Setup.’’ The
the Back button.                          its main menu. For example, when          HFL response is ‘‘Would you like
If nothing is said while the HFL is       you store the name, ‘‘Eric,’’ the         male or female prompts?’’
listening for a command, the HFL          HFL response is, ‘‘Eric has been
will time out and stop its voice          stored.’’ The next time you press      3. Press and release the Talk button.
recognition. The next time you            the Talk button, you will be at the       After the beep, say ‘‘Male’’ or
press the Talk button, the HFL            main menu.                                ‘‘Female,’’ depending on the




                                                                                                                          Features
begins listening from the point at                                                  system voice you want. The HFL
which it timed out.                     Setting Up the System                       response is, ‘‘Male (Female)
                                        The voice of the HFL can be set to          prompts have been selected.
To end a command sequence at            male or female (U.S. models only).          Would you like an audible
any time, press and hold the Back       Also, the incoming notification can         notification of an incoming call?’’
button, or press the Talk button,       be set to a ring tone, a prompt, or no
wait for the beep, and say, ‘‘Cancel.’’ notification.
The next time you press the Talk
button, the HFL begins from its         To set up the system, do this:
main menu.                              1. Press and release the Talk button.
                                           After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ The
                                           HFL response is, ‘‘System options
                                           are setup and clear.’’




                                                                                                           CONTINUED


                                                                                                                   215
HandsFreeLinkTM

4. Press and release the Talk button.       Pairing Your Phone                   NOTE:
   If you say ‘‘Yes’’ after the beep, the   Your Bluetooth compatible phone       HFL does not allow you to pair
   HFL response is, ‘‘Would you like        with HandsFree Profile must be        your phone if the vehicle is
   a ring tone or a prompt?’’ If you        paired to the HFL before you can      moving.
   say ‘‘No’’ after the beep, the HFL       make and receive hands-free calls.    For pairing, your phone must be in
   returns to its main menu. Saying                                               its Discovery mode.
   ‘‘No’’ will result in no ring tone or                                          Up to six phones can be paired to
   prompt playback during an                                                      the HFL.
   incoming call. The audio system                                                The following procedure works for
   will still mute, and a message will                                            most phones. If you cannot pair
   be displayed.                                                                  your phone to the HFL with this
                                                                                  procedure, refer to your phone’s
5. Press and release the Talk button.                                             operating manual, talk to your
   After the beep, say ‘‘Ring tone’’ or                                           phone retailer, or call the
   ‘‘Prompt.’’ If you choose ‘‘Ring                                               HandsFreeLink customer support
   tone’’ you will hear a ring tone                                               at (888) 528-7876.
   through the audio speakers to                                                  During the pairing process, turn
   announce an incoming call. If you                                              off any previously paired phones
   choose ‘‘Prompt,’’ you will hear                                               before pairing a new phone.
   this message to announce an
   incoming call: ‘‘You have an
   incoming call.’’




216
                                                                                                 HandsFreeLinkTM

1. With your phone on and the             4. Press and release the Talk button.     7. Press and release the Talk button.
   ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or          After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The          After the beep, say the name you
   ON (II) position, press and release       HFL response is ‘‘Searching for a         want to use. For example, say
   the Talk button. After the beep,          Bluetooth phone. Make sure the            ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The HFL response
   say ‘‘Phone set up.’’ The HFL             phone you are trying to pair is in        is ‘‘Eric’s phone has been
   response is ‘‘Phone set up options        Discovery mode.’’                         successfully paired. Returning to
   are status, pair, edit, delete, and                                                 the main menu.’’
   list.’’                                NOTE: Steps 5 and 6 show a




                                                                                                                            Features
                                          common way to get your phone into         8. If you want to pair another phone,
2. Press and release the Talk button.     its Discovery mode. If these steps do        repeat steps 1 through 7.
   After the beep, say ‘‘Pair.’’ The      not work on your phone, refer to the
   HFL response is ‘‘The pairing          phone’s operating manual.
   process requires operation of your
   mobile phone. For safety, only         5. Follow the prompts on your phone
   perform this function while the           to get it into its Discovery mode.
   vehicle is stopped. State a four-         The phone will search for the HFL.
   digit code for pairing. Note this         When it comes up, select
   code. It will be requested by the         HandsFreeLink from the list of
   phone.’’                                  options displayed on your phone.

3. Press and release the Talk button.     6. When asked by the phone, enter
   After the beep, say the four-digit        the four-digit code from step 3 into
   code you want to use. For example,        your phone. The HFL response is
   say ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4.’’ The HFL response      ‘‘A new phone has been found.
   is, ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Is this correct?’’      What would you like to name this
                                             phone?’’                                                         CONTINUED


                                                                                                                     217
HandsFreeLinkTM

To rename a paired phone, do this:         To delete a paired phone, do this:         4. Press and release the Talk button.
1. Press and release the Talk button.      1. Press and release the Talk button.         After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
   After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’       After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’       HFL response is ‘‘Preparing to
   The HFL response is ‘‘Phone                The HFL response is, ‘‘Phone               delete Eric’s phone.’’ Say ‘‘OK’’ to
   setup options are status, pair, edit,      setup options are status, pair, edit,      continue. Otherwise, say ‘‘Go back,’’
   delete, and list.’’                        delete, and list.’’                        or ‘‘Cancel.’’

2. Press and release the Talk button.      2. Press and release the Talk button.      5. Press and release the Talk button.
   After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ The          After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ The        If you say ‘‘OK’’ after the beep, the
   HFL response is ‘‘Which phone              HFL response is, ‘‘Which phone             HFL response is ‘‘The phone has
   would you like to edit?’’                  would you like to delete?’’                been deleted. Returning to the
                                                                                         main menu.’’ If you say ‘‘Go back,’’
3. Press and release the Talk button.      3. Press and release the Talk button.         or ‘‘Cancel,’’ the phone will not be
   After the beep, say the name of            After the beep, say the name of            deleted.
   the phone you want to rename.              the phone you want to delete. For
   For example, say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’         example say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The
   The HFL response is ‘‘What is the          HFL response is ‘‘Would you like
   new name for Eric’s phone?’’               to delete Eric’s phone?’’

4. Press and release the Talk button.
   After the beep, say the new name
   of the phone. For example, say
   ‘‘Lisa’s phone.’’ The HFL response
   is, ‘‘The name has been changed.
   Returning to the main menu.’’


218
                                                                                                     HandsFreeLinkTM

To list all paired phones, do this:        To find out the status of the phone being   To change from the currently linked
1. Press and release the Talk button.      used, do this:                              phone to another paired phone, do this:
   After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’    1. Press and release the Talk button.       1. Press and release the Talk button.
   The HFL response is ‘‘Phone                After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’        After the beep, say ‘‘Next phone.’’
   setup options are status, pair, edit,      The HFL response is ‘‘Phone                 The HFL response is ‘‘Searching
   delete, and list.’’                        setup options are status, pair, edit,       for the next phone.’’ The HFL
                                              delete, and list.’’                         then disconnects the linked phone
2. Press and release the Talk button.                                                     and searches for another paired




                                                                                                                                 Features
   After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The       2. Press and release the Talk button.          phone. If no other phones are
   HFL responds by listing the name           After the beep, say ‘‘Status.’’ An          found, the first phone remains
   of each paired phone. When all             example of the HFL response is,             linked.
   phones paired to the system have           ‘‘Eric’s phone is linked. Battery
   been read, the HFL response is             strength is three bars. Signal
   ‘‘The entire list has been read.           strength is five bars, and the
   Returning to the main menu.’’              phone is roaming. Returning to the
                                              main menu.’’




                                                                                                                          219
HandsFreeLinkTM

Making a Call                              3. Press and release the Talk button.            ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is
You can make calls using any phone            After the beep, say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’     ‘‘Would you like to call Eric?’’
number, or by using a name in the             The HFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or
HFL phonebook. You can also redial            ‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, you            3. Press and release the Talk button.
the last number called. During a call,        will hear the person you called                After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
the HFL allows you to talk up to 30           through the audio speakers. To                 HFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or
minutes after you remove the key              change the volume, use the audio               ‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, you
from the ignition switch.                     system volume knob.                            will hear the person you called
                                                                                             through the audio speakers. To
To make a call using a phone number,       4. To end the call, press the Back                change the volume, use the audio
do this:                                      button.                                        system volume knob.
1. With your phone on and the
   ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or        To make a call using a name in the HFL         4. To end the call, press the Back
   ON (II) position, press and release     phonebook, do this:                               button.
   the Talk button. After the beep,        1. With your phone on and the
   say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFL          ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or            To redial the last number called by
   response is, ‘‘What name or                ON (II) position, press and release         the phone, press and release the
   number would you like to call/             the Talk button. After the beep,            Talk button. After the beep, say
   dial?’’                                    say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFL           ‘‘Redial.’’ The HFL response is,
                                              response is ‘‘What name or                  ‘‘Redialing.’’ Once connected, you
2. Press and release the Talk button.         number would you like to call/              will hear the person you called
   After the beep, say the number             dial?’’                                     through the audio speakers. To
   you want to call. For example, say                                                     change the volume, use the audio
   ‘‘123 456 7891.’’ The HFL response      2. Press and release the Talk button.          system volume knob.
   is ‘‘123 456 7891. Say call, dial, or      After the beep, say the name you
   continue to add numbers.’’                 want to call. For example, say

220
                                                                                                    HandsFreeLinkTM

Sending Numbers or Names                   3. Press and release the Talk button.      Receiving a Call
During a Call                                 After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The       If you receive a call when you are not
The HFL allows you to send                    dial tones will be sent, and the call   on the phone, the HFL interrupts the
numbers or names during a call. This          will continue.                          audio system (if it is on), and plays
is useful when you call a menu-                                                       the incoming call notification, if
driven phone system. You can also          To send a name during a call, do this:     activated. To answer the call, press
program account numbers into the           1. Press and release the Talk button.      the Talk button and begin speaking.
HFL phonebook for easy retrieval              After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The       If you don’t want to answer the call,




                                                                                                                                Features
during menu-driven calls.                     HFL response is ‘‘What name or          press the Back button.
                                              number would you like to send?’’
To send a number during a call, do this:                                              If your phone has Call Waiting, and
1. Press and release the Talk button.      2. Press and release the Talk button.      you receive a call when you are on
   After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The          After the beep, say the name you        the phone, press and release the
   HFL response is, ‘‘What name or            want to send. For example, say          Talk button to answer it. When you
   number would you like to send?’’           ‘‘Account number.’’ The HFL             do this, the original call is placed on
                                              response is ‘‘Would you like to         hold. To return to the original call,
2. Press and release the Talk button.         send account number?’’                  press the Talk button again. If you
   After the beep, say the number                                                     don’t want to answer the new call,
   you want to send. For example,          3. Press and release the Talk button.      disregard it, and continue with your
   say ‘‘1, 2, 3.’’ The HFL response is       After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The       original call. If you want to hang up
   ‘‘1, 2, 3. Say send, or continue to        dial tones will be sent, and the call   the original call and answer the new
   add numbers.’’                             will continue.                          call, press the Back button.




                                                                                                                         221
HandsFreeLinkTM

Transferring a Call                         To mute your voice, do this:              To add a name, do this:
During a call, you can transfer it          1. Press and release the Talk button.     1. Press and release the Talk button.
from the HFL to your phone, or from            After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ The         After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
your phone to the HFL.                         HFL response is, ‘‘Mute is active.’’      The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebook
                                                                                         options are store, edit, delete, and
To transfer a call from the HFL to your     To unmute your voice, do this:               list.’’
phone, do this:                             2. Press and release the Talk button.
1. Press and release the Talk button.          After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ The      2. Press and release the Talk button.
   After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’           HFL response is, ‘‘Mute is                After the beep, say ‘‘Store.’’ The
   The audio switches from the HFL             canceled.’’                               HFL response is, ‘‘What name
   to the phone.                                                                         would you like to store?’’
                                            Setting up the Phonebook
To transfer a call from your phone to the     The HFL phonebook can store up          3. Press and release the Talk button.
HFL, do this:                                 to 50 names with their associated          After the beep, say the name you
2. Press and release the Talk button.         numbers. These can be any types            would like to store. For example,
   After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’          of numbers. For example, you can           say ‘‘Eric’’ or say ‘‘account number.’’
   The audio switches from your               store a phone number and use it to         The HFL response is ‘‘What is the
   phone to the HFL.                          make a call, or you can store an           number for Eric,’’ or ‘‘What is the
                                              account number and use it during           number for account number?’’
Muting a Call                                 a call to a menu-driven phone
During a call, you can mute or                system.                                 4. Press and release the Talk button.
unmute your voice to the person you                                                      After the beep, say the number.
are talking to.                                                                          For example, say ‘‘123 456 7891.’’
                                                                                         The HFL response is ‘‘123 456
                                                                                         7891.’’


222
                                                                                                  HandsFreeLinkTM

5. Press and release the Talk button.     4. Press and release the Talk button.     3. Press and release the Talk button.
   After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ The        After the beep, say the new               After the beep, say the name you
   HFL response is ‘‘Eric (or account        number for Eric. For example, say         would like to delete. For example,
   number) has been stored.                  ‘‘987 654 3219.’’ The HFL response        say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is
   Returning to the main menu.’’             is, ‘‘987 654 3219.’’                     ‘‘Do you want to delete Eric?’’

To edit the number of a name, do this:    5. Press and release the Talk button.     4. Press and release the Talk button.
1. Press and release the Talk button.        After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ The        After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The




                                                                                                                              Features
   After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’        HFL response is ‘‘The number has          HFL response is, ‘‘The name has
   The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebook           been changed. Returning to the            been deleted. Returning to the
   options are store, edit, delete, and      main menu.’’                              main menu.’’
   list.’’
                                          To delete a name, do this:                To list all names in the phonebook, do
2. Press and release the Talk button.     1. Press and release the Talk button.     this:
   After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ The         After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’     1. Press and release the Talk button.
   HFL response is, ‘‘What name              The HFL response is, ‘‘Phonebook          After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
   would you like to edit?’’                 options are store, edit, delete, and      The HFL response is, ‘‘The
                                             list.’’                                   Phonebook options are store, edit,
3. Press and release the Talk button.                                                  delete, and list.’’
   After the beep, say the name you       2. Press and release the Talk button.
   would like to edit. For example,          After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ The
   say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is         HFL response is, ‘‘What name
   ‘‘What is the new number for              would you like to delete?’’
   Eric?’’

                                                                                                                CONTINUED


                                                                                                                        223
HandsFreeLinkTM

2. Press and release the Talk button.     3. Press and release the Talk button.    2. Press and release the Talk button.
   After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The         After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The         After the beep, say ‘‘Clear.’’ The
   HFL responds by listing the               HFL response is ‘‘Calling.’’ Once        HFL response is, ‘‘This process
   names in the phonebook. When              connected, you will hear the             will clear all paired phones, clear
   the end of the list is reached, the       person you called through the            all entries in the phonebook, and
   HFL response is, ‘‘The entire list        audio speakers. To change the            clear the passcode. Is this what
   has been read. Returning to the           volume, use the audio system             you would like to do?’’
   main menu.’’                              volume knob.
                                                                                   3. Press and release the Talk button.
To call a name from the phonebook list,   Clearing the System                         After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
do this:                                  This operation clears the HFL of            HFL response is ‘‘Preparing to
1. Press and release the Talk button.     your passcode, your paired phones,          clear all paired phones, all
   After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’     and all names in the HFL phonebook.         phonebook entries, and the
   The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebook        Clearing is recommended before you          passcode. This may take up to 2
   options are store, edit, delete, and   sell your vehicle.                          minutes to complete.’’ Press and
   list.’’                                                                            release the Talk button. After the
                                          To clear the system, do this:               beep, say ‘‘OK’’ to proceed, or say
2. Press and release the Talk button.     1. Press and release the Talk button.       ‘‘Go back’’ or ‘‘Cancel.’’
   After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The         After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ The
   HFL responds by listing the               HFL response is, ‘‘System options     4. If you said ‘‘OK,’’ after a short
   names in the phonebook. When it           are setup and clear.’’                   period of time, the HFL response
   says the name you want to call, for                                                is, ‘‘System has been cleared.
   example, Eric, press the Talk                                                      Returning to the main menu.’’
   button, and then say ‘‘Call.’’ The
   HFL response is, ‘‘Would you like
   to call Eric?’’

224
                                                                                                HandsFreeLinkTM

Changing Language                          If there are paired phones without     To change from French to English, do
(Canadian Models Only)                     French name tags, the HFL              this:
To change from English to French, do       response is ‘‘Pour que le système      1. Press and release the Talk button.
this:                                      identifie les téléphones qui ont été      After the beep, say ‘‘Changer
1. Press and release the Talk button.      jumelés dans une autre langue, les        Langue.’’ The HFL response is,
   After the beep, say ‘‘Change            noms des téléphones doivent être          ‘‘English or Français?’’
   language.’’ The HFL response is         ré-enregistrés.’’
   ‘‘English or Français?’’                                                       2. Press and release the Talk button.




                                                                                                                             Features
                                           NOTE: If there are paired phones          After the beep, say ‘‘English.’’ The
2. Press and release the Talk button.      without French name tags the              HFL response is, ‘‘You have
   After the beep, say ‘‘Français.’’       following prompts will continue.          selected English. Name tags that
   The HFL response is ‘‘Vous avez                                                   were stored while in French mode
   sélectionné Français. Les noms        4. The HFL response is, for example,        will not be accessible in English
   enregistrés en mode Anglais ne           ‘‘Quel est le nom Français pour          mode. Would you like to
   seront pas accessible en mode            Paul’s phone ?’’ Press and               continue?’’
   Français. Voulez-vous continuer?’’       release the Talk button. After the
                                            beep, say ‘‘Téléphone de Paul.’’      3. Press and release the Talk button.
3. Press and release the Talk button.       The HFL response is, ‘‘Quel est le       After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ If there
   After the beep, say ‘‘Oui.’’ If there    nom Français pour Pat’s phone            are no paired phones without
   are no paired phones without                ?’’ Press and release the Talk        English name tags, the HFL
   French name tags, the HFL                button. Say ‘‘Téléphone de Pat.’’        response is ‘‘The language has
   response is ‘‘La langue a été            After all paired phones missing a        been changed. Returning to the
   changée. Retour au menu principal.’’     French name tag are re-recorded,         main menu.’’
                                            the HFL will prompt, ‘‘Retour au
                                            menu principal.’’
                                                                                                              CONTINUED


                                                                                                                      225
HandsFreeLinkTM

If there are paired phones without    4. The HFL says, for example, ‘‘What
English name tags, the HFL               is the English name for
response is ‘‘The language has been      Téléphone de Paul ?’’ Press and
changed. For the system to identify      release the Talk button. After the
phones that were paired while in         beep, say ‘‘Paul’s phone. ’’ The
another language, the phone names        HFL response is ‘‘What is the
need to be re-recorded.’’                English name for Téléphone de
                                         Pat ?’’ Press and release the Talk
NOTE: If there are paired phones         button. After the beep, say ‘‘Pat’s
without English name tags, the           phone.’’ After all paired phones
following prompts will continue.         missing an English name tag are
                                         re-recorded, the HFL will say
                                         ‘‘Returning to the main menu.’’




226
                                                                Before Driving

Before you begin driving your           Break-in Period .............................. 228
vehicle, you should know what           Fuel Recommendation .................. 228
gasoline to use and how to check the    Service Station Procedures .......... 229
levels of important fluids. You also      Refueling..................................... 229
need to know how to properly store        Opening and Closing the
luggage or packages. The                    Hood ........................................ 230
information in this section will help     Oil Check .................................... 232
you. If you plan to add any               Engine Coolant Check .............. 232
accessories to your vehicle, please     Fuel Economy ................................ 233
read the information in this section      Improving Fuel Economy ......... 233




                                                                                                Before Driving
first.                                  Accessories and Modifications .... 234
                                          Accessories................................. 234
                                          Modifying Your Vehicle............ 235
                                        Carrying Cargo .............................. 236
                                          Load Limits................................. 237
                                          Carrying Cargo in the Trunk
                                            or on a Roof Rack .................. 238
                                          Carrying Items in the
                                            Passenger Compartment ...... 238




                                                                                       227
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

Break-in Period                          Fuel Recommendation                       recommend, in areas where it is
Help assure your vehicle’s future        Your vehicle is designed to operate       available, the use of gasoline that
reliability and performance by paying    on premium unleaded gasoline with a       does NOT contain manganese-based
extra attention to how you drive         pump octane number of 91 or higher.       fuel additives such as MMT.
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).   Use of a lower octane gasoline can        Use of gasoline with these additives
During this period:                      cause occasional metallic knocking        may adversely affect performance,
                                         noises in the engine and will result in   and cause the malfunction indicator
  Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid   decreased engine performance. Use         lamp on your instrument panel to
  acceleration.                          of a gasoline with a pump octane          come on. If this happens, contact
                                         number less than 87 can lead to           your authorized dealer for service.
  Do not change the oil until the        engine damage.
  scheduled maintenance time.            On vehicles with manual transmission      Some gasoline today is blended with
                                         You may hear a knocking noise from        oxygenates such as ethanol or
  Avoid hard braking for the first       the engine if you drive the vehicle at    MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
  200 miles (300 km).                    low engine speed (below about 1,000       operate on oxygenated gasoline
                                         rpm) in a higher gear. To stop this,      containing up to 10 % ethanol by
  Do not tow a trailer.                  raise the engine speed by shifting to     volume and up to 15 % MTBE by
                                         a lower gear.                             volume. Do not use gasoline
You should also follow these                                                       containing methanol.
recommendations with an                  We recommend quality gasoline             If you notice any undesirable
overhauled or exchanged engine, or       containing detergent additives that       operating symptoms, try another
when the brakes are replaced.            help prevent fuel system and engine       service station or switch to another
                                         deposits.                                 brand of gasoline.
                                         In addition, in order to maintain good    For further important fuel-related
                                         performance, fuel economy, and            information, please refer to your
                                         emissions control, we strongly            Quick Start Guide.

228
                                                                             Service Station Procedure

Refueling

                                         Gasoline is highly flammable                    TETHER
                        Push             and explosive. You can be                                 ATTACHMENT
                                         burned or seriously injured
                                         when handling fuel.

                                           Stop the engine, and keep
                                           heat, sparks, and flame away.
                                           Handle fuel only outdoors.




                                                                                                                     Before Driving
                                           Wipe up spills immediately.

                                                                              FUEL FILL CAP

1. Park with the driver’s side closest                                     3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
   to the gas pump.                                                           You may hear a hissing sound as
                                                                              pressure inside the tank escapes.
2. To open the fuel fill door, push                                           The fuel fill cap is attached to the
   down on the lever located to the                                           fuel filler with a tether. Put the
   left of the driver’s seat.                                                 attachment on the fuel fill cap into
                                                                              the slit on the fuel fill door.




                                                                                                      CONTINUED


                                                                                                              229
Service Station Procedure

4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel     5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on         Opening and Closing the Hood
   nozzle automatically clicks off. Do         until it clicks at least once. If you
   not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leave      do not properly tighten the cap,                    HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
   some room for the fuel to expand            the malfunction indicator lamp
   with temperature changes.                   may come on (see page 324 ). You
                                               will also see a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL
  If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off        CAP’’ message in the information
  even though the tank is not full,            display.
  there may be a problem with your
  vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery             6. Push the fuel fill door closed until
  system. The system helps keep                it latches.
  fuel vapors from going into the
  atmosphere. Try filling at another
  pump. If this does not fix the
  problem, consult your dealer.                                                        To Open the Hood:
                                                                                       1. Park the vehicle, and set the
                                                                                          parking brake. Pull the hood
                                                                                          release handle located under the
                                                                                          lower left corner of the dashboard.
                                                                                          The hood will pop up slightly.




230
                                                                                      Service Station Procedure

                                                                                    To Close the Hood:
                                                                                    Lift it up slightly to remove the
                       LATCH                GRIP                SUPPORT ROD         support rod from the hole. Put the
                                                                                    support rod back into its holding clip.
                                                                                    Lower the hood to about a foot
                                                                                    (30 cm) above the fender, then let it
                                                                                    drop. Make sure it is securely
                                                                                    latched.




                                                                                                                              Before Driving
                                            CLIP

2. Put your fingers under the front       3. Pull the support rod out of its clip
   edge of the hood near the center.         by holding the grip, and insert the
   Slide your hand to the left until         end into the designated hole in the
   you feel the hood latch handle.           hood.
   Push this handle up to release it.
   Lift up the hood.

If the hood latch handle moves stiffly,
or if you can open the hood without
lifting the handle, the mechanism
should be cleaned and lubricated.


                                                                                                                      231
Service Station Procedure

Oil Check                                                                             Engine Coolant Check
                                                                                                   RESERVE TANK




                                                                  UPPER MARK

                                                                  LOWER MARK            MAX
                                                                                        MIN
               DIPSTICK (orange handle)

Wait a few minutes after turning the         4. Remove the dipstick again, and        Look at the coolant level in the
engine off before you check the oil.            check the level. It should be         radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
                                                between the upper and lower           between the MAX and MIN lines. If
1. Remove the dipstick (orange                  marks.                                it is below the MIN line, see Adding
   handle).                                                                           Engine Coolant on page 283 for
                                             If it is near or below the lower mark,   information on adding the proper
2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean            see Adding Engine Oil on page 278 .      coolant.
   cloth or paper towel.
                                                                                      Refer to Owner’s Maintenance
3. Insert it all the way back in its hole.                                            Checks on page 273 for information
                                                                                      about checking other items on your
                                                                                      vehicle.

232
                                                                             Fuel Economy

Improving Fuel Economy                  Always drive in the highest gear
  Always maintain your vehicle          possible.
  according to the maintenance
  messages given by the multi-          Try to maintain a constant speed.
  information display. See Owner’s      Every time you slow down and
  Maintenance Checks on page            speed up, your vehicle uses extra
   273 .                                fuel. Use cruise control when
                                        appropriate.
  For example, an underinflated tire
  causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’   Combine several short trips into




                                                                                            Before Driving
  which uses more fuel.                 one.

  The build-up of snow or mud on        The air conditioning puts an extra
  your vehicle’s underside adds         load on the engine which makes it
  weight and rolling resistance.        use more fuel. Use the fresh-air
  Frequent cleaning helps your fuel     ventilation when possible.
  mileage and reduces the chance of
  corrosion.

  Drive moderately. Rapid
  acceleration, abrupt cornering,
  and hard braking use more fuel.




                                                                                      233
Accessories and Modifications

Modifying your vehicle, or installing                                           Before installing any accessory:
some non-Acura accessories, can
make your vehicle unsafe. Before          Improper accessories or                 Make sure the accessory does not
you make any modifications or add         modifications can affect your           obscure any lights, or interfere
any accessories, be sure to read the      vehicle’s handling, stability, and      with proper vehicle operation or
following information.                    performance, and cause a                performance.
                                          crash in which you can be hurt
Accessories                               or killed.                              Be sure electronic accessories do
Your dealer has Acura accessories                                                 not overload electrical circuits
that allow you to personalize your        Follow all instructions in this         (see page 330 ) or interfere with
vehicle. These accessories have           owner’s manual regarding                proper operation of your vehicle.
been designed and approved for your       accessories and modifications.
vehicle, and are covered by warranty.                                             Before installing any electronic
                                                                                  accessory, have the installer
Although non-Acura accessories may      When properly installed, cellular         contact your dealer for assistance.
fit on your vehicle, they may not       phones, alarms, two-way radios, and       If possible, have your dealer
meet factory specifications, and        low-powered audio systems should          inspect the final installation.
could adversely affect your vehicle’s   not interfere with your vehicle’s
handling and stability.                 computer controlled systems, such         Do not install accessories on the
                                        as your airbags and anti-lock brakes.     side pillars or across the rear
                                                                                  windows. In these areas,
                                                                                  accessories may interfere with
                                                                                  proper operation of the side
                                                                                  curtain airbags.



234
                                                                             Accessories and Modifications

Modifying Your Vehicle                   Larger or smaller wheels and tires
Removing parts from your vehicle,        can interfere with the operation of
or replacing components with non-        your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
Acura components could seriously         other systems.
affect your vehicle’s handling,
stability, and reliability.              Modifying your steering wheel or
                                         any other part of your vehicle’s
Some examples are:                       safety systems could make the
  Lowering the vehicle with a non-       systems ineffective.
  Acura suspension kit that




                                                                                                             Before Driving
  significantly reduces ground         If you plan to modify your vehicle,
  clearance can allow the              consult your dealer.
  undercarriage to hit speed bumps
  or other raised objects, which
  could cause the airbags to deploy.

  Raising your vehicle with a non-
  Acura suspension kit can affect
  the handling and stability.

  Non-Acura wheels, because they
  are a universal design, can cause
  excessive stress on suspension
  components.



                                                                                                       235
Carrying Cargo

                                                         Your vehicle has several convenient
                               DOOR POCKET               storage areas:
                                         CENTER POCKET
                                                           Glove box

                                                           Door pockets

                                                           Trunk, including the back seats
                                                           when folded down

                                                           Center pocket

                                                           Console compartment

                                                           Roof-rack (if installed)

                                                         However, carrying too much cargo,
                                                         or improperly storing it, can affect
                                                         your vehicle’s handling, stability,
                                                         stopping distance, and tires, and
                                                         make it unsafe. Before carrying any
                 CONSOLE                                 type of cargo, be sure to read the
                 COMPARTMENT                             following pages.
      TRUNK                                  GLOVE BOX



236
                                                                                                      Carrying Cargo

Load Limits                             Steps for determining correct load           (850    750 (5     150) = 100 lbs.)
The maximum load for your vehicle       limit:
is 850 lbs (385 kg) for U.S.A, 395 kg                                              5. Determine the combined weight
for Canada. This figure includes the    1. Locate the statement, ‘‘the                of luggage and cargo being loaded
total weight of all occupants, cargo,      combined weight of occupants and           on the vehicle. The weight may
and accessories, and the tongue load       cargo should never exceed 850              unsafely exceed the available
if you are towing a trailer.               lbs’’ on your vehicle’s placard.           cargo and luggage load capacity in
                                           (The placard is on the driver’s            step 4.
                                           doorjamb).
                                                                                   6. If your vehicle will be towing a




                                                                                                                             Before Driving
  Overloading or improper               2. Determine the combined weight              trailer, load from your trailer will
  loading can affect handling and          of the driver and passengers that          be transferred to your vehicle.
  stability and cause a crash in           will be riding in your vehicle.            Consult this manual to determine
  which you can be hurt or killed.                                                    how this reduces the available
                                        3. Subtract the combined weight of            cargo and luggage load capacity of
  Follow all load limits and other         the driver and passengers from             your vehicle (see page 258 ).
  loading guidelines in this               850 lbs.
  manual.
                                        4. The resulting figure equals the
                                           available amount of cargo and
                                           luggage load capacity.
                                           For example, if the maximum load
                                           is 850 lbs and there will be five 150
                                           lb. passengers in your vehicle, the
                                           amount of available cargo and
                                           luggage load capacity is 100 lbs.                                  CONTINUED


                                                                                                                      237
Carrying Cargo

In addition, the total weight of the      If you carry large items that        Carrying Items in the Passenger
vehicle, all passengers, accessories,     prevent you from closing the trunk   Compartment
cargo, and trailer tongue load must       lid, exhaust gas can enter the         Store or secure all items that could
not exceed the Gross Vehicle              passenger area. To avoid the           be thrown around and hurt
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross         possibility of carbon monoxide         someone during a crash.
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both           poisoning, follow the instructions
are on a label on the driver’s            on page 56 .                           Be sure items placed on the floor
doorjamb.                                                                        behind the front seats cannot roll
                                          If you carry any items on a roof       under the seats and interfere with
Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or on         rack, be sure the total weight of      the driver’s ability to operate the
a Roof Rack                               the rack and the items does not        pedals or the seat.
  Distribute cargo evenly on the          exceed 165 lbs (75 kg).
  floor of the trunk, placing the                                                Keep the glove box closed while
  heaviest items on the bottom and      If you use an accessory roof rack,       driving. If it is open, a passenger
  as far forward as possible. Tie       the roof rack weight limit may be        could injure their knees during a
  down items that could be thrown       lower. Refer to the information that     crash or sudden stop.
  about the vehicle during a crash or   came with your roof rack.
  sudden stop.                                                                   Do not put any items on top of the
                                                                                 rear shelf. They can block your
  If you fold down the back seat, tie                                            view and be thrown around the
  down items that could be thrown                                                vehicle during a crash.
  about the vehicle during a crash or
  sudden stop.




238
                                                                                Driving

This section gives you tips on          Preparing to Drive ......................... 240
starting the engine under various       Starting the Engine........................ 241
conditions, and how to operate the      Manual Transmission.................... 242
manual and automatic transmissions.       Recommended Shift Points ...... 242
It also includes important                Engine Speed Limiter ............... 243
information on parking your vehicle,      Reverse Lockout ........................ 243
the braking system, the vehicle         Automatic Transmission............... 244
stability assist (VSA) system, and        Shift Lever Position
facts you need if you are planning to        Indicators ................................ 244
tow a trailer.                            Shifting ........................................ 244
                                          Sequential SportShift Mode ..... 246
                                          Engine Speed Limiter ............... 249




                                                                                                   Driving
                                          Shift Lock Release ..................... 249
                                        Parking ............................................ 251
                                          Parking Tips ............................... 251
                                        Braking System.............................. 252
                                          Brake System Design................ 252
                                          Brake Wear Indicators .............. 252
                                          Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ............ 253
                                        Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
                                             System..................................... 255
                                          VSA OFF Switch ........................ 256
                                          VSA and Tire Sizes .................... 256
                                        Towing a Trailer ............................ 257



                                                                                         239
Preparing to Drive

You should do the following checks         6. Check the seat adjustment (see      11. When you start the engine, check
and adjustments before you drive              pages 138 and 139 ).                    the gauges and indicators in the
your vehicle.                                                                         instrument panel and the
                                           7. Check the adjustment of the             messages in the multi-information
1. Make sure all windows, mirrors,            inside and outside mirrors (see         display (see pages 61 and 76 ).
   and outside lights are clean and           pages 145 and 146 ).
   unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
   or ice.                                 8. Check the steering wheel
                                              adjustment (see page 124 ).
2. Check that the hood is fully closed.
                                           9. Make sure the doors are securely
3. Check that the trunk is fully              closed and locked.
   closed.
                                          10. Fasten your seat belt. Check that
4. Visually check the tires. If a tire        your passengers have fastened
   looks low, use a gauge to check its        their seat belts (see page 17 ).
   pressure.

5. Check that any items you may be
   carrying are stored properly or
   fastened down securely.




240
                                                                                               Starting the Engine

1. Apply the parking brake.             4. Without touching the accelerator        6. If the engine fails to start, press
                                           pedal, turn the ignition key to the        the accelerator pedal all the way
2. In cold weather, turn off all           START (III) position. Do not hold          down and hold it there while
   electrical accessories to reduce        the key in the START (III)                 starting to clear flooding. Return
   the drain on the battery.               position for more than 15 seconds          to step 5 if the engine does not
                                           at a time. If the engine does not          start.
3. Manual transmission:                    start right away, pause for at least
   Push the clutch pedal down all the      10 seconds before trying again.
   way.
                                                                                   The engine is harder to start in cold
  Automatic transmission:                                                          weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at
  Make sure the shift lever is in       The immobilizer system protects your       altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400




                                                                                                                              Driving
  Park. Press on the brake pedal.       vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly-    meters) adds to this problem.
                                        coded key (or other device) is used, the
                                        engine’s f uel system is disabled. For
                                        more inf ormation, see page 126 .

                                        5. If the engine does not start within
                                           15 seconds, or starts but stalls
                                           right away, repeat step 4 with the
                                           accelerator pedal pressed halfway
                                           down. If the engine starts, release
                                           pressure on the accelerator pedal
                                           so the engine does not race.



                                                                                                                       241
Manual Transmission

                                         Come to a full stop before you shift
                                         into reverse. You can damage the
                                         transmission by trying to shift into         Rapid slowing or speeding-up
                                         reverse with the vehicle moving.             can cause loss of control on
                                         Push down the clutch pedal, and              slippery surfaces. If you crash,
                                         pause for a few seconds before               you can be injured.
                                         shifting into reverse, or shift into one
                                         of the forward gears for a moment.           Use extra care when driving on
                                         This stops the gears so they won’t           slippery surfaces.
                                         ‘‘grind.’’
                                                                                    Recommended Shift Points
                                         When slowing down, you can get             Drive in the highest gear that lets
                                         extra braking from the engine by           the engine run and accelerate
The manual transmission is syn-          shifting to a lower gear. This extra       smoothly. This will give you good
chronized in all forward gears for       braking can help you maintain a safe       fuel economy and effective emis-
smooth operation. When shifting up       speed and prevent your brakes from         sions control. The following shift
or down, make sure you push the          overheating while going down a             points are recommended:
clutch pedal down all the way, shift     steep hill. Before downshifting,
to the next gear, and let the pedal up   make sure the engine speed will not         Shift up     Normal acceleration
gradually. When you are not shifting,    go into the tachometer’s red zone in
do not rest your foot on the clutch      the lower gear. Downshift one gear         1st to 2nd     12 mph (19 km/h)
pedal. This can cause your clutch to     at a time.                                 2nd to 3rd     23 mph (37 km/h)
wear out faster.                                                                    3rd to 4th     34 mph (54 km/h)
                                                                                    4th to 5th     45 mph (72 km/h)
                                                                                    5th to 6th     56 mph (90 km/h)


242
                                                                                          Manual Transmission

Engine Speed Limiter                     Reverse Lockout                          1. Apply the parking brake, and turn
If you exceed the maximum speed          The 6-speed manual transmission             the ignition key to the
for the gear you are in, the engine      has an electric lockout so you cannot       ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)
speed will enter into the tachometer’s   accidentally shift from fifth to            position.
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel   reverse instead of sixth while the
the engine cut in and out. This is       vehicle is moving. If you cannot shift   2. Press the clutch pedal, and shift to
caused by a limiter in the engine’s      to reverse when the vehicle is              reverse.
computer controls. The engine will       stopped:
run normally when you reduce the                                                  3. With the clutch pedal still pressed,
rpm below the red zone.                                                              start the engine.

Before downshifting, make sure the                                                If you need to use this procedure to




                                                                                                                            Driving
engine will not go into the                                                       shift to reverse, your vehicle may be
tachometer’s red zone.                                                            developing a problem. Have the
                                                                                  vehicle checked by your dealer.




                                                                                                                    243
Automatic Transmission

Shift Lever Position Indicators             If the malfunction indicator lamp       Shifting
                                            comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
                                            indicator, there is a problem in the
                                            automatic transmission control                                  SHIFT LEVER
                                            system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
                                            have the transmission checked by
                                            your dealer as soon as possible.

                                            When the ‘‘D’’ indicator warns of a
                                            possible problem with the
                                            transmission, you will see a ‘‘CHECK
                                            TRANSMISSION’’ message in the
                                            multi-information display (see page
These indicators in the tachometer           82 ).
show which position the shift lever is                                              To shift from any position, move the
in.                                                                                 shift lever. You cannot shift out of
                                                                                    Park when the ignition switch is in
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a                                                  the LOCK (0) or the ACCESSORY
few seconds when you turn the                                                       (I) position.
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.




244
                                                                                      Automatic Transmission

 To shift from:            Do this:       To avoid transmission damage, come      Neutral (N) Use neutral if you
     P to R       Press the brake pedal   to a complete stop before shifting      need to restart a stalled engine, or if
                  and move the lever.     into Park. The shift lever must be in   it is necessary to stop briefly with
    R to P                                Park before you can remove the key      the engine idling. Shift to the Park
    N to R                                from the ignition switch.               position if you need to leave your
    D3 to D                                                                       vehicle and apply the parking brake.
    D to N        Move the lever.         Reverse (R) Press the brake             Press on the brake pedal when you
    D to D3                               pedal, and move the shift lever from    are moving the shift lever from
    N to D                                Park to reverse. To shift from          neutral to another gear.
    R to N                                reverse to neutral, come to a
                                          complete stop, and then shift.          Drive (D) Use this position for
Park (P) This position mechani-                                                   your normal driving. The




                                                                                                                            Driving
cally locks the transmission. Use                                                 transmission automatically selects a
Park whenever you are turning off or                                              suitable gear for the vehicle speed
starting the engine. To shift out of                                              and acceleration. You may notice the
Park, you must press on the brake                                                 transmission shifting up at higher
pedal and have your foot off the                                                  speeds when the engine is cold. This
accelerator pedal.                                                                helps the engine warm up faster.

If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see Shift Lock Release on
page 249 .


                                                                                                             CONTINUED


                                                                                                                     245
Automatic Transmission

Drive (D3) This position is similar       Sequential SportShift Mode          With
to D, except only the first three         the shift lever in ‘‘D’’ position, you
gears are selected instead of all five.   can select the Sequential SportShift
Use D3 when towing a trailer in hilly     Mode to shift gears; much like a
terrain, or to provide engine braking     manual transmission, but without a
when going down a steep hill. D3 can      clutch pedal.
also keep the transmission from
cycling between third and fourth          To enter the Sequential SportShift
gears in stop-and-go driving.             mode, move the shift lever further to
                                          the driver’s side. To return to ‘‘D,’’
                                          move the shift lever to the
                                          passenger’s side.                                              SELECTED GEAR

                                                                                     When you move the shift lever from
                                                                                     ‘‘D’’ to ‘‘M’’ position, the display
                                                                                     shows the selected gear.

                                                                                     In Sequential SportShift mode, each
                                                                                     time you push forward on the shift
                                                                                     lever, the transmission shifts to a
                                                                                     higher gear. Pull back on the lever to
                                                                                     downshift. The number of the gear
                                                                                     selected is displayed on the
                                                                                     instrument panel.



246
                                                                                      Automatic Transmission

                                          The transmission may automatically      Downshifting gives you more power
                                          downshift from the higher gear to       when climbing, and provides engine
                                          the lower gear under the following      braking when going down a steep hill.
                                          conditions:
          Up shift
                                                                                  The transmission will also shift
                                            The vehicle speeds drops below        automatically as the vehicle comes to
                                               5 4: 33 mph (52 km/h)              a complete stop. It will downshift to
                            Down shift         4 3: 20 mph (32 km/h)              first gear when the vehicle speed is
                                            If you drive uphill between           under 6 mph (10 km/h).
                                               5 4: 45 33 mph
                                               (72 52 km/h)                       If you try to manually downshift at a
                                               4 3: 33 20 mph                     speed that would cause the engine to




                                                                                                                           Driving
                                               (52 32 km/h)                       exceed the redline in a lower gear,
When you accelerate away from a                3 2: 20 10 mph                     the transmission will not downshift.
stop, the transmission will be in first        (32 16 km/h)                       The gear indicator will flash the
gear. The transmission will not             If you press the brake pedal as you   number of the lower gear several
automatically upshift. Watch the            drive downhill.                       times, then return to the higher gear.
tachometer and upshift manually
before the engine reaches redline.                                                If the vehicle speed slows to below
                                                                                  the redline of the selected lower gear
The transmission remains in the                                                   position while the indicator is
selected gear (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1). There                                           flashing, the transmission will
is no automatic downshift when you                                                downshift and the display will show
push the accelerator pedal to the                                                 the selected lower gear.
floor.
                                                                                                            CONTINUED


                                                                                                                   247
Automatic Transmission

The table shows the speed ranges                                   Starting in Second Gear
for upshifting and downshifting.   To shift from    Speed range    When you are in Sequential
                                                                   SportShift mode, and the vehicle is
                                      2    1       under 31 mph    stopped, push forward on the shift
 To shift from     Speed range                       (50 km/h)     lever to shift to second gear. You will
                                                                   see ‘‘2’’ in the display. Starting out in
      1   2        over 0 mph         3    2       under 69 mph    second gear will help to reduce
                    (0 km/h)                        (110 km/h)     wheelspin in deep snow or on a
                                                                   slippery surface.
      2   3        over 6 mph         4    3       under 88 mph
                    (10 km/h)                       (140 km/h)     If you start out in second gear, the
                                                                   transmission will be fixed in that
      3   4        over 20 mph        5    4       under 131 mph   gear.
                    (32 km/h)                        (210 km/h)
                                                                   The transmission will not
      4   5        over 33 mph                                     automatically downshift to first gear
                    (52 km/h)                                      even when the vehicle speed is
                                                                   under 6 mph (10 km/h). You need to
                                                                   shift down to first gear manually.




248
                                                                                   Automatic Transmission

Engine Speed Limiter                     Shift Lock Release                                    COVER
If you exceed the maximum speed          This allows you to move the shift
for the gear you are in, the engine      lever out of Park if the normal
speed will enter into the tachometer’s   method of pushing on the brake
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel   pedal and pressing the release
the engine cut in and out. This is       button does not work.
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will       1. Set the parking brake.
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.                  2. Remove the key from the ignition
                                            switch.




                                                                                                                         Driving
                                                                               3. Put a cloth on the notch of the
                                                                                  shift lock release slot cover. Using
                                                                                  a small flat-tipped screwdriver or a
                                                                                  metal fingernail file, carefully pry
                                                                                  on the notch of the cover to
                                                                                  remove it.




                                                                                                          CONTINUED


                                                                                                                  249
Automatic Transmission

                                         6. Remove the key from the Shift
                                            Lock Release slot, then reinstall
                                            the cover. Make sure the notch on
                                            the cover is on the left side.
                                            Return the key to the ignition
                                            switch, depress the brake pedal
                                            and restart the engine.

                                         If you need to use the shift lock
                                         release, it means your vehicle is
                                         developing a problem. Have the
    SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT              vehicle checked by your dealer.

4. Insert the key in the shift lock
   release slot.

5. Push down on the key while you
   move the shift lever out of Park to
   neutral.




250
                                                                                                           Parking

Always use the parking brake when       Parking Tips                             If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
you park your vehicle. Make sure          Make sure the moonroof and the         the front wheels away from the
the parking brake is set firmly, or       windows are closed.                    curb. If your vehicle has a manual
your vehicle may roll if it is parked                                            transmission, put it in first gear.
on an incline.                            Turn off the lights.
                                                                                 If the vehicle is facing downhill,
If your vehicle has an automatic          Place any packages, valuables, etc.,   turn the front wheels toward the
transmission, set the parking brake       in the trunk or take them with you.    curb. If your vehicle has a manual
before you put the transmission in                                               transmission, put it in reverse gear.
Park. This keeps the vehicle from         Lock the doors with the key or the
moving and putting pressure on the        remote transmitter.                    Make sure the parking brake is
parking mechanism in the                  Check the indicator on the             fully released before driving away.




                                                                                                                         Driving
transmission.                             instrument panel to verify that the    Driving with the parking brake
                                          security system is set.                partially set can overheat or
If your vehicle has a manual                                                     damage the rear brakes.
transmission, put it in first gear.       Never park over dry leaves, tall
                                          grass, or other flammable
                                          materials. The hot three way
                                          catalytic converter could cause
                                          these materials to catch on fire.




                                                                                                                  251
Braking System

Your vehicle is equipped with disc      Check the brakes after driving           Brake Wear Indicators
brakes at all four wheels. A power      through deep water. Apply the            All four brakes have audible brake
assist helps reduce the effort needed   brakes moderately to see if they feel    wear indicators.
on the brake pedal. The anti-lock       normal. If not, apply them gently and
brake system (ABS) helps you retain     frequently until they do. Be extra       If the brake pads need replacing, you
steering control when braking very      cautious in your driving.                will hear a distinctive, metallic
hard.                                                                            screeching sound when you apply
                                        Braking System Design                    the brake pedal. If you do not have
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps    The hydraulic system that operates       the brake pads replaced, they will
the brakes applied lightly, builds up   the brakes has two separate circuits.    screech all the time. It is normal for
heat, increases wear, and reduces       Each circuit works diagonally across     the brakes to occasionally squeal or
their effectiveness. It also keeps      the vehicle (the left-front brake is     squeak when you apply them.
your brake lights on all the time,      connected with the right-rear brake,
confusing drivers behind you.           etc.). If one circuit should develop a
                                        problem, you will still have braking
Constant application of the brakes      at two wheels.
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effective-
ness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by taking your foot off the
accelerator and downshifting to a
lower gear.




252
                                                                                       Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

The anti-lock brake system (ABS)         You will feel a pulsation in the brake            ABS Indicator
helps prevent the brakes from            pedal when the ABS activates, and
locking up, and helps you retain         you may hear some noise. This is         If this indicator comes on, the anti-
steering control by pumping the          normal: it is the ABS rapidly            lock function of the braking system
brakes rapidly, much faster than a       pumping the brakes. On dry               has shut down. The brakes still work
person can do it.                        pavement, you will need to press on      like a conventional system, but
                                         the brake pedal very hard before the     without anti-lock. You should have
The ABS also balances the front-to-      ABS activates. However, you may          your dealer inspect your vehicle as
rear braking distribution according      feel the ABS activate immediately if     soon as possible.
to vehicle loading.                      you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
                                                                                  When the ABS indicator comes on,
You should never pump the brake pedal;                                            you will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABS




                                                                                                                          Driving
this defeats the purpose of the ABS.                                              SYSTEM’’ message in the multi-
Let the ABS work for you by always                                                information display.
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal as you steer away from                                                If the ABS indicator and the brake
the hazard. This is sometimes                                                     system indicator come on together,
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’                                               and the parking brake is fully
                                                                                  released, the front-to-rear braking
                                                                                  distribution system may also be shut
                                                                                  down.




                                                                                                           CONTINUED


                                                                                                                   253
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

Test your brakes as instructed on        Important Safety Reminders               A vehicle with ABS may require a
page 326 . If the brakes feel normal,    ABS does not reduce the time or          longer distance to stop on loose or
drive slowly and have your vehicle       distance it takes to stop the            uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
repaired by your dealer as soon as       vehicle. It only helps with the          snow, than a vehicle without anti-
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking      steering control during braking.         lock. Slow down, and allow a greater
which could cause the rear wheels to                                              distance between vehicles under
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of   ABS will not prevent a skid that         those conditions.
control.                                 results from changing direction
                                         abruptly, such as trying to take a       The VSA indicator will come on
                                         corner too fast or making a sudden       along with the ABS indicator.
                                         lane change. Always drive at a safe
                                         speed for the road and weather
                                         conditions.

                                         ABS cannot prevent a loss of
                                         stability. Always steer moderately
                                         when you are braking hard. Severe
                                         or sharp steering wheel movement
                                         can still cause your vehicle to veer
                                         into oncoming traffic or off the road.




254
                                                                     Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

The vehicle stability assist (VSA)                VSA Activation Indicator       If the indicator does not come on
system helps to stabilize the vehicle                                            when the ignition switch is turned to
during cornering if the vehicle turns    When VSA activates, you will see the    the ON (II) position, there may be a
more or less than desired. It also       VSA activation indicator blink.         problem with the VSA system. Have
assists you in maintaining traction                                              your dealer inspect your vehicle as
while accelerating on loose or                    VSA System Indicator           soon as possible.
slippery road surfaces. It does this
by regulating the engine’s output,       If this indicator comes on while        When the VSA system indicator
and by selectively applying the          driving, pull to the side of the road   comes on, you will also see a
brakes.                                  when it is safe, and turn off the       ‘‘CHECK VSA SYSTEM’’ message in
                                         engine. Reset the system by             the multi-information display.
When VSA activates, you may notice       restarting the engine. If the VSA




                                                                                                                         Driving
that the engine does not respond to      system indicator stays on, or comes     Without VSA, your vehicle will have
the accelerator in the same way it       back on while driving, have the VSA     normal braking and cornering ability,
does at other times.                     system inspected by your dealer.        but it will not have VSA traction and
                                                                                 stability enhancement.
The VSA system cannot enhance the
vehicle’s driving stability in all
situations and does not control your
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is
still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.


                                                                                                           CONTINUED


                                                                                                                  255
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

VSA Off Switch                            VSA and Tire Sizes
                                          Driving with varying tire or wheel
                                          sizes may cause the VSA to
                                          malfunction. When replacing tires,
                                          make sure they are of the same size
                                          and type as your original tires (see
                                          page 307 ).

                                          Deactivate the VSA system if you
                                          need to drive with the compact spare
                                          tire installed (see page 312 ).

                                          If you install winter tires, make sure
                                          they are the same size as those that
This switch is under the left vent.       were originally supplied with your
Press it to turn the vehicle stability    vehicle. Exercise the same caution
assist system on and off.                 during winter driving as you would if
                                          your vehicle was not equipped with
When VSA is off, the VSA activation       VSA.
indicator comes on as a reminder.

VSA is turned on every time you
start the engine, even if you turned it
off the last time you drove the
vehicle.


256
                                                                                              Towing a Trailer

Your vehicle has been designed to        Load Limits
primarily carry passengers and their
cargo. You can also use it to tow a
trailer if you carefully observe the
load limits, use the proper equipment,
and follow the guidelines in this
section.



  Exceeding any load limit or
  improperly loading your vehicle




                                                                                                                       Driving
  and trailer can cause a crash in
  which you can be seriously hurt
  or killed.                             Total Trailer Weight: The             Tongue Load: The weight that
                                         maximum allowable weight of the       the tongue of a fully-loaded trailer
  Check the loading of your              trailer and everything in or on it    puts on the hitch should be
  vehicle and trailer carefully          must not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg).   approximately 10 % of the total
  before starting to drive.              Towing a load that is too heavy       trailer weight. Too much tongue
                                         can seriously affect your vehicle’s   load reduces front-tire traction and
                                         handling and performance. It can      steering control. Too little tongue
                                         also damage the engine and            load can make the trailer unstable
                                         drivetrain.                           and cause it to sway.


                                                                                                         CONTINUED


                                                                                                                 257
Towing a Trailer

To achieve a proper tongue load,       Gross Axle Weight Rating          Checking Loads
start by loading 60 % of the load      (GAWR):                           The best way to confirm that vehicle
toward the front of the trailer and    The maximum allowable weight of   and trailer weights are within limits
40 % toward the rear, then re-adjust   the vehicle axles is:             is to have them checked at a public
the load as needed.                                                      scale.
                                         2,335 Ibs (1,060 kg)
  Gross Vehicle Weight Rating            on the front axle               Using a suitable scale or a special
  (GVWR):                                2,030 Ibs (920 kg)              tongue load gauge, check the tongue
  The maximum allowable weight of        on the rear axle                load the first time you set up a
  the vehicle, all occupants, all                                        towing combination (a fully-loaded
  accessories, all cargo, and the                                        vehicle and trailer), then recheck the
  tongue load is:                                                        tongue load whenever the conditions
                                                                         change.
      4,300 Ibs (1,950 kg)




258
                                                                                                   Towing a Trailer

Towing Equipment and                      Hitches                                 Trailer Brakes
Accessories                               Any hitch used on your vehicle must     Acura recommends that any trailer
Towing generally requires a variety       be properly bolted to the underbody.    having a total weight of 1,000 lbs
of supplemental equipment,                                                        (450 kg) or more be equipped with
depending on the size of your trailer,    Safety Chains                           its own electric or surge-type brakes.
how much load you are towing, and         Always use safety chains when you
where you tow. To ensure the best         tow a trailer. Make sure the chains     If you choose electric brakes, be
quality, we recommend that you            are secured to the trailer and hitch,   sure they are electrically actuated.
purchase Acura equipment                  and that they cross under the tongue    Do not attempt to tap into your
whenever possible.                        and can catch the trailer if it         vehicle’s hydraulic system. No
                                          becomes unhitched. Leave enough         matter how successful it may seem,
Discuss your needs with your trailer      slack to allow the trailer to turn      any attempt to attach trailer brakes




                                                                                                                             Driving
sales or rental agency, and follow the    corners easily, but do not let the      to your vehicle’s hydraulic system
guidelines in the rest of this section.   chains drag on the ground.              will lower braking effectiveness and
Also make sure that all equipment is                                              create a potential hazard.
properly installed and maintained,
and that it meets federal, state,                                                 See your trailer dealer for more
province, and local regulations.                                                  information on installing electric
                                                                                  brakes.




                                                                                                            CONTINUED


                                                                                                                       259
Towing a Trailer

Trailer Lights                          Additional Towing Equipment             Ask your trailer sales or rental
Trailer lights and equipment must       Many states and Canadian provinces      agency if any other items are
comply with federal, state, province,   require special outside mirrors when    recommended or required for your
and local regulations. Check the        towing a trailer. Even if they don’t,   towing situation.
requirements for the areas where        you should install special mirrors if
you plan to tow, and use only           you cannot clearly see behind you, or
equipment designed for your vehicle.    if the trailer creates a blind spot.

Since lighting and wiring vary by
trailer type and brand, you should
have a qualified technician install a
suitable connector between the
vehicle and the trailer. Improper
equipment or installation can cause
damage to your vehicle’s electrical
system and affect your vehicle
warranty.




260
                                                                                               Towing a Trailer

Pre-Tow Checklist                         Your vehicle tires and spare are      Backing Up
When preparing to tow, and before         properly inflated (see page 304 ),    Always drive slowly and have
driving away, be sure to check the        and the trailer tires and spare are   someone guide you when backing up.
following:                                inflated as recommended by the        Grip the bottom of the steering
                                          trailer maker.                        wheel; then turn the wheel to the left
  The vehicle has been properly                                                 to get the trailer to move to the left,
  serviced, and the tires, brakes,      Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting       and turn the wheel right to move the
  suspension, cooling system, and       Crosswinds and air turbulence           trailer to the right.
  lights are in good operating          caused by passing trucks can disrupt
  condition.                            your steering and cause trailer to      Parking
                                        sway. When being passed by a large      Follow all normal precautions when
  All weights and loads are within      vehicle, keep a constant speed, and     parking, including firmly setting the




                                                                                                                          Driving
  limits (see pages 258 and 259 ).      steer straight ahead. Do not try to     parking brake and putting the
                                        make quick steering or braking          transmission in Park (automatic) or
  The hitch, safety chains, and any     corrections.                            in first or reverse (manual). Also,
  other attachments are secure.                                                 place wheel chocks at each of the
                                                                                trailer’s tires.
  All items in or on the trailer are
  properly secured and cannot shift
  while you drive.

  The lights and brakes on your
  vehicle and the trailer are working
  properly.



                                                                                                                  261
Towing a Trailer

Driving Safely With a Trailer              Making Turns and Braking                  If you must stop when facing uphill,
The added weight, length, and              Make turns more slowly and wider          use the foot brake or parking brake.
height of a trailer will affect your       than normal. The trailer tracks a         Do not try to hold the vehicle in
vehicle’s handling and performance,        smaller arc than your vehicle, and it     place by pressing on the accelerator,
so driving with a trailer requires         can hit or run over something the         as this can cause the automatic
some special driving skills and            vehicle misses. Allow more time and       transmission to overheat.
techniques.                                distance for braking. Do not brake or
                                           turn suddenly as this could cause the     When driving down hills, reduce
For your safety and the safety of          trailer to jackknife or turn over.        your speed, and shift down to second
others, take time to practice driving                                                gear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and
maneuvers before heading for the           Driving on Hills                          remember, it will take longer to slow
open road, and follow the guidelines       When climbing hills, closely watch        down and stop when towing a trailer.
below.                                     your temperature gauge. If it nears
                                           the red (Hot) mark, turn the air
Towing Speeds and Gears                    conditioning off, reduce speed and, if
Drive slower than normal in all            necessary, pull to the side of the
driving situations, and obey posted        road to let the engine cool.
speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
If you have an automatic                   If the automatic transmission shifts
transmission, use D position when          frequently while going up a hill, shift
towing a trailer on level roads. D3 is     to D3.
the proper shift lever position to use
when towing a trailer in hilly terrain.
(See ‘‘Driving on Hills’’ in the next
column for additional gear
information.)

262
                                                                                                                                Maintenance

This section explains why it is       Maintenance Safety ....................... 264              Tires ................................................ 303
important to keep your vehicle well   Maintenance Minder ..................... 266                  Inflation Guidelines ................... 303
maintained and how to follow basic    Maintenance Record ..................... 275                  Recomended Tire Pressures .... 304
maintenance safety precautions.       Fluid Locations............................... 277            Tire Inspection ........................... 305
                                      Adding Engine Oil ......................... 278               Tire Maintenance ...................... 305
This section also includes              Recommended Engine Oil........ 278                          Tire Rotation .............................. 306
instructions on how to read the         Synthetic Oil ............................... 279           Replacing Tires and Wheels .... 306
maintenance messages in the multi-      Engine Oil Additives ................. 279                  Wheel and Tire
information display, a maintenance    Changing the Oil and Filter .......... 280                      Specifications ......................... 307
record, and instructions for simple   Windshield Washers ..................... 282                  Winter Driving ........................... 307
maintenance tasks you may want to     Engine Coolant ............................... 283              Snow Tires .............................. 307
take care of yourself.                  Adding Engine Coolant ............. 283                       Tire Chains ............................. 308
                                      Transmission Fluid ........................ 285             Checking the Battery .................... 309
If you have the skills and tools to     Automatic                                                 Vehicle Storage .............................. 310




                                                                                                                                                               Maintenance
perform more complex maintenance           Transmission.......................... 285
tasks on your vehicle, you may want     Manual
to purchase the service manual. See        Transmission.......................... 287
page 353 for information on how to    Brake and Clutch Fluid ................. 288
obtain a copy, or see your dealer.      Brake Fluid ................................. 288
                                        Clutch Fluid ................................ 289
                                      Power Steering Fluid..................... 289
                                      Lights .............................................. 291
                                      Seat Belts ........................................ 299
                                      Floor Mats ...................................... 299
                                      Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 300
                                      Wiper Blades .................................. 301

                                                                                                                                                     263
Maintenance Safety

All service items not detailed in this    Make sure your vehicle is parked
section should be performed by a          on level ground, the parking brake
certified technician or other qualified   is set, and the engine is off.         Improperly maintaining this
mechanic.                                                                        vehicle or failing to correct a
                                          To clean parts, use a commercially     problem before driving can
Important Safety Precautions              available degreaser or parts           cause a crash in which you can
To eliminate potential hazards, read      cleaner, not gasoline.                 be seriously hurt or killed.
the instructions before you begin,
and make sure you have the tools          To reduce the possibility of fire or   Always follow the inspection,
and skills required.                      explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,    maintenance recommendations,
                                          and flames away from the battery       and schedules in this owner’s
                                          and all fuel-related parts.            manual.

                                          Wear eye protection and
                                          protective clothing when
                                          working near the battery or
                                          when using compressed air.




264
                                                                           Maintenance Safety

Potential Vehicle Hazards
  Carbon Monoxide poison
  from engine exhaust. Be sure        Failure to properly follow
  there is adequate ventilation       maintenance instructions and
  whenever you operate the            precautions can cause you to
  engine.                             be seriously hurt or killed.

  Burns from hot parts. Let the       Always follow the procedures
  engine and exhaust system cool      and precautions in this owner’s
  down before touching any parts.     manual.

  Injury from moving parts. Do
  not run the engine unless         Some of the most important safety
  instructed to do so.              precautions are given here. However,




                                                                                                Maintenance
                                    we cannot warn you of every
                                    conceivable hazard that can arise in
                                    performing maintenance. Only you
                                    can decide whether or not you
                                    should perform a given task.




                                                                                          265
Maintenance Minder

One of the most convenient and          Engine Oil Life Display               The remaining engine oil life is
important features of the multi-                                              displayed on the engine oil life
information display on your vehicle       ENGINE OIL LIFE DISPLAY             display according to this table:
is the maintenance minder.
                                                                               Calculated Engine   Displayed
Based on engine operating                                                         Oil Life (%)   Engine Oil Life
conditions and accumulated engine                                                                     (%)
revolutions, the onboard computer in                                             100% 91%            100%
your vehicle calculates the remaining                                             90% 81%             90%
engine oil life.                                                                  80% 71%             80%
                                                                                  70% 61%             70%
The system also displays the code                                                 60% 51%             60%
for other scheduled maintenance                REMAINING ENGINE OIL LIFE          50% 41%             50%
items needing service.                                                            40% 31%             40%
                                        To see the current engine oil life        30% 21%             30%
                                        displayed on the lower segment of         20% 16%             20%
                                        the multi-information display, turn       15% 11%             15%
                                        the ignition switch to the ON (II)         10%     6%         10%
                                        position, and press the SEL/RESET           5%     1%          5%
                                        button on the steering wheel                   0%              0%
                                        repeatedly until engine oil life is
                                        displayed.




266
                                                                                         Maintenance Minder

                                        To cancel the message, press the
                                        INFO button on the steering wheel.

                                        When the message appears, the
                                        system message indicator also
                                        comes on (see page 75 ). Even after
                                        you press the INFO button to cancel
                                        the message, the indicator continues
                                        to stay on until you have the service
                                        performed.

                                                                                 MAIN ITEM       SUB ITEMS
 MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE (S)




                                                                                                                         Maintenance
When the remaining engine oil life is                                           After the message in the multi-
15 to 6 %, the multi-information                                                information display is canceled by
display shows a ‘‘SERVICE DUE                                                   pressing the INFO button, the
SOON’’ message along with the                                                   engine oil life display will appear in
maintenance item code(s) indicating                                             the lower segment. You will see the
the main and sub items required at                                              percentage of the remaining engine
the time of the oil change. Refer to                                            oil life and the maintenance item
page 274 for a complete list of the                                             code(s) displayed.
maintenance main items and sub
items.

                                                                                                           CONTINUED


                                                                                                                   267
Maintenance Minder

To cancel the engine oil life display,                                             After have the service is performed,
press the SEL/RESET button to                                                      make sure to reset the display as
return to the previous display.                                                    described on page 269 .

The message appears in the multi-                                                  To cancel the message, press the
information display each time you                                                  INFO button on the steering wheel.
turn the ignition switch to the ON                                                 To see the message again, wait for
(II) position. After canceling the                                                 an interval for more than 5 seconds,
message, the engine oil life display                                               and then press the INFO button.
will appear in the lower segment.
This continues until you have the
indicated maintenance done by your
dealer.

                                         When the remaining oil life is 5 to 1%,
                                         the multi-information display shows
                                         a ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ message.
                                         The display also shows the same
                                         maintenance items that were
                                         previously shown with ‘‘SERVICE
                                         DUE SOON.’’ Make sure you have
                                         the indicated maintenance
                                         performed as soon as possible.




268
                                                                                             Maintenance Minder

                                         Your dealer will reset the display
                                         after completing the required
  ‘‘SERVICE’’ MESSAGE                    maintenance service. You will see
                                         ‘‘OIL LIFE 100 %’’ in the lower
                                         segment of the multi-information
                                         display and the maintenance item
                                         code(s) erased the next time you
                                         turn the ignition switch to the ON
                                         (II) position.

                                         If maintenance service is done by
                                         someone other than your dealer,
                                         reset the maintenance minder as
                                         follows:




                                                                                                                            Maintenance
After the message in the multi-                                                     3. Press and hold the SEL/RESET
information display is canceled by       1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON         button on the steering wheel for
pressing the INFO button, the               (II) position.                             more than 10 seconds. The
engine oil life display will appear in                                                 remaining engine oil life reset
the lower segment. You will see a        2. If the engine oil life display is not      mode will be shown on the multi-
‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with the          displayed, press the SEL/RESET             information display.
percentage of the remaining engine          button on the steering wheel
oil life and the maintenance item           repeatedly until it comes back.           To reset the engine oil life, press
code(s) displayed.                                                                    the INFO button on the steering
To cancel the engine oil life display,                                                wheel to select ‘‘RESET’’ on the
press the SEL/RESET button to                                                         display, and press the SEL/
return to the previous display.                                                       RESET button.            CONTINUED


                                                                                                                    269
Maintenance Minder

  To cancel resetting the oil life,                                               Immediately have the service
  press the INFO button on the                                                    performed, and make sure to reset
  steering wheel to select                                                        the display as previously described.
  ‘‘CANCEL’’ on the display, and
  press the SEL/RESET button.                                                     To cancel the message, press the
                                                                                  INFO button on the steering wheel.
If you do not complete the reset                                                  To see the message again, wait for
procedure within 30 seconds after                                                 an interval for more than 5 seconds,
selecting the reset mode, the mode                                                and then press the INFO button.
will be canceled automatically.

If you have the required service
performed but do not reset the
display, or reset the display without
performing the service, the system      If the indicated maintenance service
will not show the proper                is not done and the remaining engine
maintenance intervals. This can lead    oil life reaches 0 %, the multi-
to serious mechanical problems          information display will show the
because you will no longer have an      message ‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’
accurate record of when                 and the maintenance item code(s).
maintenance is needed.                  This message is displayed when the
                                        total mileage after the engine oil life
                                        became 0 % is less than 10 miles (for
                                        U.S. models)/10 km (for Canadian
                                        models).


270
                                                                                           Maintenance Minder

                                         Also, the percentage ‘‘0 %’’ keeps
                                         blinking on the display.
                                                                                    U.S.             CANADA
                                         This particular message is displayed
                                         when the mileage after the engine oil
                                         life became 0 % is less than 10 miles
                                         (for U.S. models)/10 km (for
                                         Canadian models).

                                         To cancel the engine oil life display,
                                         press the SEL/RESET button to
                                         return to the previous display.




                                                                                                                          Maintenance
After the message in the multi-                                                   If the indicated required service is
information display is canceled by                                                not done and the remaining engine
pressing the INFO button, the                                                     oil life becomes 0 %, the multi-
engine oil life display will appear in                                            information display will show a
the lower segment. You will see a                                                 ‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ message,
‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with the                                                the total mileage after the remaining
percentage ‘‘0%’’ and the                                                         oil life became 0 %, and the
maintenance item code(s) displayed.                                               maintenance item code(s).



                                                                                                           CONTINUED


                                                                                                                   271
Maintenance Minder

This message is displayed when you                                                 Also, the total negative mileage
drive over 10 miles (for U.S. models)                                              keeps blinking on the display.
or 10 km (for Canadian models)
after seeing the 0 % message.                U.S.                                  This particular message is displayed
                                                                                   when you drive over 10 miles (for
Immediately have the service                                                       U.S. models) or 10 km (for Canadian
performed, and make sure to reset                                                  models) after seeing the 0 %
the display as previously described.         CANADA
                                                                                   message.

The maximum total mileage shown                                                    The maximum total negative mileage
with this message is ‘‘9999 mile’’ (for                                            is ‘‘ 9999 mile’’ (for U.S. models) or
U.S. models) or ‘‘9999 km’’ (for                                                   ‘‘ 9999 km’’ (for Canadian models).
Canadian models).
                                                                                   To cancel the engine oil life display,
To cancel the message, press the          After the message in the multi-          press the SEL/RESET button to
INFO button on the steering wheel.        information display is canceled by       return to the previous display.
To see the message again, wait for        pressing the INFO button, the
an interval of more than 5 seconds,       engine oil life display will appear in
and then press the INFO button.           the lower segment. You will see a
                                          ‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with the
                                          maintenance item code(s), and the
                                          total negative mileage after the oil
                                          life becomes 0 % is displayed.




272
                                                                                   Maintenance Schedule

Important Maintenance                   U.S. Vehicles:                         Engine oil level Check every
Precautions                             Maintenance, replacement, or           time you fill the fuel tank. See
Your authorized dealer knows your       repair of emissions control            page 232 .
vehicle best and can provide            devices and systems may be done
competent, efficient service.           by any automotive repair               Engine coolant level Check the
However, service at a dealer is not     establishment or individual using      radiator reserve tank every time
mandatory to keep your warranties       parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA    you fill the fuel tank. See page 232 .
in effect. Maintenance may be done      standards.
by any qualified service facility or                                           Automatic transmission Check
person who is skilled in this type of   According to state and federal         the fluid level monthly. See pages
automotive service. Keep all receipts   regulations, failure to perform         285    286 .
as proof of completion, and have the    maintenance on the items marked
person who does the work fill out the   with will not void your emissions      Brakes Check the fluid level
maintenance record. Check your          warranties. However, all               monthly. See page 288 .




                                                                                                                        Maintenance
warranty booklet for more               maintenance services should be
information.                            performed at the recommended time      Tires Check the tire pressure
                                        or mileage period to ensure long-      monthly. Examine the tread for
We recommend the use of Acura           term reliability.                      wear and foreign objects. See page
parts and fluids whenever you have                                             303 .
maintenance done. These are             Owner’s Maintenance Checks
manufactured to the same high-          You should check the following         Lights Check the operation of
quality standards as the original       items at the specified intervals. If   the headlights, parking lights,
components, so you can be confident     you are unsure of how to perform       taillights, high-mount brake light,
of their performance and durability.    any check, turn to the appropriate     and license plate lights monthly.
                                        page listed.


                                                                                                                273
                     Maintenance Minder

                      Symbol                           Maintenance Main Items                               Symbol                     Maintenance Sub Items
                       A              Replace engine oil 1                                                    1      Rotate tires
                       B              Replace engine oil 1 and oil filter                                     2      Replace air cleaner element
                                      Inspect front and rear brakes                                                    If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000
                                      Check parking brake adjustment                                                   miles (24,000 km).
                                      Inspect these items:
                                        Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots                                   Replace dust and pollen filter
                                        Suspension components                                                          If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
                                        Driveshaft boots                                                               concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
                                        Brake hoses and line (including ABS)                                           from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000
Maintenance Minder




                                        All fluid levels and condition of fluids                                       miles (24,000 km).
                                        Exhaust system
                                        Fuel lines and connections                                                   Inspect drive belt
                                                                                                              3      Replace transmission fluid
                       1:    If the message ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ does not appear more than 12 months                    Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle
                             after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.                             speeds or trailer towing results in higher
                                                                                                                       transmission and transfer temperatures. This
                        : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the center                          requires transmission and transfer fluid changes
                             column on page 273 .                                                                      more frequently than recommended by the
                                                                                                                       maintenance minder. If you regularly drive your
                     NOTE:     Independent of the maintenance messages in the multi-information                        vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission
                               display, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.                                         and transfer fluid changed at 60,000 miles (100,000
                               Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).                                    km), then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km). (For A/T
                               Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.              only.)
                                                                                                              4      Replace spark plugs
                                                                                                                     Inspect valve clearance
                                                                                                              5      Replace engine coolant




                     274
                                                                                                                  Maintenance Record

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here. When maintenance is performed, record the mileage, circle the coded item(s)
completed, and write in any other non-coded items (such as brake fluid replacement) below the codes. Keep the receipts for all work done on your
vehicle.

  Mileage         Maintenance                     Signature                   Mileage         Maintenance                     Signature
                  Performed                                                                   Performed
                                                  Date                                                                        Date

            mi    A   B   1   2   3   4   5   6                                         mi    A   B   1   2   3   4   5   6
            km                                                                          km


            mi    A   B   1   2   3   4   5   6                                         mi    A   B   1   2   3   4   5   6
            km                                                                          km


            mi    A   B   1   2   3   4   5   6                                         mi    A   B   1   2   3   4   5   6
            km                                                                          km




                                                                                                                                                     Maintenance
            mi    A   B   1   2   3   4   5   6                                         mi    A   B   1   2   3   4   5   6
            km                                                                          km


            mi    A   B   1   2   3   4   5   6                                         mi    A   B   1   2   3   4   5   6
            km                                                                          km


            mi    A   B   1   2   3   4   5   6                                         mi    A   B   1   2   3   4   5   6
            km                                                                          km


            mi    A   B   1   2   3   4   5   6                                         mi    A   B   1   2   3   4   5   6
            km                                                                          km


                                                                                                                                     CONTINUED
                                                                                                                                              275
Maintenance Record


 Mileage        Maintenance                     Signature   Mileage        Maintenance                     Signature
                Performed                                                  Performed
                                                Date                                                       Date

           mi   A   B   1   2   3   4   5   6                         mi   A   B   1   2   3   4   5   6
           km                                                         km


           mi   A   B   1   2   3   4   5   6                         mi   A   B   1   2   3   4   5   6
           km                                                         km


           mi   A   B   1   2   3   4   5   6                         mi   A   B   1   2   3   4   5   6
           km                                                         km


           mi   A   B   1   2   3   4   5   6                         mi   A   B   1   2   3   4   5   6
           km                                                         km


           mi   A   B   1   2   3   4   5   6                         mi   A   B   1   2   3   4   5   6
           km                                                         km


           mi   A   B   1   2   3   4   5   6                         mi   A   B   1   2   3   4   5   6
           km                                                         km


           mi   A   B   1   2   3   4   5   6                         mi   A   B   1   2   3   4   5   6
           km                                                         km




276
                      Fluid Locations



BRAKE FLUID           CLUTCH FLUID
(Black cap)           (Manual
                      Transmission only)
                      (Light gray cap)


ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK   ENGINE OIL
(Orange handle)       FILL CAP




WASHER FLUID          AUTOMATIC




                                             Maintenance
(Blue cap)            TRANSMISSION
                      FLUID DIPSTICK
                      (Yellow loop)



POWER STEERING        ENGINE COOLANT
FLUID (Red cap)       RESERVE TANK



RADIATOR CAP




                                       277
Adding Engine Oil

    ENGINE OIL FILL CAP                   Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and   Recommended Engine Oil
                                          tighten it securely. Wait a few          Oil is a major contributor to your
                                          minutes, and recheck the oil level on    engine’s performance and longevity.
                                          the engine oil dipstick. Do not fill     Always use a premium-grade
                                          above the upper mark; you could          detergent oil displaying the API
                                          damage the engine.                       Certification Seal. This seal indicates
                                                                                   the oil is energy conserving and that
                                                                                   it meets the American Petroleum
                                                                                   Institute’s latest requirements. It is
                                                                                   highly recommended that you use
                                                                                   Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
                                                                                   as long as you own it.

Unscrew and remove the engine oil
fill cap on top of the valve cover.
Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spills immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment.




278
                                                                                          Adding Engine Oil

                                                                              Synthetic Oil
                                                                              You may use a synthetic motor oil if
                                                                              it meets the same requirements
                                                                              given for a conventional motor oil: it
                                                                              displays the API Certification Seal
                                                                              and it is the proper weight. You must
                                                                              follow the oil and filter change
                                                                              intervals shown on the multi-
                                                                              information display.
                                               Ambient Temperature
                                                                              Engine Oil Additives
      API CERTIFICATION SEAL
                                                                              Your vehicle does not require any oil
                                                                              additives. Additives may adversely
Make sure the API Certification Seal   An oil with a viscosity of 5W-30 is    affect the engine or transmission




                                                                                                                       Maintenance
says ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’         preferred for improved fuel economy    performance and durability.
                                       and year-round protection in your
                                       vehicle. You may use a 10W-30 oil if
                                       the temperature in your area never
                                       goes below 20°F ( 7°C).




                                                                                                                279
Changing the Oil and Filter

Always change the oil and filter                                                OIL DRAIN BOLT
according to the maintenance
messages shown on the multi-
information display. The oil and filter
collect contaminants that can
damage your engine if they are not
removed regularly.

Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from              BOLT
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service station-                                                                 WASHER
                                                         MAINTENANCE COVER
type hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and         1. Run the engine until it reaches   4. Remove the oil drain bolt and
proper equipment, you should have            normal operating temperature,        washer from the bottom of the
this maintenance done by a skilled           then shut it off.                    engine. Drain the oil into an
mechanic.                                                                         appropriate container.
                                          2. Open the hood and remove the
                                             engine oil fill cap.              5. Remove the oil filter and let the
                                                                                  remaining oil drain. A special
                                          3. Remove the bolt located on the       wrench (available from your
                                             underside of the body with a         dealer) is required.
                                             wrench, then remove the
                                             maintenance cover.



280
                                                                                       Changing the Oil and Filter

            OIL FILTER                     7. Put a new washer on the drain bolt,     11.Turn off the engine, let it sit for
                                              then reinstall the drain bolt.             several minutes, then check the oil
                                              Tighten it to:                             level on the dipstick. If necessary,
                                              33 lbf·ft (45 N·m , 4.6 kgf·m)             add more oil.

                                           8. Refill the engine with the recom-       12.Install the maintenance cover and
                                              mended oil.                                tighten the bolt securely.

                                             Engine oil change capacity
                                             (including filter):
                                             4.4 US qt (4.2 )                         Improper disposal of engine oil can be
                                                                                      harmf ul to the environment. If you
                                           9. Replace the engine oil fill cap.        change your own oil, please dispose of
  Make sure the oil filter gasket is          Start the engine. The oil pressure      the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed




                                                                                                                                  Maintenance
  not stuck to the engine block. If it        indicator should go out within 5        container and take it to a recycling
  is, remove it before installing a           seconds. If it does not, turn off the   center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
  new oil filter.                             engine, and check your work.            or dump it on the ground.

6. Install a new oil filter according to   10.Let the engine run for several
   the instructions that come with it.        minutes, then check the drain bolt
   Make sure to clean off any dirt            and oil filter for leaks.
   and dust on the connecting
   surface of a new oil filter.




                                                                                                                           281
Windshield Washers

Check the level in the windshield                              LEVEL GAUGE
washer reservoir at least monthly
during normal use.                                                              Do not use engine antif reeze or a
                                                                                vinegar/water solution in the
Check the reservoir’s fluid level by                                            windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze
removing the cap and looking at the                                             can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
level gauge attached to the cap.                                                a vinegar/water solution can damage
                                                                                the windshield washer pump. Use only
Canadian models only                                                            commercially-available windshield
If the washer fluid is low, a                                                   washer f luid.
‘‘WASHER FLUID LOW’’ message
appears in the multi-information
display.
                                         When you refill the reservoir, clean
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality   the edges of the windshield wiper
windshield washer fluid. This            blades with windshield washer fluid
increases the cleaning capability and    on a clean cloth. This will help to
prevents freezing in cold weather.       condition the blade edges.




282
                                                                                                Engine Coolant

Adding Engine Coolant                     If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not
                                          available, you may use another
                                          major-brand non-silicate coolant as a   Removing the radiator cap
                                          temporary replacement. Make sure it     while the engine is hot can
                                          is a high-quality coolant               cause the coolant to spray out,
                                          recommended for aluminum engines.       seriously scalding you.
                                          Continued use of any non-Honda
                                          coolant can result in corrosion,        Always let the engine and
                                          causing the cooling system to           radiator cool down before
                                          malfunction or fail. Have the cooling   removing the radiator cap.
                                          system flushed and refilled with
                                          Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
  RESERVE TANK                            possible.




                                                                                                                      Maintenance
If the coolant level in the reserve       If the reserve tank is completely
tank is at or below the MIN line, add     empty, you should also check the
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.   coolant level in the radiator.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Always use Honda Long-Life
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This
coolant is pre-mixed with 50 %
antifreeze and 50 % water. Never add
straight antifreeze or plain water.


                                                                                                         CONTINUED


                                                                                                                283
Engine Coolant

                                         4. The coolant level should be up to   6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
                                            the base of the filler neck. Add       Fill it to halfway between the MAX
                   RADIATOR CAP
                                            coolant if it is low.                  and MIN marks. Put the cap back
                                                                                   on the reserve tank.
                                           Pour the coolant slowly and
                                           carefully so you do not spill any.   Do not add any rust inhibitors or
                                           Clean up any spill immediately; it   other additives to your vehicle’s
                                           could damage components in the       cooling system. They may not be
                                           engine compartment.                  compatible with the coolant or
                                                                                engine components.
                                         5. Put the radiator cap back on, and
                                            tighten it fully.


1. Make sure the engine and radiator
   are cool.

2. Relieve any pressure in the cooling
   system by turning the radiator cap
   counterclockwise, without
   pressing down.

3. Remove the radiator cap by
   pushing down and turning
   counterclockwise.


284
                                                                                             Transmission Fluid

Automatic Transmission                                                            4. Remove the dipstick and check
                                                                                     the fluid level. It should be
                                                                                     between the upper and lower
                                                                                     marks.

                                                                                  5. If the level is below the lower
                                                                                     mark, add fluid into the dipstick
                                                                                     tube to bring it to the upper mark.

                                                                                    Pour the fluid slowly and carefully
                                                                                    so you do not spill any. Clean up
                                                                UPPER MARK
                                                                                    any spill immediately; it could
                                                                LOWER MARK          damage components in the engine
                      DIPSTICK
                                                                                    compartment.




                                                                                                                           Maintenance
Check the fluid level with the engine   3. Insert the dipstick all the way back
at normal operating temperature.           into the transmission securely as
                                           shown in the illustration.
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
   Shut off the engine.                   Make sure the rubber cap on the
                                          dipstick fits in the dipstick guide
2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)      and that you push the dipstick in
   from the transmission, and wipe it     all the way.
   with a clean cloth.


                                                                                                            CONTINUED


                                                                                                                    285
Transmission Fluid

Always use Honda ATF-Z1                   To thoroughly flush the transmission,    6. Insert the dipstick all the way back
(automatic transmission fluid). If it’s   the technician should drain and refill      into the transmission securely as
not available, you may use a              it with Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic             shown in the illustration.
DEXRON III automatic                      Transmission Fluid), then drive the
transmission fluid as a temporary         vehicle for a short distance. Do this    The transmission should be drained
replacement. However, continued           three times. Then drain and refill the   and refilled with new fluid when this
use can affect the shift quality. Have    transmission a final time.               service is shown on a maintenance
the transmission flushed and refilled                                              message in the multi-information
with Honda ATF-Z1 as soon as it is                                                 display.
convenient.
                                                                                   If you are not sure how to add fluid,
                                                                                   contact your dealer.




286
                                                                                                Transmission Fluid

Manual Transmission                                                                  Clean up any spills immediately.
                                                                                     Spilled fluid could damage
                             BOLT           FILLER BOLT                              components in the engine
                                                                                     compartment.

                                                                                     After checking and adding the fluid,
                                                                                     put the under cover back in place
                                                                                     and tighten the bolts securely.

                                                                                     If Honda MTF is not available, you
                                                                                     may use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40
                                                                                     viscosity motor oil with the API
     BOLT             UNDER COVER            Correct level                           Certification seal that says ‘‘FOR
                                                                                     GASOLINE ENGINES’’ as a




                                                                                                                              Maintenance
To check the transmission fluid level,   Check the fluid level with the              temporary replacement. However,
remove the two bolts, then pull the      transmission at normal operating            motor oil does not contain the proper
left part of the under cover down.       temperature and the vehicle sitting         additives, and continued use can
                                         on level ground. Remove the                 cause stiffer shifting. Replace as
If you are not sure how to add fluid,    transmission filler bolt, and carefully     soon as it is convenient.
contact your dealer.                     feel inside the bolt hole with your
                                         finger. The fluid level should be up        The transmission should be drained
                                         to the edge of the bolt hole. If it is      and refilled with new fluid when this
                                         not, add Honda Manual                       service is shown on a maintenance
                                         Transmission Fluid (MTF) until it           message in the multi-information
                                         starts to run out of the hole. Reinstall    display.
                                         the filler bolt, and tighten it securely.

                                                                                                                        287
Brake and Clutch Fluid

Check the fluid level in the            Always use Honda Heavy Duty             Brake Fluid
reservoirs monthly. There are up to     Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
two reservoirs, depending on the        available, you should use only DOT 3
model. They are:                        or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
                                        container, as a temporary
  Brake fluid reservoir (all models)    replacement.
  Clutch fluid reservoir
  (manual transmission models           Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
  only)                                 cause corrosion and decrease the life
                                        of the system. Have the brake
Replace the brake fluid when this       system flushed and refilled with
service is indicated on a maintenance   Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
message in the multi-information        DOT 3 as soon as possible.                                  MAX       MIN
display.
                                        Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not         The fluid level should be between
                                        compatible with your vehicle’s          the MIN and MAX marks on the side
                                        braking system and can cause            of the reservoir. If the level is at or
                                        extensive damage.                       below the MIN mark, your brake
                                                                                system needs attention. Have the
                                                                                brake system inspected for leaks or
                                                                                worn brake pads.




288
                                                            Brake and Clutch Fluid, Power Steering Fluid

Clutch Fluid                                Power Steering Fluid                      Pour the fluid slowly and carefully
Manual Transmission only                                                              so you do not spill any. Clean up
                                                              UPPER LEVEL
                                                                                      any spill immediately; it could
                            MAX                                                       damage components in the engine
                                                                                      compartment.




                                                              LOWER LEVEL




                                                                                                                             Maintenance
                        MIN
                                            Check the level on the side of the
The fluid level should be between           reservoir when the engine is cold.
the MIN and MAX marks on the side           The fluid should be between the
of the reservoir. If it is not, add         UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.
brake fluid to bring it up to that level.   If not, add power steering fluid to the
Use the same fluid specified for the        UPPER LEVEL.
brake system.

A low fluid level can indicate a leak
in the clutch system. Have this
system inspected as soon as possible.
                                                                                                                CONTINUED


                                                                                                                       289
Power Steering Fluid

Always use Honda Power Steering
Fluid. You may use another power
steering fluid as an emergency
replacement, but have the power
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible.

A low power steering fluid level can
indicate a leak in the system. Check
the fluid level frequently, and have
the system inspected as soon as
possible.



Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t
or right lock and holding it there can
damage the power steering pump.




290
                                                                                                                    Lights

Headlight Aiming                         Replacing a High Beam Headlight            NOTE: Halogen headlight bulbs get
The headlights were properly aimed       Bulb                                       very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a
when your vehicle was new. If you        Your vehicle has halogen headlight         scratch on the glass can cause the bulb
regularly carry heavy items in the       bulbs, one on each side. When              to overheat and shatter.
trunk or pull a trailer, readjustment    replacing a bulb, handle it by its steel
may be required. Adjustments             base and protect the glass from
should be performed by your dealer       contact with your skin or hard
or other qualified mechanic.             objects. If you touch the glass, clean
                                         it with denatured alcohol and a clean
Low Beam Headlight Bulb                  cloth.
Replacement
The low beam headlight bulbs are a
type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the




                                                                                                                                 Maintenance
circuit even with the light switch off
and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to
examine or change a low beam
headlight bulb yourself. If a low
beam headlight bulb fails, take the
vehicle to your dealer to have it
replaced.



                                                                                                                 CONTINUED


                                                                                                                         291
Lights

  FASTENER       AIR INTAKE COVER         BULB      RUBBER WEATHER SEAL      4. Unclip the end of the hold-down
                                                                                wire from its slot. Pivot it out of
                                        SOCKET                                  the way, and remove the bulb
                                                                                socket.

                                                                             5. Pull the burned out bulb straight
                                                                                out of its socket.
                                                                                Push the new bulb straight into
                                                                                the socket until it bottoms.

                                                                             6. Insert the socket back into the
                                        HOLD-DOWN WIRE      CONNECTOR           headlight assembly. Make sure
                                                                                the bulb is installed correctly by
1. Open the hood. To change a bulb      2. Remove the electrical connector      looking through the headlight lens.
   on the driver’s side, undo the          from the bulb by pulling the         Pivot the hold-down wire back in
   three fasteners and remove the air      connector straight back.             place, and clip the end into the slot.
   intake cover.
                                        3. Remove the rubber weather seal    7. Install the rubber weather seal
                                           by pulling on the tab.               over the back of the headlight
                                                                                assembly. Make sure it is right
                                                                                side up; it is marked with an arrow.




292
                                                                                                              Lights

8. Push the electrical connector onto    Replacing the Turn Signal Light         3. Pull the bulb straight out of its
   the socket. Make sure it is           Bulb                                       socket. Push the new bulb straight
   connected securely.                                                              into the socket until it bottoms.
                                          BULB
9. Turn on the headlights to test the                                            4. Insert the socket back into the
   new bulb.                                                                        headlight assembly. Turn it
                                                                                    clockwise to lock it in place.
10.On the driver’s side, reinstall the
   air intake cover. Reinstall the                                               5. Turn on the lights to test the new
   three fasteners and secure them                                                  bulb.
   by pushing on the heads until they
   lock.

                                            SOCKET




                                                                                                                            Maintenance
                                         1. Open the hood.

                                         2. Remove the socket from the
                                            headlight assembly by turning it
                                            one-quarter turn counterclockwise.




                                                                                                                      293
Lights

Replacing a Front Side Marker/                 HOLDING CLIPS
Front Parking Light Bulb
1. To change the bulb on the driver’s
   side, start the engine, turn the
   steering wheel all the way to the
   right, and turn off the engine. To
   change the bulb on the passenger’s
   side, turn the steering wheel to the
   left.




                                          2. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to     5. Pull the bulb straight out of its
                                             remove the two holding clips from       socket. Push the new bulb straight
                                             the inner fender.                       into the socket until it bottoms.

                                          3. Pull the inner fender cover away
                                             from the fender and bumper.

                                          4. Remove the socket from the
                                             headlight assembly by turning it
                                             one-quarter turn counterclockwise.




294
                                                                                                                   Lights

6. Insert the socket back into the        Replacing Rear Bulbs
   headlight assembly. Turn it            (In Fenders)
   clockwise to lock it in place.

7. Turn on the lights to test the new
   bulb.

8. Put the inner fender cover in place.
   Install and lock each holding clip
   by pushing on the center.



                                                    COVER




                                                                                                                              Maintenance
                                          1. Open the trunk.                         4. Push a new bulb straight into the
                                                                                        socket until it bottoms, and
                                          2. Remove the light assembly cover            reinstall the socket into the light
                                             by pulling its outside edge.               assembly by turning it clockwise
                                                                                        until it locks.
                                          3. Remove the socket by turning it
                                             one-quarter turn counterclockwise,      5. Test the new bulb to make sure it
                                             and pull the bulb straight out of its      works.
                                             socket.
                                                                                     6. Reinstall the light assembly cover.


                                                                                                                        295
Lights

Replacing Rear Bulbs                                                               7. Insert the socket back into the
(in Trunk Lid)                                                                        light assembly. Turn it clockwise
                                                                                      to lock it in place.
                                                                    BULBS
                                                                                   8. Turn on the lights to test the new
                                                                                      bulb.

                                                                                   9. Reinstall the trunk lid trim. Make
                                                                                      sure it is installed under the edge
                                                                                      of the trunk lid seal.

                                                                                   10.Press the trim clips back into their
                                                                                      holes.
                TRIM CLIPS                 SOCKETS

1. Open the trunk.                        4. Determine which of the two bulbs
                                             is burned out: taillight or back-up
2. To replace a bulb on the right side,      light.
   remove the trim clip. For the left
   side, remove the two trim clips.       5. Remove the socket by turning it
                                             one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
3. Pull the lining back carefully.
                                          6. Pull the bulb straight out of its
                                             socket. Push the new bulb straight
                                             into the socket until it bottoms.


296
                                                                                                                 Lights

Replacing a High-mount Brake                Side Turn Signal Light                Replacing a Front Fog Light Bulb
Light Bulb                                  Each outside mirror has side turn     Your vehicle uses halogen light
                                            signal lights. The lights should be   bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
                                            replaced by your dealer.              it by its plastic case, and protect the
                                                                                  glass from contact with your skin or
                                            Rear License Plate Bulb               hard objects. If you touch the glass,
                                            The license plate has two lights      clean it with denatured alcohol and a
                                            above it. The bulbs should be         clean cloth.
                                            replaced by your dealer.


                                                                                  Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil,
                                                                                  perspiration, or a scratch on the glass
                                                                                  can cause the bulb to overheat and




                                                                                                                              Maintenance
                                                                                  shatter.
1. Open the trunk, and remove the
   socket from the light assembly by
   turning it one-quarter turn counter-
   clockwise.

2. Remove the burned-out bulb by
   pulling it straight out of the socket.

3. Install the new bulb and reinstall
   the socket. Make sure the new
   bulb is working.                                                                                          CONTINUED


                                                                                                                     297
Lights

                                                                              5. Install the new bulb into the hole
                                                                                 and turn it one-quarter turn
                                                                                 clockwise to lock it in place.

                                                                              6. Push the electrical connector back
                                                                                 onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
                                                                                 all the way.

                                                                              7. Turn on the fog lights to test the
                                                                                 new bulb.
                                                                BULB
 UNDERCOVER         FIXING BOLT                   TAB                         8. Put the undercover in place.
                                                                                 Reinstall the fixing bolt and
1. Remove the undercover fixing bolt   3. Remove the electrical connector        tighten it securely.
   located under the front bumper.        from the bulb by pushing on the
                                          tab and pulling the connector
2. Push up the undercover.                down.

                                       4. Remove the bulb from the fog
                                          light assembly by turning it one-
                                          quarter turn counterclockwise.




298
                                                                                            Seat Belts, Floor Mats

Seat Belts                                 Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat   Floor Mats
                                           belt anchors can cause the belts to
                             LOOP
                                           retract slowly. Wipe the insides of       Driver’s floor
                                           the loops with a clean cloth
                                           dampened in mild soap and warm
                                           water or isopropyl alcohol.




                                                                                                                           Maintenance
If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft                                            The floor mats that came with your
brush with a mixture of mild soap                                                   vehicle hook over floor mat anchors.
and warm water to clean them. Do                                                    This keeps the floor mats from
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning                                                    sliding forward/rearward and
solvents. Let the belts air dry before                                              possibly interfering with the pedals
you use the vehicle.                                                                or making the front passenger’s
                                                                                    weight sensor’s ineffective.




                                                                                                             CONTINUED


                                                                                                                    299
Floor Mats, Dust and Pollen Filter

                                         If you remove a floor mat, make sure     Dust and Pollen Filter
                                         to re-anchor it when you put it back     This filter removes the dust and
 Rear passenger’s floor                  in your vehicle.                         pollen that is brought in from the
                                                                                  outside through the climate control
                                         If you use a non-Acura floor mat,        system.
                                         make sure it fits properly and that it
                                         can be used with the floor mat           Have your dealer replace the filter
                                         anchor. Do not put additional floor      when this service is indicated by a
                                         mats on top of the anchored mat.         maintenance message in the multi-
                                                                                  information display. It should be
                                                                                  replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
                                                                                  km) if you drive primarily in urban
                                                                                  areas that have high concentrations
                                                                                  of soot in the air, or if the flow from
Make sure the rear floor mats are                                                 the heating and cooling system
properly hooked to the floor mat                                                  becomes less than usual.
anchors. Your vehicle is equipped
with front passenger’s seat weight
sensors. If the rear passenger’s floor
mat is on the seat rail of the front
passenger’s seat, the sensors will
detect the decreased weight on the
seat, and they may not work properly.




300
                                                                                                     Wiper Blades

Check the condition of the wiper                                                        BLADE ASSEMBLY
blades at least every six months.              WIPER BLADES
Look for signs of cracking in the
rubber, or areas that are getting
hard. Replace the blades if you find
these signs, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.



                                                                                    TAB


                                        To replace a wiper blade:                  2. Disconnect the blade assembly




                                                                                                                          Maintenance
                                                                                      from the wiper arm:
                                        1. Raise each wiper arm off the                 Press and hold the lock tab.
                                           windshield, lifting the driver’s side        Slide the blade assembly toward
                                           first, then the passenger’s side.            the lock tab until it releases
                                                                                        from the wiper arm.

                                                                                     When replacing a wiper blade,
                                        Do not open the hood when the wiper          make sure not to drop the wiper
                                        arms are raised, or you will damage the      blade or wiper arm down on the
                                        hood and wiper arms.                         windshield.

                                                                                                            CONTINUED


                                                                                                                   301
Wiper Blades

                                                                                   5. Install the new blade onto the
                                                                  BLADE               blade assembly:
                                                                                        Pull back either end of the blade
                                                                                        assembly.
                                                                                        Place the side of the blade not
                                                                                        labeled ‘‘LOCK’’ on the end of
                                                                                        the blade assembly, and slide
                                                                                        the blade onto the assembly
                                                                                        until it is fully installed.

                                                                                   6. Slide the wiper blade assembly
 WIPER BLADE                               REINFORCEMENT                              onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
                                                                                      locks in place.
3. Remove the blade from the blade        4. Examine the new wiper blades. If
   assembly:                                 they have no plastic or metal         7. Make sure the blade is completely
     Find the side of the blade              reinforcement along the back             installed and that its edge is not
     labeled ‘‘LOCK.’’ This is the side      edge, remove the metal                   bunched up.
     you pull out.                           reinforcement strips from the old
     Pull back the end of the blade          wiper blade, and install them in      8. Lower the wiper arm down against
     assembly on the ‘‘LOCK’’ side of        the slots along the edge of the new      the windshield, the passenger’s
     the blade. Then grab the end of         blade.                                   side first, then the driver’s side.
     the blade, and slide it out.




302
                                                                                                              Tires

To safely operate your vehicle, your    Inflation Guidelines                   Use a gauge to measure the air
tires must be the proper type and       Keeping the tires properly inflated    pressure in each tire at least once a
size, in good condition with adequate   provides the best combination of       month. Even tires that are in good
tread, and correctly inflated.          handling, tread life, and riding       condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
                                        comfort.                               20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per
The following pages give more                                                  month. Remember to check the
detailed information on how to take       Underinflated tires wear unevenly,   spare tire at the same time.
care of your tires and what to do         adversely affect handling and fuel
when they need to be replaced.            economy, and are more likely to      Check the air pressures when the
                                          fail from being overheated.          tires are cold. This means the
                                                                               vehicle has been parked for at least 3
                                          Overinflated tires can make your     hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
  Using tires that are excessively        vehicle ride more harshly, are       km). Add or release air, if needed, to
  worn or improperly inflated can         more prone to damage from road       match the recommended cold tire




                                                                                                                        Maintenance
  cause a crash in which you can          hazards, and wear unevenly.          pressures on the next page.
  be seriously hurt or killed.
                                        We recommend that you visually
  Follow all instructions in this       check your tires every day. If you
  owner’s manual regarding tire         think a tire might be low, check it
  inflation and maintenance.            immediately with a tire gauge.




                                                                                                          CONTINUED


                                                                                                                 303
Tires

If you check air pressures when the        Recommended Tire Pressures              The compact spare tire pressure is:
tires are hot (driven for several          The following chart shows the           60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
miles), you will see readings 4 to 6       recommended cold tire pressures for
psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4 kgf/cm )     most normal driving conditions.         For convenience, the recommended
higher than the cold readings. This                                                tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
is normal. Do not let air out to match         Tire Size     Cold Tire Pressure    on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
the recommended cold air pressure.                           for Normal Driving
The tire will be underinflated.             P215/50R17 93V   Front:                For additional information about
                                                               32 psi (220 kPa ,   your tires, see page 340 .
You should use your own tire                                   2.2 kgf/cm )
pressure gauge and use it whenever                           Rear:
you check your tire pressures. This                            30 psi (210 kPa ,
will make it easier for you to tell if a                       2.1 kgf/cm )
pressure loss is due to a tire problem
and not due to a variation between
gauges.

While tubeless tires have some
ability to self-seal if they are
punctured, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.




304
                                                                                                                  Tires

Tire Inspection                                                                   Tire Maintenance
                                              INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
Every time you check inflation, you                                               In addition to proper inflation,
should also examine the tires for                                                 correct wheel alignment helps to
damage, foreign objects, and wear.                                                decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
                                                                                  is worn unevenly, have your dealer
You should look for:                                                              check the wheel alignment.

  Bumps or bulges in the tread or                                                 Have your dealer check the tires if
  side of the tire. Replace the tire if                                           you feel a consistent vibration while
  you find either of these conditions.                                            driving. A tire should always be
                                                                                  rebalanced if it is removed from the
  Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side      TREAD WEAR INDICATORS                  wheel. When you have new tires
  of the tire. Replace the tire if you                                            installed, make sure they are
  can see fabric or cord.                 Your tires have wear indicators         balanced. This increases riding




                                                                                                                             Maintenance
                                          molded into the tread. When the         comfort and tire life. For best results,
  Excessive tread wear.                   tread wears down, you will see a        have the installer perform a dynamic
                                          band 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide across     balance.
                                          the tread. This shows there is less
                                          than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left
                                          on the tire.
                                                                                  Improper wheel weights can damage
                                          A tire this worn gives very little      your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use
                                          traction on wet roads. You should       only genuine Acura wheels weights f or
                                          replace the tire if you can see three   balancing.
                                          or more tread wear indicators.


                                                                                                                     305
Tires

Tire Rotation                             Move the tires to the positions            Replacing Tires and Wheels
                                          shown in the illustration each time        Replace your tires with radial tires of
                Front                     they are rotated. If you purchase          the same size, load range, speed
                                          directional tires, rotate only front-to-   rating, and maximum cold tire
                                          back.                                      pressure rating (as shown on the
                                                                                     tire’s sidewall).

                                                                                     Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
                                                                                     your vehicle can reduce braking
                                                                                     ability, traction, and steering
                                                                                     accuracy. Using tires of a different
                                                                                     size or construction can cause the
 (For non-directional (For directional
 tires and wheels)    tires and wheels)                                              ABS and vehicle stability assist
                                                                                     system (VSA) to work inconsistently.
To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, rotate                                                  It is best to replace all four tires at
the tires according to the                                                           the same time. If that is not possible
maintenance messages displayed in                                                    or necessary, replace the two front
the multi-information display. Move                                                  tires or two rear tires as a pair.
the tires to the positions shown in                                                  Replacing just one tire can seriously
the chart each time they are rotated.                                                affect your vehicle’s handling.
If you purchase directional tires,
rotate only front-to-back.




306
                                                                                                          Tires

If you ever replace a wheel, make      Wheel and Tire Specifications       Winter Driving
sure that the wheel’s specifications   Wheel:                              Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘All
match those of the original wheels.     17 x 7 JJ                          Season’’ on the sidewall have an all-
Replacement wheels are available at                                        weather tread design suitable for
your dealer.                           Tire:                               most winter driving conditions.
                                         P215/50R17 93V
                                                                           For the best performance in snowy
                                       See page 341 for DOT tire quality   or icy conditions, you should install
  Installing improper tires on your    grading information, and page       snow tires or tire chains. They may
  vehicle can affect handling and      340 for tire size information.      be required by local laws under
  stability. This can cause a crash                                        certain conditions.
  in which you can be seriously
  hurt or killed.                                                          Snow Tires
                                                                           If you mount snow tires on your




                                                                                                                    Maintenance
  Always use the size and type of                                          vehicle, make sure they are radial
  tires recommended in this                                                tires of the same size and load range
  owner’s manual.                                                          as the original tires. Mount snow
                                                                           tires on all four wheels. The traction
                                                                           provided by snow tires on dry roads
                                                                           may be lower than your original tires.
                                                                           Check with the tire dealer for
                                                                           maximum speed recommendations.




                                                                                                             307
Tires

Tire Chains                             When installing cables, follow the
Mount tire chains on your tires when    manufacturer’s instructions, and
required by driving conditions or       mount them as tight as you can.        Using the wrong chains, or not
local laws. Install them only on the    Make sure they are not contacting      properly installing chains, can
front tires.                            the brake lines or suspension. Drive   damage the brake lines and
                                        slowly with them installed. If you     cause a crash in which you can
Because your vehicle has limited tire   hear them coming into contact with     be seriously injured or killed.
clearance, Acura strongly               the body or chassis, stop and
recommends using the chains listed      investigate. Remove them as soon as    Follow all instructions in this
below, made by Security Chain           you begin driving on cleared roads.    owner’s manual regarding the
Company (SCC).                                                                 selection and use of tire chains.

CH2412T




308
                                                                                      Checking the Battery

          TEST INDICATOR WINDOW         Check the terminals for corrosion (a
                                        white or yellowish powder). To
                                        remove it, cover the terminals with a   The battery gives off explosive
                                        solution of baking soda and water. It   hydrogen gas during normal
                                        will bubble up and turn brown. When     operation.
                                        this stops, wash it off with plain
                                        water. Dry off the battery with a       A spark or flame can cause the
                                        cloth or paper towel. Coat the          battery to explode with enough
                                        terminals with grease to help prevent   force to kill or seriously hurt you.
                                        future corrosion.
                                                                                Wear protective clothing and a
                                        If additional battery maintenance is    face shield, or have a skilled
                                        needed, see your dealer or a            mechanic do the battery
Check the condition of the battery      qualified mechanic.                     maintenance.




                                                                                                                       Maintenance
monthly by looking at the test
indicator window. The label on the      WARNING: Battery posts,
battery explains the test indicator’s   terminals, and related accessories
colors.                                 contain lead and lead compounds.
                                        Wash your hands after handling.

                                        If you need to connect the battery to
                                        a charger, disconnect both cables to
                                        prevent damaging your vehicle’s
                                        electrical system. Always disconnect
                                        the negative ( ) cable first, and
                                        reconnect it last.

                                                                                                                 309
Vehicle Storage

If you need to park your vehicle for    Block the rear wheels.                 Leave the parking brake off. Put
an extended period (more than 1                                                the transmission in reverse
month), there are several things you    If the vehicle is to be stored for a   (manual) or Park (automatic).
should do to prepare it for storage.    longer period, it should be
Proper preparation helps prevent        supported on jackstands so the         Cover the vehicle with a
deterioration and makes it easier to    tires are off the ground.              ‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
get your vehicle back on the road. If                                          from a porous material such as
possible, store your vehicle indoors.   Leave one window open slightly (if     cotton. Non-porous materials, such
                                        the vehicle is being stored            as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
  Fill the fuel tank.                   indoors).                              which can damage the paint.

  Change the engine oil and filter.     Disconnect the battery.                If possible, periodically run the
                                                                               engine until it reaches full
  Wash and dry the exterior             Support the front wiper blade          operating temperature (the
  completely.                           arms with a folded towel or rag so     cooling fan cycles twice).
                                        they do not touch the windshield.      Preferably, do this once a month.
  Clean the interior. Make sure the
  carpeting, floor mats, etc., are      To minimize sticking, apply a
  completely dry.                       silicone spray lubricant to all door
                                        and trunk seals. Also, apply a
                                        vehicle body wax to the painted
                                        surfaces that mate with the door
                                        and trunk seals.




310
                                     Taking Care of the Unexpected

This section covers the more              Compact Spare Tire....................... 312
common problems that motorists            Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 313
experience with their vehicles. It        If Your Engine Won’t Start ........... 317
gives you information about how to           Nothing Happens or the
safely evaluate the problem and what          Starter Motor Operates
to do to correct it. If the problem has        Very Slowly............................. 317
stranded you on the side of the road,        The Starter Operates
you may be able to get going again.            Normally ................................. 318
If not, you will also find instructions   Jump Starting ................................. 319
on getting your vehicle towed.            If Your Engine Overheats............. 321
                                          Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 323
                                          Charging System Indicator........... 324
                                          Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 324
                                             Readiness Codes ........................ 325
                                          Brake System Indicator ................ 326
                                          Closing the Moonroof ................... 327




                                                                                                      Taking Care of the Unexpected
                                          Emergency Towing ....................... 328
                                          Fuses ............................................... 330
                                             Checking and Replacing
                                               Fuses ....................................... 330




                                                                                            311
Compact Spare Tire

Use the compact spare tire as a           Do not mount snow chains on the        INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
temporary replacement only. Get           compact spare tire.
your regular tire repaired or replaced,
and put it back on your vehicle as        Do not use the compact spare tire
soon as you can.                          if you are towing a trailer.

Check the inflation pressure of the       Do not use your compact spare
compact spare tire every time you         tire on another vehicle unless it is
check the other tires. It should be       the same make and model.
inflated to:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )            Turn off the VSA system (see
                                          page 256 ). Driving with the                  TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
Follow these precautions:                 compact spare tire may activate
                                          the VSA system.                        Replace the tire when you can see
  Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).                                                 the tread wear indicator bars. The
                                          On models with manual                  replacement should be the same size
  This tire gives a harsher ride and      transmission, do not drive for a       and design tire, mounted on the
  less traction on some road sur-         long period with the compact           same wheel. The spare tire is not
  faces. Use greater caution while        spare tire mounted on a front          designed to be mounted on a regular
  driving.                                wheel; it will damage the limited      wheel, and the spare wheel is not
                                          slip differential.                     designed for mounting a regular tire.




312
                                                                                            Changing a Flat Tire

If you have a flat tire while driving,            TRUNK FLOOR                     2. Turn on the hazard warning lights,
stop in a safe place to change it.                                                   and turn the ignition switch to the
Drive slowly along the shoulder until                                                LOCK (0) position. Have all
you get to an exit or an area that is                                                passengers get out of the vehicle
far away from the traffic lanes.                                                     while you change the tire.



  The vehicle can easily roll off
  the jack, seriously injuring
  anyone underneath.
                                         JACK          TOOL TRAY        TOOLS
  Follow the directions for
  changing a tire exactly, and           1. Park the vehicle on firm, level and
  never get under the vehicle               non-slippery ground. Put the
  when it is supported only by the          transmission in Park (automatic)




                                                                                                                           Taking Care of the Unexpected
  jack.                                     or reverse (manual). Apply the
                                            parking brake.




                                                                                                            CONTINUED


                                                                                                                   313
Changing a Flat Tire

                                                                                            EXTENSION




                          TOOL TRAY                              JACKING POINT                        WHEEL NUT WRENCH

3. Open the trunk. Raise the trunk         7. Place the jack under the jacking      8. Use the extension and the wheel
   floor by lifting up on the back edge.      point nearest the tire you need to       nut wrench as shown to raise the
                                              change. Turn the end bracket             vehicle until the flat tire is off the
4. Take the tool tray out of the trunk,       clockwise until the top of the jack      ground.
   and remove the tools and the jack.         contacts the jacking point. Make
                                              sure the jacking point tab is         9. Remove the wheel nuts and flat
5. Unscrew the wing bolt and take             resting in the jack notch.               tire. Handle the wheel nuts
   the spare tire out of the trunk.                                                    carefully; they may be hot from
                                                                                       driving. Place the flat tire on the
6. Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn                                                      ground with the outside surface of
   with the wheel nut wrench.                                                          the wheel facing up.



314
                                                                                        Changing a Flat Tire

                                       11.Put on the spare tire. Put the
                                          wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
                                          then tighten them in a crisscross
                                          pattern with the wheel nut wrench
                                          until the wheel is firmly against
                                          the hub. Do not try to tighten
                                          them fully.

                                       12.Lower the vehicle to the ground,
                                          and remove the jack.

   BRAKE HUB

10.Before mounting the spare tire,                                            13.Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
   wipe any dirt off the mounting                                                the same crisscross pattern. Have
   surface of the wheel and hub with                                             the wheel nut torque checked at




                                                                                                                      Taking Care of the Unexpected
   a clean cloth. Wipe the hub                                                   the nearest automotive service
   carefully; it may be hot from                                                 facility.
   driving.                                                                      Tighten the wheel nuts to:
                                                                                 80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)




                                                                                                       CONTINUED


                                                                                                               315
Changing a Flat Tire

                                          17.Secure the flat tire by screwing       19.Store the wheel cover or center
  WING BOLT
                                             the wing bolt back into its hole.         cap in the trunk. Make sure it does
                                                                                       not get scratched or damaged.
                                          18.Store the jack and tools in the tool      Lower the trunk floor, then close
                                             tray, and place the tool tray back        the trunk lid.
                                             in the trunk.
                        For   For
                        spare normal
                        tire  tire

                                             Loose items can fly around the
                                             interior in a crash and could
                     SPACER CONE
                                             seriously injure the occupants.

14.Remove the center cap before              Store the wheel, jack, and tools
   storing the flat tire in the trunk        securely before driving.
   well.

15.Place the flat tire face down in the
   spare tire well.

16.Remove the spacer cone from the
   wing bolt, turn it over, and put it
   back on the bolt.




316
                                                                                    If the Engine Won’t Start

Diagnosing why the engine won’t         Nothing Happens or the Starter           Turn the ignition switch to the
start falls into two areas, depending   Motor Operates Very Slowly               START (III) position. If the
on what you hear when you turn the      When you turn the ignition switch to     headlights do not dim, check the
ignition switch to the START (III)      the START (III) position, you do not     condition of the fuses. If the fuses
position:                               hear the normal noise of the engine      are OK, there is probably something
  You hear nothing, or almost           trying to start. You may hear a          wrong with the electrical circuit for
  nothing. The engine’s starter         clicking sound or series of clicks, or   the ignition switch or starter motor.
  motor does not operate at all, or     nothing at all.                          You will need a qualified technician
  operates very slowly.                 Check these things:                      to determine the problem (see
                                                                                 Emergency Towing on page 328 ).
  You can hear the starter motor          Check the transmission interlock.
  operating normally, or the starter      If you have a manual transmission,     If the headlights dim noticeably or
  motor sounds like it is spinning        the clutch pedal must be pushed        go out when you try to start the
  faster than normal, but the engine      all the way to the floor or the        engine, either the battery is dis-
  does not start up and run.              starter will not operate. With an      charged or the connections are
                                          automatic transmission, it must be     corroded. Check the condition of the




                                                                                                                         Taking Care of the Unexpected
                                          in Park or neutral.                    battery connections (see page 309 ).
                                                                                 You can then try jump starting the
                                          Turn the ignition switch to the ON     vehicle from a booster battery (see
                                          (II) position. Turn on the             page 319 ).
                                          headlights, and check their
                                          brightness. If the headlights are
                                          very dim or do not come on at all,
                                          the battery is discharged. See
                                          Jump Starting on page 319 .


                                                                                                                  317
If the Engine Won’t Start

The Starter Operates Normally              Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
In this case, the starter motor’s          gauge; the low fuel indicator may
speed sounds normal, or even faster        not be working.
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)         There may be an electrical
position, but the engine does not run.     problem, such as no power to the
                                           fuel pump. Check all the fuses
  Are you using a properly coded           (see page 330 ).
  key? An improperly coded key will
  cause the immobilizer system           If you find nothing wrong, you will
  indicator in the instrument panel      need a qualified technician to find
  to blink rapidly (see page 126 ).      the problem. See Emergency
                                         Towing on page 328 .
  Are you using the proper starting
  procedure? Refer to Starting the
  Engine on page 241 .




318
                                                                                                  Jump Starting

Although this seems like a simple     To jump start your vehicle:
procedure, you should take several
precautions.                          1. Open the hood, and check the
                                         physical condition of the battery.
                                         In very cold weather, check the
                                         condition of the electrolyte. If it
  A battery can explode if you do        seems slushy or frozen, do not try
  not follow the correct procedure,      jump starting until it thaws.
  seriously injuring anyone
  nearby.
                                                                                 BOOSTER
  Keep all sparks, open flames,       If a battery sits in extreme cold, the     BATTERY
  and smoking materials away          electrolyte inside can f reeze.
  from the battery.                   Attempting to jump start with a f rozen   The numbers in the illustration show
                                      battery can cause it to rupture.          the order to connect the jumper
                                                                                cable.




                                                                                                                       Taking Care of the Unexpected
You cannot start your vehicle by      2. Turn off all the electrical
pushing or pulling it.                   accessories: climate control, audio    3. Connect one jumper cable to the
                                         system, lights, etc. Put the              positive ( ) terminal on your
                                         transmission in neutral (M/T) or          battery. Connect the other end to
                                         Park (A/T), and set the parking           the positive ( ) terminal on the
                                         brake.                                    booster battery.



                                                                                                         CONTINUED


                                                                                                                 319
Jump Starting

                                       5. If the booster battery is in another      7. Once your vehicle is running,
                                          vehicle, have an assistant start             disconnect the negative cable from
                                          that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.      your vehicle, then from the
                                                                                       booster battery. Disconnect the
                                       6. Start the vehicle. If the starter            positive cable from your vehicle,
                                          motor still operates slowly, check           then from the booster battery.
                                          that the jumper cables have good
                                          metal-to-metal contact.                     Keep the ends of the jumper
                                                                                      cables away from each other and
                                                                                      any metal on the vehicle until
                                                                                      everything is disconnected.
                                                                                      Otherwise, you may cause an
                                                                                      electrical short.
4. Connect the second jumper cable
   to the negative ( ) terminal on
   the booster battery. Connect the
   other end to the grounding strap
   as shown. Do not connect this
   jumper cable to any other part of
   the engine.




320
                                                                                       If the Engine Overheats

The reading of the vehicle’s                                                      3. If you do not see steam or spray,
temperature gauge should stay in                                                     leave the engine running, and
the midrange. If it climbs to the red     Steam and spray from an                    watch the temperature gauge. If
mark, you should determine the            overheated engine can                      the high heat is due to overloading,
reason (hot day, driving up a steep       seriously scald you.                       the engine should start to cool
hill, etc.).                                                                         down almost immediately. If it
                                          Do not open the hood if steam              does, wait until the temperature
If your vehicle overheats, you should     is coming out.                             gauge reading comes down to the
take immediate action. The only                                                      midpoint, then continue driving.
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red      1. Safely pull to the side of the road.   4. If the temperature gauge stays at
mark. Or you may see steam or              Put the transmission in neutral           the red mark, turn off the engine.
spray coming from under the hood.          (M/T) or Park (A/T), and set the
                                           parking brake. Turn off all            5. Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
                                           accessories, and turn on the              such as a split radiator hose.
                                           hazard warning indicators.                Everything is still extremely hot,




                                                                                                                              Taking Care of the Unexpected
Driving with the temperature gauge                                                   so use caution. If you find a leak, it
pointer at the red mark can cause       2. If you see steam and/or spray             must be repaired before you
serious damage to the engine.              coming from under the hood, turn          continue driving (see Emergency
                                           off the engine. Wait until you see        Towing on page 328 ).
                                           no more signs of steam or spray,
                                           then open the hood.



                                                                                                              CONTINUED


                                                                                                                      321
If the Engine Overheats

6. If you do not find an obvious leak,   8. Using gloves or a large heavy           10.Put the radiator cap back on
   check the coolant level in the           cloth, turn the radiator cap               tightly. Run the engine, and watch
   radiator reserve tank. Add coolant       counterclockwise, without pushing          the temperature gauge. If it goes
   if the level is below the MIN mark.      down, to the first stop. After the         back to the red mark, the engine
                                            pressure releases, push down on            needs repair (see Emergency
7. If there was no coolant in the           the cap, and turn it until it comes        Towing on page 328 ).
   reserve tank, you may need to add        off.
   coolant to the radiator. Let the                                                 11.If the temperature stays normal,
   engine cool down until the reading    9. Start the engine, and set the              check the coolant level in the
   reaches the middle of the                temperature to maximum heat                radiator reserve tank. If it has
   temperature gauge or lower               (climate control to AUTO at                gone down, add coolant to the
   before checking the radiator.            ‘‘        ’’). Add coolant to the          MAX mark. Put the cap back on
                                            radiator up to the base of the filler      tightly.
                                            neck. If you do not have the
                                            proper coolant mixture available,
  Removing the radiator cap                 you can add plain water.
  while the engine is hot can               Remember to have the cooling
  cause the coolant to spray out,           system drained and refilled with
  seriously scalding you.                   the proper mixture as soon as you
                                            can.
  Always let the engine and
  radiator cool down before
  removing the radiator cap.




322
                                                                                       Low Oil Pressure Indicator

           This indicator should never      1. Safely pull off the road, and shut
           come on when the engine is          off the engine. Turn on the hazard
running. If it starts flashing or stays        warning indicators.
on, or if you see a ‘‘CHECK ENGINE
OIL LEVEL’’ message in the multi-           2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
information display, the oil pressure          Open the hood, and check the oil
has dropped very low or lost                   level (see page 232 ). An engine
pressure. Serious engine damage is             very low on oil can lose pressure
possible, and you should take                  during cornering and other driving
immediate action.                              maneuvers.

                                            3. If necessary, add oil to bring the
                                               level back to the full mark on the
Running the engine with low oil                dipstick (see page 278 ).
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn of f        4. Start the engine and watch the oil




                                                                                                                    Taking Care of the Unexpected
the engine as soon as you can saf ely get      pressure indicator. If it does not go
the vehicle stopped.                           out within 10 seconds, turn off the
                                               engine. There is a mechanical
                                               problem that needs to be repaired
                                               before you can continue driving
                                               (see Emergency Towing on page
                                                328 ).




                                                                                                              323
Charging System Indicator, Malfunction Indicator Lamp

          Charging System                           Malfunction Indicator       If you have recently refueled your
          Indicator                                 Lamp                        vehicle, the cause of this indicator
If the charging system indicator         If this indicator comes on while       coming on could be a loose or
comes on brightly when the engine        driving, or if you see a ‘‘CHECK       missing fuel fill cap. Check the cap
is running, or if you see a ‘‘CHECK      EMISSION SYSTEM’’ message in           or replace it. Tightening the cap will
CHARGING SYSTEM’’ message in             the multi-information display, it      not make the indicator turn off
the multi-information display, the       means one of the engine’s emissions    immediately; it takes several days of
battery is not being charged.            control systems may have a problem.    normal driving.
                                         Even though you may feel no
Immediately turn off all electrical      difference in your vehicle’s           If the indicator remains on or the
accessories. Try not to use other        performance, it can reduce your fuel   fuel cap was not loose or missing,
electrically operated controls such as   economy and cause increased            have the vehicle checked by the
the power windows. Keep the engine       emissions. Continued operation may     dealer as soon as possible.
running; starting the engine will        cause serious damage.
discharge the battery rapidly.
Go to a service station or garage
where you can get technical
assistance.




324
                                                                                 Malfunction Indicator Lamp

                                         Readiness Codes                         To check if they are set, turn the
                                         Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness    ignition switch to the ON (II)
If you keep driving with the             codes’’ that are part of the on-board   position, without starting the engine.
Malf unction Indicator Lamp on, you      diagnostics for the emissions           The malfunction indicator lamp will
can damage your vehicle’s emissions      systems. In some states, part of the    come on for 20 seconds. If it then
controls and engine. Those repairs may   emissions testing is to make sure       goes off, the readiness codes are set.
not be covered by your vehicle’s         these codes are set. If they are not    If it blinks five times, the readiness
warranties. This indicator may also      set, the test cannot be completed.      codes are not set. If possible, do not
come on with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.                                                take your vehicle for a state
                                         If your vehicle’s battery has been      emissions test until the readiness
                                         disconnected or gone dead, these        codes are set. Refer to State
                                         codes are erased. It takes at least     Emissions Testing for more
                                         three days of driving under various     information (see page 347 ).
                                         conditions to set the codes again.




                                                                                                                          Taking Care of the Unexpected
                                                                                                                   325
Brake System Indicator
  U.S.    Canada
                                          However, if the brake pedal does not    Slow down by shifting to a lower
                                          feel normal, you should take            gear, and pull to the side of the road
If the brake system indicator comes       immediate action. A problem in one      when it is safe. Because of the long
on while driving, the brake fluid level   part of the system’s dual circuit       distance needed to stop, it is
is probably low. You will see a           design will still give you braking at   hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
‘‘BRAKE FLUID LOW’’ message in            two wheels. You will feel the brake     should have it towed and repaired as
the multi-information display. Press      pedal go down much farther before       soon as possible (see Emergency
lightly on the brake pedal to see if it   the vehicle begins to slow down, and    Towing on page 328 ).
feels normal. If it does, check the       you will have to press harder on the
brake fluid level the next time you       pedal.                                  If you must drive the vehicle a short
stop at a service station (see page                                               distance in this condition, drive
  288 ).                                  You will also see a ‘‘CHECK BRAKE       slowly and carefully.
                                          SYSTEM’’ message in the multi-
                                          information display when this           If the ABS indicator comes on with
                                          indicator comes on.                     this indicator, have the vehicle
                                                                                  inspected by your dealer
                                                                                  immediately.




326
                                                                                         Closing the Moonroof

If the electric motor will not close                            ROUND PLUG                         SOCKET
the moonroof, do the following:

1. Check the fuse for the moonroof
   motor (see page 334 ). If the fuse
   is blown, replace it with one of the
   same or lower rating.

2. Try closing the moonroof. If the
   new fuse blows immediately or the
   moonroof motor still does not
   operate, you can close the                                                      MOONROOF WRENCH
   moonroof manually.
                                          4. Use a screwdriver or coin to        If you need to close the moonroof
3. Get the moonroof wrench out of            remove the round plug in the        manually, it means the moonroof
   the tool kit in the trunk.                center of the headliner.            opening/closing function is




                                                                                                                       Taking Care of the Unexpected
                                                                                 developing a problem. Have your
                                          5. Insert the moonroof wrench into     vehicle checked by your dealer.
                                             the socket behind this plug. Turn
                                             the wrench until the moonroof is
                                             fully closed.

                                          6. Remove the wrench. Reinstall the
                                             round plug.



                                                                                                                 327
Emergency Towing

If your vehicle needs to be towed,      If, due to damage, your vehicle must
call a professional towing service or   be towed with the front wheels on
organization. Never tow your vehicle    the ground, do this:                   Improper towing preparation will
with just a rope or chain. It is very                                          damage the transmission. Follow the
dangerous.                              Manual transmission:                   above procedure exactly. If you cannot
                                          Release the parking brake.           shif t the transmission or start the
There are two ways to tow your            Shift the transmission to neutral.   engine (automatic transmission), your
vehicle:                                  Leave the ignition switch in the     vehicle must be transported with the
                                          ACCESSORY (I) position so the        f ront wheels of f the ground.
Flat-bed Equipment      The operator      steering wheel does not lock.
loads your vehicle on the back of a                                            With the front wheels on the ground,
truck. This is the best way to trans-   Automatic transmission:                it is best to tow the vehicle no farther
port your vehicle.                        Release the parking brake.           than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the
                                          Start the engine.                    speed below 35 mph (55 km/h).
Wheel-lift Equipment      The tow         Shift to D, then to N.
truck uses two pivoting arms that go      Turn off the engine.
under the tires (front) and lift them     Leave the ignition switch in the
off the ground. The other two tires       ACCESSORY (I) position so the
remain on the ground. This is an          steering wheel does not lock.
acceptable way to tow your
vehicle.




328
                                                                                       Emergency Towing



Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by the   The steering system can be damaged if
bumpers will cause serious damage.           the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
The bumpers are not designed to              ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
support the vehicle’s weight.                position, and make sure the steering
                                             wheel turns f reely bef ore you begin
                                             towing.




                                                                                                          Taking Care of the Unexpected
                                                                                                    329
Fuses

 INTERIOR                               UNDER-HOOD                              Checking and Replacing Fuses
                                                                                If something electrical in your
                                                                                vehicle stops working, the first thing
                                                                                you should check for is a blown fuse.
NOTCH                                   TAB                                     Determine from the chart on pages
                                                                                333 and 334 , or the diagram on the
                                                                                fuse box lid, which fuse or fuses
                                                                                control that component. Check those
                                                                                fuses first, but check all the fuses
                                                                                before deciding that a blown fuse is
                                                                                not the cause. Replace any blown
                                                                                fuses and check if the device works.

The interior fuse box is on the        The under-hood fuse box is located       1. Turn the ignition switch to the
driver’s lower left side. To remove    near the back of the engine compart-        LOCK (0) position. Make sure the
the fuse box lid, pull it toward you   ment on the driver’s side. To open it,      headlights and all other
and take it out of its hinges.         push the tabs as shown.                     accessories are off.

                                                                                2. Remove the cover from the fuse
                                                                                   box.




330
                                                                                                              Fuses


                    BLOWN              BLOWN                                                BLOWN




3. Check each of the large fuses in   4. Check the smaller fuses in the       5. Look for a burned wire inside the
   the under-hood fuse box by            under-hood fuse box and all the         fuse. If it is burned out, replace it
   looking at the wire inside.           fuses in the interior fuse box by       with one of the spare fuses of the




                                                                                                                         Taking Care of the Unexpected
   Removing these fuses requires a       pulling out each one with the fuse      same rating or lower.
   Phillips-head screwdriver.            puller provided in the under-hood
                                         fuse box.




                                                                                                          CONTINUED


                                                                                                                   331
Fuses

                                         If you replace the blown fuse with a         If the driver’s power window fuse is
      FUSE PULLER
                                         spare fuse that has a lower rating, it       removed, the AUTO function of the
                                         might blow out again. This does not          driver’s window will be disabled. You
                                         indicate anything wrong. Replace the         should reset the AUTO feature, (see
                                         fuse with one of the correct rating as       page 148 ).
                                         soon as you can.
                                                                                      If the radio fuse is removed, the
                                                                                      audio system will disable itself. The
                                                                                      next time you turn on the radio you
                                         Replacing a f use with one that has a        will see ‘‘CODE’’ in the frequency
                                         higher rating greatly increases the          display. Use the preset buttons to
                                         chances of damaging the electrical           enter the five-digit code (see page
                                         system. If you do not have a                  201 ).
If you cannot drive the vehicle          replacement f use with the proper rating
without fixing the problem, and you      f or the circuit, install one with a lower
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse    rating.
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits with      6. If the replacement fuse of the
the fuse puller provided in the under-      same rating blows in a short time,
hood fuse box. Make sure you can            there is probably a serious
do without that circuit temporarily         electrical problem with your
(such as the accessory power socket         vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in
or radio).                                  that circuit, and have your vehicle
                                            checked by a qualified mechanic.



332
                                                                                                              Fuses

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
                                                                             No. Amps.       Circuits Protected

                                                                             11   20 A    Cooling Fan
                                                                             12           Not Used
                                                                             13    20 A   Horn, Stop
                                                                             14    40 A   Rear Defroster
                                                                             15    40 A   Back Up, ACC
                                                                             16    15 A   Hazard
                                                                             17    30 A   VSA Motor
                                                                             18    40 A   VSA
                                                                             19    40 A   OP 1
                                                                             20    40 A   OP 2
                                                                             21    40 A   Heater Motor
                                                                             22   100 A   Battery
                                                                                          Not Used




                                                                                                                        Taking Care of the Unexpected
No. Amps.         Circuits Protected   No. Amps.        Circuits Protected   23   50 A      B IG1 Main
                                                                                  50 A    Power Window Main
 1    15 A    Left Headlight Low       6     15 A    Right Headlight Low
 2   (30 A)   (Rear Defroster Coil)    7     7.5 A   Back Up
 3    10 A    Left Headlight Hi        8     15 A    FI ECU (ECM/PCM)
 4    15 A    Small Light              9     20 A    Condenser fan
 5    10 A    Right Headlight Hi       10   (20 A)   (FR Fog Light)



                                                                                                       CONTINUED


                                                                                                                  333
Fuses

INTERIOR FUSE BOX
                                                                              No. Amps.           Circuits Protected

                                                                              13    20 A      Passenger’s Power Seat
                                                                                              Reclining
                                                                              14     20 A     Driver’s Power Seat Sliding
                                                                              15    (20 A)    Heated Seat
                                                                              16     20 A     Driver’s Power Seat Reclining
                                                                              17    (20 A)    Passenger’s Power Seat Sliding
                                                                              18     15 A     ACG
                                                                              19     15 A     Fuel Pump
                                                                              20     10 A     Washer
                                                                              21     7.5 A    Meter
                                                                              22     10 A     SRS
                                                                              23     7.5 A    IGP (PGM-FI ECU)
                                                                              24     20 A     Left Rear Power Window
No. Amps.         Circuits Protected   No. Amps.       Circuits Protected     25     20 A     Right Rear Power Window
                                                                              26     20 A     Passenger’s Power Window
 1    (15 A)   DBW                      7   10 A    Back-Up Lights            27     20 A     Driver’s Power Window
 2     15 A    Ignition Coil            8   20 A    Door Lock                 28     20 A     Moonroof
 3    (10 A)   Daytime Running Light    9   15 A    Front Accessory Sockets   29              Not Used
 4     10 A    LAF                     10   7.5 A   OPDS                      30     7.5 A    A/C
 5     20 A    Audio Amp               11   30 A    Wiper                     31              Not Used
 6     10 A    Interior Light          12           Not Used                  32     7.5 A    ACC
                                                                              33              Not Used
                                                                               : On Canadian models


334
                                                                                                         Technical Information

The diagrams in this section give        Identification Numbers ................. 336            State Emissions Testing ............... 347
you the dimensions and capacities of     Specifications ................................. 338
your vehicle, and the locations of the   DOT Tire Quality Grading
identification numbers. It also               (U. S. Vehicles) ...................... 341
includes information you should            Uniform Tire Quality
know about your vehicle’s tires and           Grading ................................... 341
emissions control systems.                 Treadwear .................................. 341
                                           Traction....................................... 341
                                           Temperature .............................. 342
                                         Tire Labeling .................................. 343
                                         Emissions Controls........................ 344
                                           The Clean Air Act ...................... 344
                                           Crankcase Emissions Control
                                              System..................................... 344
                                           Evaporative Emissions Control
                                              System..................................... 344
                                           Onboard Refueling Vapor
                                              Recovery ................................. 344




                                                                                                                                               Technical Information
                                           Exhaust Emissions Controls .... 345
                                              PGM-FI System ..................... 345
                                              Ignition Timing Control
                                                 System................................. 345
                                              Three Way Catalytic
                                                 Converter ............................ 345
                                           Replacement Parts..................... 345
                                         Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 346

                                                                                                                                       335
Identification Numbers

Your vehicle has several identifying
numbers in various places.
                                         VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
see it by looking through the
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.




                                                                  CERTIFICATION LABEL




336
                                                                          Identification Numbers

The engine number is stamped into
the engine block. It is on the front.   ENGINE NUMBER                AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

The transmission number is on a
label on top of the transmission.




                                                                                                       Technical Information
                                        MANUAL TRANSMISSION NUMBER



                                                                                                 337
Specifications

 Dimensions                                                           Capacities
 Length                              183.3 in (4,657 mm)              Engine        Change 1
 Width                               69.4 in (1,762 mm)               coolant         Manual             1.43 US gal (5.4 )
 Height                              57.3 in (1,456 mm)                               Automatic          1.45 US gal (5.5 )
 Wheelbase                           105.1 in (2,670 mm)                            Total
 Track         Front                 59.6 in (1,515 mm)                               Manual             1.96 US gal (7.4 )
               Rear                  59.6 in (1,515 mm)                               Automatic          1.93 US gal (7.3 )
                                                                      Engine oil    Change 2
 Weights                                                                              Including          4.4 US qt (4.2 )
 Gross vehicle weight rating   See the certification label attached                   filter
                               to the driver’s doorjamb.                              Without            4.2 US qt (4.0 )
                                                                                      filter
 Air Conditioning                                                                   Total                5.6 US qt (5.3   )
 Refrigerant type                      HFC-134a (R-134a)              Manual trans- Change               2.1 US qt (2.0   )
 Charge quantity                     25 27 oz (700 750 g)             mission oil   Total                2.3 US qt (2.2   )
 Lubricant type                            ND-OIL8                    Automatic     Change               3.0 US qt (2.8   )
                                                                      transmission Total                 6.9 US qt (6.5   )
 Capacities                                                           fluid
 Fuel tank                     Approx.                                Windshield    U.S. Models          2.6 US qt (2.5 )
                               17.1 US gal (64.7 )                    washer        Canada Models        4.8 US qt (4.5 )
                                                                      reservoir

                                                                       1 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
                                                                           engine
                                                                           Reserve tank capacity: 0.16 US gal (0.6 )
                                                                       2 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine




338
                                                                                                         Specifications

Lights                                                                  Battery
Headlights      High               12 V    55 W                         Capacity               12 V     36 AH/5 HR
                Low                12 V    35 W
Front fog lights                   12 V    55 W                         Fuses
Front turn signal                  12 V    21 W                         Interior             See page 334 or the fuse label
Front parking lights/              12 V    3 CP                                              attached to the inside of the fuse
Side marker lights                                                                           box door on each side of the
Rear turn signal lights            12 V    21 W                                              dashboard.
Stop/Taillights                    12 V    21/5 W                       Under-hood           See page 333 or the fuse box
Taillights                         12 V    5W                                                cover.
High-mount brake light             12 V    21 W
Back-up lights                     12 V    21 W                         Engine
Rear side marker lights            12 V    3 CP                         Type                    Water cooled 4-stroke, DOHC
License plate light                12 V    3 CP                                              i-VTEC 4-cylinder, gasoline engine
Ceiling light                      12 V    8W                           Bore x Stroke           3.43 x 3.90 in (87.0 x 99.0 mm)
Spotlights/Front ceiling lights    12 V    8W                           Displacement                 144 cu-in (2,354 cm )
Trunk light                        12 V    5W                           Compression ratio                    10.5 : 1
Door courtesy lights               12 V    2 CP                         Spark plugs          NGK:        IZFR6K-11
Vanity mirror lights               12 V    1.1 W                                             DENSO: SKJ20DR-M11




                                                                                                                                   Technical Information
: On vehicles with high voltage discharge type headlights,              Alignment
  replacement of a headlight bulb should be performed by your dealer.   Toe-in       Front            0.00 in (0.0 mm)
                                                                                     Rear             0.08 in (2.0 mm)
                                                                        Camber       Front                    0°
                                                                                     Rear                      1°
                                                                        Caster       Front                  3°13’




                                                                                                                   CONTINUED

                                                                                                                             339
Specifications

 Tires
 Size       Front/Rear           P215/50R17 93V
            Spare              T135/80D16 101M
 Pressure   Front        32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
            Rear         30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )
            Spare        60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )




340
                                                             DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

The tires on your vehicle meet all     Treadwear                               Traction AA, A, B, C
U.S. Federal Safety Requirements.      The treadwear grade is a compara-       The traction grades, from highest to
All tires are also graded for          tive rating based on the wear rate of   lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
treadwear, traction, and temperature   the tire when tested under controlled   grades represent the tire’s ability to
performance according to               conditions on a specified government    stop on wet pavement as measured
Department of Transportation           test course. For example, a tire        under controlled conditions on
(DOT) standards. The following         graded 150 would wear one and one-      specified government test surfaces
explains these gradings.               half (1 1/2) times as well on the       of asphalt and concrete. A tire
                                       government course as a tire graded      marked C may have poor traction
Uniform Tire Quality Grading           100. The relative performance of        performance.
Quality grades can be found where      tires depends upon the actual condi-
applicable on the tire sidewall        tions of their use, however, and may    Warning: The traction grade
between the tread shoulder and the     depart significantly from the norm      assigned to this tire is based on
maximum section width. For             due to variations in driving habits,    straight-ahead braking traction tests,
example:                               service practices, and differences in   and does not include acceleration,
  Treadwear 200                        road characteristics and climate.       cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
  Traction AA                                                                  traction characteristics.
  Temperature A




                                                                                                                        Technical Information
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.




                                                                                                                 341
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Temperature A, B, C                       Warning: The temperature grade for
The temperature grades are A (the         this tire is established for a tire that
highest), B, and C, representing the      is properly inflated and not
tire’s resistance to the generation of    overloaded. Excessive speed,
heat, and its ability to dissipate heat   underinflation, or excessive loading,
when tested under controlled              either separately or in combination,
conditions on a specified indoor          can cause heat buildup and possible
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high     tire failure.
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade
C corresponds to a level of
performance that all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.




342
                                                                                                   Tire Labeling

The tires that came on your vehicle       16     Rim diameter in inches.          2202   Date of manufacture.
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described      94     Load index (a numerical code     Maximum Tire Pressure
below.                                           associated with the maximum      Max Press   The maximum air
                                                 load the tire can carry).                    pressure the tire can
Tire Size                                                                                     hold.
Whenever tires are replaced, they         V      Speed symbol (an
should be replaced with tires of the             alphabetical code indicating     Maximum Tire Load
same size. Following is an example               the maximum speed rating).       Max Load    The maximum load the
of tire size with an explanation of                                                           tire can carry at
what each component means.                Tire Identification Number                          maximum air pressure.
                                          The tire identification number (TIN)
            P215/50R17 93V                is a group of numbers and letters
                                          that look like the following example
P      Vehicle type (P indicates          TIN.
       passenger vehicle).                       DOT B97R FW6X 2202

225    Tire width in millimeters.         DOT      This indicates that the tire




                                                                                                                       Technical Information
                                                   meets all requirements of
55     Aspect ratio (the tire’s section            the U.S. Department of
       height as a percentage of its               Transportation.
       width).
                                          B97R       Manufacturer’s
R      Tire construction code (R                     identification mark.
       indicates radial).
                                          FW6X       Tire type code.

                                                                                                                 343
Emissions Controls

The burning of gasoline in your         The Clean Air Act                     intake manifold. They are then
vehicle’s engine produces several by-   The United States Clean Air Act       drawn into the engine and burned.
products. Some of these are carbon      sets standards for automobile
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen       emissions. It also requires that      Evaporative Emissions Control
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).           automobile manufacturers explain to   System
Gasoline evaporating from the tank      owners how their emissions controls   As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
also produces hydrocarbons. Con-        work and what to do to maintain       tank, an evaporative emissions
trolling the production of NOx, CO,     them. This section summarizes how     control canister filled with charcoal
and HC is important to the environ-     the emissions controls work.          adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
ment. Under certain conditions of                                             canister while the engine is off. After
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC          In Canada, Acura vehicles comply    the engine is started and warmed up,
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’   with the Canadian emission            the vapor is drawn into the engine
Carbon monoxide does not contri-        requirements, as specified in an      and burned during driving.
bute to smog creation, but it is a      agreement with Environment
poisonous gas.                          Canada, at the time they are          Onboard Refueling Vapor
                                        manufactured.                         Recovery
                                                                              The onboard refueling vapor
                                        Crankcase Emissions Control           recovery (ORVR) system captures
                                        System                                the fuel vapors during refueling. The
                                        Your vehicle has a positive           vapors are adsorbed in a canister
                                        crankcase ventilation system. This    filled with activated carbon. While
                                        keeps gasses that build up in the     driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
                                        engine’s crankcase from going into    into the engine and burned off.
                                        the atmosphere. The positive
                                        crankcase ventilation valve routes
                                        them from the crankcase back to the

344
                                                                                           Emissions Controls

Exhaust Emissions Controls               under all operating conditions.        Replacement Parts
The exhaust emissions controls                                                  The emissions control systems are
include three systems: PGM-FI,           Ignition Timing Control System         designed and certified to work
ignition timing control, and three       This system constantly adjusts the     together in reducing emissions to
way catalytic converter. These three     ignition timing, reducing the amount   levels that comply with the Clean Air
systems work together to control the     of HC, CO, and NOx produced.           Act. To make sure the emissions
engine’s combustion and minimize                                                remain low, you should use only new
the amount of HC, CO, and NOx that       Three Way Catalytic Converter          Acura replacement parts or their
comes out the tailpipe. The exhaust      The three way catalytic converter is   equivalent for repairs. Using lower
emissions control systems are            in the exhaust system. Through         quality parts may increase the
separate from the crankcase and          chemical reactions, it converts HC,    emissions from your vehicle.
evaporative emissions control            CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
systems.                                 to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen      The emissions control systems are
                                         (N2), and water vapor.                 covered by warranties separate from
PGM-FI System                                                                   the rest of your vehicle. Read your
The PGM-FI system uses sequential                                               warranty manual for more informa-
multiport fuel injection. It has three                                          tion.
subsystems: air intake, engine




                                                                                                                        Technical Information
control, and fuel control. The
powertrain control module (PCM) in
automatic transmission vehicles or
the engine control module (ECM) in
manual transmission vehicles uses
various sensors to determine how
much air is going into the engine. It
then controls how much fuel to inject

                                                                                                                 345
Three Way Catalytic Converter

The three way catalytic converter                                                  Keep the engine tuned-up.
contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical                                                   Have your vehicle diagnosed and
reactions to convert the exhaust                                                   repaired if it is misfiring, back-
gasses without affecting the metals.                                               firing, stalling, or otherwise not
The catalytic converter is referred to                                             running properly.
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Acura part
or its equivalent.

The three way catalytic converter         THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take       A defective three way catalytic
place. It can set on fire any            converter contributes to air pollution,
combustible materials that come          and can impair your engine’s per-
near it. Park your vehicle away from     formance. Follow these guidelines to
high grass, dry leaves, or other         protect your vehicle’s three way
flammables.                              catalytic converter.

                                           Always use unleaded gasoline.
                                           Even a small amount of leaded
                                           gasoline can contaminate the
                                           catalyst metals, making the three
                                           way catalytic converter ineffective.


346
                                                                                     State Emissions Testing

Testing of Readiness Codes               If the testing facility determines that   Without touching the accelerator
If you take your vehicle for a state     the readiness codes are not set, you      pedal, start the engine, and let it
emissions test shortly after the         will be requested to return at a later    idle for 20 seconds.
battery has been disconnected or         date to complete the test. If you must
gone dead, it may not pass the test.     get the vehicle retested within the       Keep the vehicle in Park
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness   next two or three days, you can           (automatic transmission) or
codes’’ that must be set in the on-      condition the vehicle for retesting by    Neutral (manual transmission).
board diagnostics for the emissions      doing the following.                      Increase the engine speed to 2,000
systems. These codes are erased                                                    rpm, and hold it there until the
when the battery is disconnected,          Make sure the gas tank is nearly,       temperature gauge rises to at least
and set again only after several days      but not completely, full (around        1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).
of driving under a variety of              3/4).
conditions.
                                           Make sure the vehicle has been
                                           parked with the engine off for 6
                                           hours or more.

                                           Make sure the ambient




                                                                                                                         Technical Information
                                           temperature is between 40° and
                                           95°F.




                                                                                                           CONTINUED


                                                                                                                   347
State Emissions Testing

 Select a nearby lightly traveled           Then drive in city/suburban
 major highway where you can                traffic for at least 10 minutes.
 maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph           When traffic conditions allow, let
 (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20            the vehicle coast for several
 minutes. Drive on the highway in           seconds without using the
 D (A/T) or 6th (M/T). Do not use           accelerator pedal or the brake
 the cruise control. When traffic           pedal.
 allows, drive for 90 seconds
 without moving the accelerator             Stop the vehicle, turn off the
 pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary             ignition switch, and leave it off for
 slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot     30 minutes.
 do this for a continuous 90
 seconds because of traffic               If the testing facility determines the
 conditions, drive for at least 30        readiness codes are still not set, see
 seconds, then repeat it two more         your dealer.
 times (for a total of 90 seconds).




348
Warranty and Customer Relations

      Customer Service Information..... 350
      Warranty Coverages ..................... 351
      Reporting Safety Defects
        (U.S. Vehicle) ............................. 352
      Authorized Manuals ...................... 353




                                                           Warranty and Customer Relations
                                                  349
Customer Service Information

Acura dealership personnel are          U.S. Owners:                      In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
trained professionals. They should      American Honda Motor Co., Inc.    Islands:
be able to answer all your questions.   Acura Client Services
If you encounter a problem that your    Mail Stop 500-2N-7E                         Vortex Motor Corp.
dealership does not solve to your       1919 Torrance Blvd.                         Bella International
satisfaction, please discuss it with    Torrance, CA 90501-2746                       P.O. Box 190816
the dealership’s management. The                                                 San Juan, PR 00919-0816
service manager or general manager      Tel: (800) 382-2238                       Tel:
can help. Almost all problems are                                                   Tel: (787) 620-7028
solved in this way.                     Canadian Owners:
                                        CUSTOMER RELATIONS                When you call or write, please give
If you are dissatisfied with the        RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE       us this information:
decision made by the dealership’s         Honda Canada Inc.
management, contact the Acura             715 Milner Avenue                 Vehicle Identification Number
Customer Service Office.                  Toronto, ON                       (see page 260 )
                                          M1B 2K8                           Name and address of the dealer
                                                                            who services your vehicle
                                          Tel: 1-888-9-ACURA-9              Date of purchase
                                          Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909     Mileage on your vehicle
                                               Toronto (416) 287-4776       Your name, address, and tele-
                                                                            phone number
                                                                            A detailed description of the
                                                                            problem
                                                                            Name of the dealer who sold the
                                                                            vehicle to you


350
                                                                                          Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners                            Seat Belt Limited Warranty       a seat   Replacement Battery Limited
Your new vehicle is covered by these   belt that fails to function properly is   Warranty   provides prorated
warranties:                            covered for the useful life of the        coverage for a replacement battery
                                       vehicle.                                  purchased from your dealer.
New Vehicle Limited Warranty




                                                                                                                          Warranty and Customer Relations
covers your new vehicle, except for    Rust Perforation Limited Warranty         Replacement Muffler Lifetime
the battery, emissions control            all exterior body panels are           Limited Warranty   provides
systems, and accessories, against      covered for rust-through from the         coverage for as long as the pur-
defects in materials and               inside for the specified time period      chaser of the muffler owns the
workmanship.                           with no mileage limit.                    vehicle.

Emissions Control Systems Defects      Accessory Limited Warranty                Restrictions and exclusions apply to
Warranty and Emissions                 Acura accessories are covered under       all these warranties. Please read the
Performance Warranty    these two      this warranty. Time and mileage           2006 Acura Warranty Information
warranties cover your vehicle’s        limits depend on the type of              booklet that came with your vehicle
emissions control systems. Time,       accessory and other factors. Please       for precise information on warranty
mileage, and coverage are              read your warranty manual for             coverages. Your vehicle’s original
conditional. Please read your          details.                                  tires are covered by their
warranty booklet for exact                                                       manufacturer. Tire warranty
information.                           Replacement Parts Limited                 information is in a separate booklet.
                                       Warranty   covers all Acura
Original Equipment Battery Limited     replacement parts against defects in      Canadian Owners
Warranty    this warranty gives up     materials and workmanship.                Please refer to the 2006 warranty
to 100 % credit toward a replacement                                             manual that came with your vehicle.
battery.


                                                                                                                    351
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

If you believe that your vehicle has a   If NHTSA receives similar com-           To contact NHTSA, you may call the
defect which could cause a crash or      plaints, it may open an investigation,   Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
could cause injury or death, you         and if it finds that a safety defect     1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
should immediately inform the            exists in a group of vehicles, it may    go to http://www.safercar.gov; or
                                                                                  write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
National Highway Traffic Safety          order a recall and remedy campaign.      Seventh Street, SW., Washington,
Administration (NHTSA), in addition      However, NHTSA cannot become             DC 20590.
to notifying American Honda Motor        involved in individual problems          You can also obtain other
Co., Inc.                                between you, your dealer, or             information about motor vehicle
                                         American Honda Motor Co., Inc.           safety from http://www.safercar.gov.




352
                                                                                                                       Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)                                   Valid only for sales within the United States. Canadian
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm                             owners should contact their authorized Acura dealer.
Incorporated. You can order in any of three ways:
    Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this page                             ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
    Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)                                  (NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)
    Go online at www. helminc. com                                                               Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.                               MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00
at 1-800-782-4356.                                                                                                  OR
  Publication                     Form Description                        Price     By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can
 Form Number                                                             Each       pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to
   61SEA02            2004-2006 Acura TSX Service Manual                 $75.00     Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.
  61SEA02EL                   2004-2006 Acura TSX                        $50.00




                                                                                                                                                                   Authorized Manuals
                       Electrical Troubleshooting Manual                                                         VEHICLE MODEL                    Price    Total
                                                                                          PUBLICATION NUMBER                            Qty
    61SEA30         2004-2006 Acura TSX Body Repair Manual               $44.00                                    Name          Year             Each     Price
   31SEA620             2006 Acura TSX Owner’s Manual                    $37.00
   31SEA720               2006 Acura TSX Navigation                      $29.00
                            System Owner’s Manual
   31SEA920           2006 Acura TSX Maintenance Journal                 $12.00
   31SEAQ20            2006 Acura TSX Quick Start Guide                  $12.00
     ACU-R               Order Form for Previous Years-                   FREE
                        Indicate Year and Model Desired                                Prices are subject to change without             TOTAL MATERIAL

    Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation.     notice and without incurring obligation.
                                                                                                                                        Mich. Purchases
                                                                                                                                        Add 6% Sales Tax

                                                                                      Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please          HANDLING CHARGE    $6.95

                                                                                      allow adequate time for delivery.
                                                                                                                                        GRAND TOTAL


                                                                                                                                                   CONTINUED
                                                                                                                                                            353
Authorized Manuals

             NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,                              Service Manual:
             and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should
             be sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown                         This manual covers maintenance and recommended
             below for a quotation.                                                                          procedures for repair to engine and chassis components.
                                                                                                             It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simple
                                                                                                             enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-
                                                                                                             stand.
              Customer Name                                          Attention


                                                                                                             Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
              Street Address   No P.O. Box Number                    Apartment Number
                                                                                                             This manual complements the service manual by
                                                                                                             providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each
              City                                                   State & Zip Code                        electrical circuit in your vehicle.
              Daytime Telephone Number     (           )
                                                                                                             Body Repair Manual:
                                                                                                             This manual describes the procedures involved in the
                     Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc    U.S. funds only.                   replacement of damaged body parts.
                     Do not send cash


                     Master              VISA              Check here if your billing address is different
                     Card                                  from the shipping address shown above.

             Account Number                                                           Expiration: Mo. Yr.




                           CUSTOMER SIGNATURE                            DATE

 These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14
 days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.


                        P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356


354
                                                                                                                                                                  Index

   A                                                       Automatic Transmission............... 244                    Bulb Replacement ..................... 295
                                                             Capacity, Fluid ........................... 338            Fluid ............................................ 288
Accessories..................................... 234         Checking Fluid Level ................ 285                  Parking ........................................ 151
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key                                      Sequential SportShift Mode ..... 246                       System Indicator .......................... 63
  Position) ...................................... 127       Shifting ........................................ 244      System Message .......................... 83
Accessory Power Socket .............. 156                    Shift Lever Position Indicator .. 244                      Wear Indicators ......................... 252
Additives, Engine Oil..................... 279               Shift Lever Positions ................. 244              Braking Fluid Low Message .......... 79
Adjusting the Sound ...................... 175               Shift Lock Release ..................... 249             Braking System.............................. 252
Adjust Outside Temp. Display ....... 95                    Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 184           Break-in, New Vehicle .................. 228
Airbag (SRS) .................................... 11                                                                  Brightness Control,
Airbag System Components ........... 25                       B                                                         Instruments ................................ 122
Air Conditioning............................. 160                                                                     Brights, Headlights ....................... 120
  Usage .......................................... 162     Battery                                                    Bulb Replacement
Air Pressure, Tires ........................ 304             Charging System                                            Brake Lights............................... 295
Alcohol in Gasoline ........................ 228                Indicator............................ 62, 324           Fog Lights .................................. 298
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)                                       Message ........................................ 83        Front Parking Lights ................. 294
  Indicator ................................ 66, 253         Jump Starting ............................. 319            Headlights .................................. 291
  Message ........................................ 82        Maintenance ............................... 309            High-mount Brake Light .......... 297
  Operation .................................... 253         Specifications ............................. 339           Specifications ............................. 339
Anti-theft, Audio System............... 201                Before Driving ............................... 227           Turn Signal Lights............. 293, 295
Anti-theft Steering Column                                 Belts, Seat ......................................... 10   Bulbs, Halogen ............................... 291
  Lock ............................................. 127   Beverage Holders .......................... 156
Audio System ................................. 170         Booster Seats ................................... 53




                                                                                                                                                                                 INDEX
Automatic Lighting Off ................. 121               Brakes
Automatic Seat Belt Tensionners .. 23                        Anti-lock System (ABS) ............ 253
                                                             Break-in, New Linings .............. 228                                                       CONTINUED


                                                                                                                                                                            I
Index

     C                                                     Check Engine Oil Level                                     Consumer Information.................. 350
                                                             Message ........................................ 81      Controls, Instruments and .............. 59
Capacities Chart............................. 338          Checklist, Before Driving ............. 240                Coolant
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 56                   Check Transmission Message ....... 82                        Adding ......................................... 283
Carrying Cargo ................................ 23         Check VSA System Message ......... 81                        Checking ..................................... 232
CAUTION, Explanation of ............... ii                 Child Safety ...................................... 37       Proper Solution .......................... 233
CD Care .......................................... 194       Booster Seats ............................... 53           Temperature Gauge .................... 68
CD Changer.................................... 185           Child Seats .................................... 45      Crankcase Emissions Control
CD Error Message ........................ 193                Important Safety Reminders ...... 37                       System......................................... 344
Center Pocket ................................ 155           Infants ........................................... 42   Cruise Control Message ................. 84
Certification Label ......................... 336            Larger Children ........................... 52           Cruise Control Operation ............. 204
Chains ............................................. 308     LATCH.......................................... 47       Cruise Main Indicator ............. 66, 204
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 313               Risk with Airbag .......................... 38           Cup Holders.................................... 156
Changing Oil                                                 Small Children.............................. 43          Customer Service Office .............. 350
  How to ......................................... 280       Tethers.......................................... 50     Customized Settings........................ 85
  When to....................................... 266         Where Should a Child Sit ....... 38                        Door · Window Setup ................ 109
Charging System Indicator .... 62, 324                     Childproof Door Locks ................. 129                  Lighting Setup............................ 105
  Message ........................................ 83      Child Seats ........................................ 37      Meter Setup .................................. 92
Check ABS System Message ......... 82                        Lower Anchorage Points ............ 47                     Position Setup ............................ 103
Check Airbag System Message ..... 82                         Tether Anchorage Points ........... 50                     Setting to Default ......................... 89
Check Brake System Message ...... 83                       Climate Control Sensors ............... 169                  Wiper Setup ................................ 116
Check Charging System                                      Clock, Setting the .......................... 202
  Message ........................................ 83      Clutch Fluid .................................... 289
Check DRL System Message ........ 84                       Cold Weather, Starting in ............. 241
Check Emission System                                      Compact Spare Tire....................... 312
  Message ........................................ 83      Console Compartment .................. 157

II
                                                                                                                                                                 Index

   D                                                      Driver ID ........................................... 85   Emergency Towing ....................... 328
                                                          Driving ............................................ 239   Emergency Trank Opener ........... 136
DANGER, Explanation of ................. ii                 Economy ..................................... 233        Emissions Controls........................ 344
Dashboard .................................... 4, 60      Driving Position                                           Emissions Testing, State .............. 347
Daytime Running Lights............... 121                   Memory System......................... 142               Engine
Default All......................................... 89   Dual Temperature Control ........... 167                     Coolant Temperature Gauge ..... 68
Defects, Reporting Safety............. 352                Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 300               If It Won’t Start .......................... 317
Defogger, Rear Window ............... 123                                                                              Malfunction Indicator
Dimensions ..................................... 338         E                                                            Lamp ....................................... 324
Dimming the Headlights .............. 120                                                                              Oil Life Display .......................... 266
Dipstick                                                  Economy, Fuel ............................... 233            Oil Pressure Indicator ............... 323
  Automatic Transmission........... 285                   Elap. Time Reset Condition............ 99                    Oil, What Kind to Use ............... 278
  Engine Oil ................................... 232      Emergencies on the Road............. 311                     Overheating................................ 321
Directional Signals......................... 120            Battery, Jump Starting .............. 319                  Specifications ............................. 339
Disc Brake Wear Indicators ......... 252                    Brake System Indicator ............ 326                    Speed Limiter ..................... 243, 249
Disposal of Used Oil ...................... 281             Changing a Flat Tire ................. 313                 Starting........................................ 241
Doors                                                       Charging System Indicator ...... 324                     Engine Speed Limiter
  Locking and Unlocking ............. 128                   Checking the Fuses................... 330                  A/T .............................................. 243
  Lockout Prevention ................... 129                Hazard Warning Flashers ........ 123                       M/T ............................................. 249
  And Trunk Open .................... 13, 78                Low Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 323                    Ethanol in Gasoline ....................... 228
  Power Door Lock....................... 128                Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 324                      Evaporative Emissions Controls .. 344
  Door Lock Mode........................ 110                Manually Closing Moonroof .... 326                       Exhaust Fumes ................................ 56




                                                                                                                                                                                INDEX
DOT Tire Quality Grading ........... 341                    Overheated Engine ................... 321                Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
Downshifting, 6-speed Manual                                Towing ........................................ 328        Belts by ......................................... 19
  Transmission .............................. 242         Emergency Brake .......................... 151
Driver and Passenger Safety ............ 7                Emergency Flashers ..................... 123                                                     CONTINUED


                                                                                                                                                                         III
Index

   F                                                            Fill Door and Cap....................... 229               Gearshift Lever Positions
                                                                Gauge ............................................ 68        Automatic Transmission........... 244
Fan, Interior.................................... 164           Low Fuel Indicator ...................... 66                 Manual Transmission ............... 242
Fasten Seat Belt Message .............. 78                      Low Message ............................... 80             Glove Box ....................................... 158
Features .......................................... 159         Octane Requirement ................. 228
Filling the Fuel Tank ..................... 229                 Tank, Filling the......................... 229                H
Filter                                                          Tighten Fuel Cap ......................... 80
   Dust and Pollen .......................... 300             Fuses, Checking the ...................... 330               Halogen Headlight Bulbs.............. 291
   Oil ................................................ 280                                                                Hands Free LinkTM ......................... 211
Flashers, Hazard Warning............ 123                         G                                                         Hazard Warning Flashers............. 123
Flat Tire, Changing a .................... 313                                                                             Headlights ...................................... 120
Floor Mats ...................................... 299         Gas Mileage, Improving................ 233                     Aiming ......................................... 291
Fluids                                                        Gasoline .......................................... 228        Automatic Lighting Off ............. 121
   Automatic Transmission........... 285                        Gauge ............................................ 68        Auto Off Timer .......................... 107
   Brake ........................................... 288        Low Fuel Indicator ...................... 66                 Daytime Running Lights .......... 121
   Clutch .......................................... 289        Octane Requirement ................. 228                     High Beam Indicator ................... 66
   Manual Transmission ............... 287                      Tank, Filling the......................... 229               Low Beams, Turning on ........... 120
   Power Steering........................... 289              Gas Station Procedures................. 229                    Reminder Chime........................ 120
   Windshield Washer ................... 282                  Gauges                                                         Replacing Halogen Bulbs ......... 291
Fog Lights ...................................... 121           Engine Coolant Temperature .... 68                           Turning on .................................. 120
Folding Rear Seat .......................... 140                Fuel ................................................ 68   Head Restraints ............................. 139
Four-way Flashers ......................... 123                 Speedometer ................................ 68            Heated Mirror ................................ 146
Front Airbags ................................... 28            Tachometer .................................. 68           Heated Seat .................................... 137
Front Wiper Action........................ 116                GAWR (Gross Axle Weight                                      High Altitude, Starting at .............. 241
Fuel .................................................. 228     Rating) ........................................ 258       HomeLink Universal
   Cap Message ................................ 79                                                                           Transceiver................................. 207

IV
                                                                                                                                                                    Index

Hood, Opening and Closing the ... 230                        Security System ........................... 67               J
Horn ............................................ 5, 118     Side Airbag Off ............................ 64
Hydraulic Clutch ............................ 289            SRS ................................................ 63   Jacking up the Vehicle .................. 314
                                                             System Message .......................... 67              Jack, Tire ........................................ 313
   I                                                         Turn Signal and Hazard                                    Jump Starting ................................. 319
                                                                Warning .................................... 65
Identification Number, Vehicle.... 336                       VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist)                               K
Ignition                                                        Activation .................................. 65
  Keys............................................. 125      VSA System .................................. 65          Keyless Lock
  Switch .......................................... 127    Indicators, Instrument Panel .......... 62                    Acknowledgement ..................... 112
  Timing Control System ............. 345                  Infant Restraint ................................ 42        Keys ................................................. 125
Immobilizer System....................... 126              Infant Seats ....................................... 42
Important Safety Precautions .......... 8                    Tether Anchorage Points ........... 50                       L
Indicators .......................................... 61   INFO Button..................................... 70
  ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) .. 66                       INFO Knob ....................................... 70        Label, Certification ........................ 336
  Brake (Parking and Brake                                 Inflation, Proper Tire .................... 303             Lane Change, Signaling ................ 120
     System) ..................................... 63      Inside Mirror .................................. 145        Language Selection ......................... 93
  Charging System ......................... 62             Inspection, Tire .............................. 305         Lap/Shoulder Belts ......................... 22
  Cruise Main .................................. 66        Installing a Child Seat ..................... 46            Lights
  DRL (Daytime Running                                       Tether Anchorage Points ........... 50                      Bulb Replacement ..................... 291
     Lights)....................................... 66       Using LATCH .............................. 47               Indicator ........................................ 61
  High Beam.................................... 66         Instrument Panel ............................. 61             Parking ........................................ 297
  Key (Immobilizer System) ......... 64                    Instrument Panel Brightness ....... 122                       Turn Signal ................... 65, 293, 295




                                                                                                                                                                                    INDEX
  Low Fuel ....................................... 66      Interior Lights ................................ 153        Load Limits..................................... 257
  Low Oil Pressure ......................... 62            Interior Light Dimming Time ...... 105
  Passenger Airbag Off .................. 35               Introduction ......................................... i                                            CONTINUED


                                                                                                                                                                              V
Index

LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ..... 127                   Manual Transmission Fluid ......... 287                   Change, When to ....................... 266
Locks                                                    Memory, Driving Position ............ 142                 Checking Engine ....................... 232
  Anti-theft Steering Column ...... 127                  Memory Position Link .................. 103               Pressure Indicator ............... 62, 323
  Childproof Door ......................... 129          Messages, System ........................... 76           Pressure Message ....................... 81
  Fuel Fill Door ............................. 229       Meters, Gauges ................................ 68        Selecting Proper Viscosity
  Glove Box ................................... 158      Mirrors, Adjusting ......................... 146             Chart ....................................... 279
  Lockout Prevention ................... 129             Modifications.................................. 235      ON (Ignition Key Position) .......... 127
  Power Door ................................ 128        Moonroof ........................................ 150    Onboard Refueling Vapor
  Trunk .......................................... 135    Closing Manually ....................... 327             Recovery ..................................... 344
Low Coolant Level ......................... 232           Operation .................................... 150      Outside Mirrors ............................. 146
Low Fuel Indicator .......................... 66         Multi-Information Display .............. 69              Outside Temperature ...................... 73
Lower Gear, Downshifting to a.... 242                                                                             Overheating, Engine ..................... 321
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ............ 62                  N                                                     Owner Maintenance Checks ........ 273
Lubricant Specifications Chart .... 338
Luggage, Storing ........................... 236         Neutral Gear Position.................... 245               P
                                                         New Vehicle Break-in ................... 228
   M                                                     Normal Shift Speeds...................... 243            Panel Brightness Control ............. 122
                                                         NOTICE, Explanation of .................... i            Park Gear Position......................... 245
Maintenance ................................... 263      Numbers, Identification ................ 336             Parking Brake ................................ 151
 Owner Maintenance Checks.... 273                                                                                 Parking Brake and Brake System
 Main Items ................................. 274           O                                                         Indicator .................................... 63
 Minder......................................... 266                                                                Message ........................................ 83
 Record ......................................... 275    Octane Requirement, Gasoline .... 228                    Parking Lights................................ 120
 Safety........................................... 264   Odometer .......................................... 68   Parking Over Things that Burn ... 346
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .. 62, 324                    Oil                                                      Parking Tips ................................... 251
Manual Transmission.................... 342                Change, How to ......................... 280

VI
                                                                                                                                                                Index

Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ..... 35                  Rear Lights,                                                  S
Passenger Side Airbag Off                                  Bulb Replacement ............. 295, 296
     Indicator .................................... 64   Rear Seat, Folding ......................... 140           Safety Belts....................................... 10
  Message ........................................ 81    Rear View Mirror........................... 145            Safety Defects, Reporting............. 352
PGM-FI System.............................. 345          Rear Window Defogger ................ 123                  Safety Features .................................. 9
Pollen Filter .................................... 300   Reclining the Seat Backs .............. 138                  Airbags .......................................... 11
Power Door Lock ........................... 128          Recommended Shift Speeds ........ 242                        Seat Belts ...................................... 10
Power Socket Locations................ 156               Release Parking Lever Message ... 78                       Safety Labels, Location of .............. 57
Power Windows ............................. 147          Reminder Indicators ........................ 62            Safety Messages ................................ ii
Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .......... 19                Remote Transmitter ...................... 130              Satellite Digital Radio .................... 179
Primary Disp Selection ................. 101             Remove Key Message..................... 79                 Seat Belts .......................................... 10
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 13                 Replacement Information                                      Additional Information ................ 21
  Additional Safety Precautions .... 20                    Engine Oil and Filter ................. 280                Automatic Seat Belt
  Advice for Pregnant Women...... 19                       Fuses ........................................... 330         Tensioners ................................ 23
Protecting Children ......................... 37           Light Bulbs ................................. 291          Cleaning ...................................... 299
Protecting Infants and Small                               Minder......................................... 266        Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 22
  Children ........................................ 42     Tires ............................................ 306     Maintenance ................................. 24
Protecting Larger Children ............ 52                 Wiper Blades .............................. 301            Reminder Indicator and
  Using Booster Seat ...................... 53           Replacing Seat Belts After a                                    Beeper ................................. 21, 62
                                                           Crash ............................................. 24     System Components.................... 21
    R                                                    Reserve Tank, Coolant .................. 283                 Use During Pregnancy................ 19
                                                         Restraint, Child ................................ 37         Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt .... 22
Radiator Overheating .................... 321            Reverse Gear Position................... 245               Seat Heaters ................................... 137




                                                                                                                                                                               INDEX
Radio/CD Sound                                           Reverse Lockout ............................ 243           Seat Position Memory ................... 142
  System......................................... 170    Rotation, Tire ................................. 306
Readiness Codes .................... 325, 347                                                                                                             CONTINUED


                                                                                                                                                                       VII
Index

Seats, Adjusting the....................... 138           Spare Tire                                                Steam Coming from Engine ......... 321
Security System ............................. 203           Inflating ....................................... 312   Steering Wheel
  Indicator ........................................ 67     Specifications ............................. 340          Adjustment ................................. 124
Security Relock Timer .................. 114              Specifications Charts..................... 338              Anti-theft Column Lock .............. 12
Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 45          Speed Limiter ......................... 243, 249          Storing Your Vehicle ..................... 310
Select/Reset Button ........................ 72           Speedometer .................................... 68       Sun Visor......................................... 152
Serial Number ................................ 336        Spotlights ........................................ 153   Sunglasses Holder ......................... 158
Service Manual .............................. 353         SRS, Additional Information........... 25                 Supplemental Restraint
Service Station Procedure ............ 229                  Additional Safety Precautions .... 36                        System................................. 11, 25
Setting the Clock ........................... 202           Airbag Service .............................. 35          Servicing ....................................... 35
Sequential SportShift Mode ......... 246                    How Your SRS Indicator                                    SRS Indicator.......................... 34, 63
Shift Lever Position Indicator ...... 244                      Works ........................................ 34      System Components.................... 25
Shift Lock Release ......................... 249            How Your Front Airbags                                  Synthetic Oil ................................... 279
Side Airbags ............................... 11, 32            Work.......................................... 28    System Message Indicator ............. 67
  How Your Side Airbags Work.... 32                         How Your Side Airbags
  How the Side Airbag Off                                      Work.......................................... 32       T
     Indicator Works ....................... 34             SRS Components ......................... 25
Side Curtain Airbags ................. 11, 33               SRS Service................................... 35       Tachometer ...................................... 68
  How Your Side Curtain                                   SRS Indicator.............................. 34, 63        Taillights, Changing Bulbs in ....... 295
     Airbags Work ........................... 33            Message ........................................ 82     Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 311
Side Marker Lights, Bulb                                  START (Ignition Key Position) ... 127                     Technical Descriptions
  Replacement in .................. 294, 295              Starting the Engine........................ 241             DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 341
Signaling Turns .............................. 120          In Cold Weather at High                                   Emissions Control Systems ...... 344
Snow Tires ...................................... 307          Altitude ................................... 241       Three Way Catalytic
Sound System ................................. 175          With a Dead Battery ................. 319                    Converter ................................ 346
                                                          State Emissions Testing ............... 347               Temperature Gauge ........................ 68

VIII
                                                                                                                                                                      Index

Temperature, Inside Sensor ......... 169                       Equipment and Accessories ..... 259                       Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..... 341
Temperature, Outside ..................... 73                  Weight Limit .............................. 257           Unleaded Gasoline......................... 228
Tether Anchorage Points ............... 50                   Transmission                                                Upholstery Cleaning...................... 299
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 346                          Checking Fluid Level,                                     Used Oil, How to Dispose of ........ 281
Tighten Fuel Cap Message ............ 79                          Automatic ............................... 285
Tilt/Telescopic Steering Wheel .. 124                          Checking Fluid Level,                                        V
Time, Setting the ........................... 202                 Manual .................................... 287
Tire Chains ..................................... 308          Fluid Selection ........... 286, 287, 288                 Vanity Mirror ................................. 152
Tire, How to Change a Flat .......... 313                      Identification Number ............... 336                 Vehicle Capacity Load .................. 237
Tire Labeling .................................. 343           Shifting the Automatic .............. 244                 Vehicle Dimensions....................... 338
Tires ................................................ 302     Shifting the Manual ................... 242               Vehicle Identification Number..... 336
  Air Pressure ............................... 304           Treadwear ...................................... 341        Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
  Chains ......................................... 308       Trip A & AVG. Fuel Reset with                                   System..................................... 255
  Checking Wear .......................... 305                 Refuel ............................................ 97      Activation Indicator ................... 255
  Compact Spare ........................... 312              Trip Meter ........................................ 72        Message ........................................ 81
  DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 341                       Trunk............................................... 135      Off Switch ................................... 256
  Inflation ....................................... 303        Emergency Opener ................... 136                    System Indicator ........................ 255
  Inspection ................................... 305           Main Switch ................................ 136          Vehicle Storage .............................. 310
  Replacing .................................... 306           Opening the ................................ 135          VIN .................................................. 336
  Rotating....................................... 306          Open Monitor ............................... 78           Viscosity, Oil................................... 279
  Snow ............................................ 307      Turn Signals ................................... 120
  Specifications ............................. 338                                                                          W
Tools, Tire Changing .................... 313                   U




                                                                                                                                                                                      INDEX
Towing                                                                                                                   WARNING, Explanation of .............. ii
  A Trailer ...................................... 257       Unexpected, Taking Care of
  Emergency Wrecker ................. 328                     the ................................................ 311                                           CONTINUED


                                                                                                                                                                               IX
Index

Warning Labels, Location of .......... 57
Warranty Coverages ..................... 351
Washer, Windshield
 Checking the Fluid Level ......... 282
 Fluid Low Message ..................... 80
 Operation .................................... 119
Wheels
 Adjusting the Steering .............. 124
 Alignment and Balance ............. 305
 Compact Spare ........................... 312
 Wrench ....................................... 313
Windows
 Auto Reverse .............................. 148
 Operating the Power ................. 147
 Rear, Defogger .......................... 123
Windshield
 Cleaning ...................................... 119
 Defroster .................................... 123
 Washers ...................................... 119
Wipers, Windshield
 Changing Blades ........................ 301
 Operation .................................... 119
Worn Tires ..................................... 305
Wrecker, Emergency Towing ...... 328



X
Service Information Summary

Gasoline:                           6-speed Manual Transmission         Tire Pressure (measured cold):
Premium unleaded gasoline,          Fluid:                              Front:
pump octane number of 91 or         Honda Manual Transmission             32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
higher.                             Fluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30   Rear:
                                    or 10W-40 motor oil as a              30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )
Fuel Tank Capacity:                 temporary replacement (see page     Compact Spare Tire:
17.1 US gal (64.7 )                  287 ).                               60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
                                    Capacity:
Recommended Engine Oil:               2.1 US qt (2.0 )
API Premium grade 5W-30
detergent oil (see page 278 ).      Power Steering Fluid:
                                    Honda Power Steering Fluid
Oil change capacity (including      preferred, or another brand of
filter):                            power steering fluid as a
   4.4 US qt (4.2 )                 temporary replacement. Do not
                                    use ATF (see page 290 ).
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic             Brake Fluid:
Transmission Fluid) preferred, or   Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
a DEXRON III ATF as a               DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
temporary replacement (see page     DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
 268 ).                             replacement (see page 288 ).

				
DOCUMENT INFO
Shared By:
Stats:
views:2865
posted:5/2/2011
language:English
pages:370
Description: 2006 Acura TSX Owner's Manual